Service Manual For XL-640 With ISE - v2018.02

Service Manual
For
Automatic Clinical Chemistry Analyzer
Document Version: 2018.02
Last Updated: December 15, 2018
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GmbH, Mallaustrasse 69 - 73, 68219 Mannheim, Germany

Service Manual XL-640
Foreword
This manual is organized in a progressive sequence for easy study and reference. It is an
instructional aide to provide a reference for easy servicing and maintenance of the
analyzer. It contains detailed description of the analyzer features, specifications, PCB
assemblies, wiring diagrams, trouble shooting and replacement procedures.
Use of this manual along with proper training will ensure better serviceability,
maintenance and trouble free analyzer operation with optimum performance.
Before servicing the analyzer, service engineer should:
1. Read and understand this manual.
2. Be trained by authorized person.
3. Be familiar with the operation of the analyzer.
Keep this manual in an easily accessible place.
II
Legal Information
All rights are reserved by manufacturer of this product.
Manufacturer is the copyright owner of this document.
The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notice and without legal
obligation.
This document and the information herein are provided for the sole use of the intended
recipient(s) and for information purposes only.
This document contains contents which are the confidential and proprietary information of
the manufacturer.
This document cannot be modified, reproduced, translated or transmitted in any form or

by any means for any purpose, without prior written permission from the manufacturer.
No part of this document can be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part, without prior
written permission from the manufacturer.
III
Contents
1. Safety Information......................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. Safety Instructions ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.2. Warning Labels.................................................................................................... 1-2
2. Installation Conditions.................................................................................................. 2-1
3. Introduction ................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1. Overview.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.2. Operating Principle .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2.1. Measurement and Photometry ................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry .......................................................................... 3-2
3.3. Sequence of Operation ........................................................................................ 3-3
3.3.1. Measurement Operation Table................................................................................... 3-4
4. Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 4-1
4.1. General Specifications ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2. Installation Conditions.......................................................................................... 4-2
4.3. Sampling Unit ...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4. Reagent Unit........................................................................................................ 4-3
4.5. Reaction Unit ....................................................................................................... 4-4
4.6. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit ................................................................. 4-5
4.7. Data Processing Unit ........................................................................................... 4-6
4.8. Ion Selective Electrodes ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.9. Computer Specifications ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.10. Technical Features of the System ..................................................................... 4-7
4.10.1. Salient Technical Features....................................................................................... 4-7
4.10.2. Other Features ......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.11. Equipment Overview........................................................................................ 4-10
4.11.1. Front View .............................................................................................................. 4-10
4.11.2. Left Side View ........................................................................................................ 4-11
4.11.3. Right Side View ...................................................................................................... 4-12
5. Pre-installation .............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1. Floor Requirements ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2. Electrical Requirements ....................................................................................... 5-1
5.3. Site Requirement ................................................................................................. 5-2
5.3.1. Environmental Requirements ..................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2. External Interferences ................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.3. Proper Room Lighting ................................................................................................ 5-3
6. Installation ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1. Basic Operational Information.............................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1. Procedure to Install XL-640 Analyzer......................................................................... 6-1
6.2. Unpacking the Analyzer ....................................................................................... 6-2
6.3. Inspections and Accessories Checklist ................................................................ 6-4
6.4. Installing the Components of the Analyzer........................................................... 6-7
6.4.1. Installing Sample Tray and Reagent Tray .................................................................. 6-7
6.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous and Waste Cans ................................. 6-8
6.4.3. USB Communication between Computer and Analyzer (New) ................................ 6-12
IV
6.4.4. Serial Communication between Computer and Analyzer (Old)................................ 6-15

6.4.5. Printer Installation (DeskJet or Laser) ...................................................................... 6-16
6.4.6. Power On ................................................................................................................. 6-16
6.4.7. Test Loader Device Connecting to Analyzer PC ...................................................... 6-17
6.5. Software Installation Procedure ......................................................................... 6-23
6.5.1. Overview .................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.5.2. Pre-requisite ............................................................................................................. 6-23
6.5.3. Installing MultiXL Software ....................................................................................... 6-36
6.5.4. Upgrading MultiXL Software..................................................................................... 6-52
6.5.5. Database Utility Options........................................................................................... 6-56
6.5.6. Installing Team Viewer ............................................................................................. 6-65
6.5.7. Accessing MultiXL Software..................................................................................... 6-68
6.5.8. Password Recovery Procedure................................................................................ 6-70
6.5.9. Steps Performed by the Service Engineer ............................................................... 6-71
6.5.10. Main Menu Software Layout................................................................................... 6-72
6.6. Display Language Settings ................................................................................ 6-75
6.7. Installing Touch Screen Monitor ........................................................................ 6-75
7. Relocation ...................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1. Tools and Materials Required for Packing the Analyzer ...................................... 7-2
7.2. Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System..................................................... 7-2
7.3. Packing the Analyzer ........................................................................................... 7-5
7.4. Decontamination Certificate................................................................................. 7-7
8. Functional Description ................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1. Identification of Main Components....................................................................... 8-1
8.2. Functionality......................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.1. Auto Sampler Unit ...................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2. Sample Barcode Reader ............................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.3. Sample Pipette Unit.................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.4. Reagent 1 and 2 Pipette Unit (R1PT and R2PT) ....................................................... 8-5
8.2.5. Reaction Tray (RCT) .................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.6. Reagent Tray (RGT)................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.7. Reagent Barcode Reader........................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.8. RGT Cooling Unit ....................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.9. Photometer Unit ......................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.10. Stirrer Unit ................................................................................................................ 8-8
8.2.11. Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) ..................................................................................... 8-9
8.2.12. Pipetting Pump Assembly (SPP, R1PP and R2PP Syringes) ................................ 8-11
8.2.13. Ion Selective Electrode Unit (ISE) .......................................................................... 8-12
8.2.14. Liquid Level Sensing for Cans (Float Sensors) ...................................................... 8-14
8.3. Test Loader Device............................................................................................ 8-16
9. Electronics Circuit Description .................................................................................... 9-1
9.1. Electronic Description .......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1. Electronic Functional Block Diagram.......................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2. Regulator PCB: ELS22032R1 .................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.3. Isolation Board ELS22030R2 ..................................................................................... 9-6
9.1.4. Opto PCB POS1 ELS22006R3/ R4............................................................................ 9-7
9.1.5. Photometer XL V2 R1 ELS52013R2 .......................................................................... 9-9
9.1.6. LSH PCB ELS62026R0 and LLS PCB ELS52010R4 (OLD).................................... 9-11
9.1.7. New LLS PCB ASSY: ELS22036R2.1 for Sample, R1, R2 Arm Assy ..................... 9-14
V
9.1.8. New LLS PCB ASSY: ELS52023R0 for Sample, R1, R2 Arm Assy ........................ 9-15
9.1.9. Backplane 1 ELS52005R2 ....................................................................................... 9-16
9.1.10. Backplane 2 ELS32010R1 ..................................................................................... 9-18
9.1.11. Interface PCB ELS52016R1................................................................................... 9-21
9.1.12. Interface with ARM PCB ELS52021R2.1 ............................................................... 9-28
9.1.13. CPU PCB Assembly ELS62014 R4 ....................................................................... 9-36
9.1.14. Baseboard 1 ELS52015R2..................................................................................... 9-40
9.1.15. Baseboard 2 ELS52008R4 / ELS52008R5 ............................................................ 9-42
9.1.16. Stirrer PCB ELS32006R6....................................................................................... 9-45
9.1.17. RCT Heater PCB ELS52004R2 ............................................................................. 9-46
9.1.18. Motor Drive ELS52002R6.1 ................................................................................... 9-47
9.1.19. Motor Drive ELS52002R5 ...................................................................................... 9-49
9.1.20. Motor Drive ELS52002R4 ...................................................................................... 9-51
9.1.21. DC Drive ELS32004R9 .......................................................................................... 9-53
9.1.22. AC Drive Board ELS32003R1 ................................................................................ 9-55
9.1.23. WGPT Board WGPT04 .......................................................................................... 9-57
9.1.24. PCB Assy Float Sensor ELS22037R1 ................................................................... 9-59
9.1.25. LMPS PCB EL52018R0 ......................................................................................... 9-60
9.1.26. Pump Connector PCB: ELS62004R0..................................................................... 9-61
9.1.27. LMPS Fan Power Supply PCB ELS22001R1 ........................................................ 9-62
9.1.28. Stirrer Motor Indicator ELD52002R3 ...................................................................... 9-63
9.1.29. JTAG Interface PCB ELS62015R2 ........................................................................ 9-63
9.1.30. Clot Detection PCB ELS32015R4 .......................................................................... 9-64
9.1.31. Front Panel Indicator PCB Assy – Bicolor: ELD52003R2 ...................................... 9-66
9.1.32. Canmax Support PCB: ELS52022R0..................................................................... 9-67
9.1.33. Canmax Support PCB: ELS52022R1..................................................................... 9-68
9.1.34. Auto start up PCB: ELD52005R0/R1/R1.1............................................................. 9-69
9.1.35. Sleep mode PCB: ELS62033R1 ............................................................................ 9-71
9.1.36. Sleep Mode PCB Assembly ELS62033R2............................................................. 9-71
9.1.37. USB Connector ELLC2003R4................................................................................ 9-72
9.2. USB Connector PCB Assembly ELLC2003R6................................................... 9-74
9.3. IoT PCI-E Modem PCB...................................................................................... 9-75
10. Electrical Wiring Description.................................................................................... 10-1
10.1. WDD05003 RGT SMPS (12V/18A, 12V/20A) and Cooling Fan....................... 10-1
10.2. WDS5007 12V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram (without Sleep Mode PCB Assy) ... 10-2
10.3. WDS5007 12V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram (with Sleep Mode PCB Assy) ........ 10-3
10.4. WDS5004 24V/6.3A SMPS Wiring Diagram with LMPS Fan........................... 10-4
10.5. WDS5004 24V/6.3A SMPS Wiring Diagram without LMPS FAN..................... 10-5
10.6. WDS5006 36V/2.8A SMPS Wiring Diagram .................................................... 10-6
10.7. WDS5009 5V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 10-7
10.8. WDS5010 RGT Controller Unit Wiring Diagram .............................................. 10-9
10.8.1. Single Channel ....................................................................................................... 10-9
10.8.2. Dual Channel........................................................................................................ 10-10
10.9. Isolator PCB Wiring Assembly ....................................................................... 10-11
10.9.1. WDS5011 Isolator PCB Wiring Assembly XLRS232............................................ 10-11
10.9.2. WDS5011 Isolator PCB Assy Wiring: XL RS232 / USB Connector PCB Assy .... 10-12
10.10. WDS5013 RCT Heater PCB Wiring Assembly ............................................ 10-13
10.11. R1, R2 and SPT Opto Arm Wiring Diagram................................................. 10-14
10.12. WDS5015 TB3 (24V and 5V) Terminal Block Wiring Assembly................... 10-15
10.13. WDS5016 RCT Slip Ring Assembly ............................................................ 10-16
VI
10.14. WDS5017 RGT, ASP and RCT Tray Opto Assembly .................................. 10-18
10.15. WDS5018 RGT Duct Fan Wiring Diagram................................................... 10-19
10.16. WDS5019 Stirrer 1 and 2 Opto for Arm Assembly ....................................... 10-20
10.17. WDS5020 R1PP, R2PP and SPP Syringe Opto Wiring Diagram ................ 10-21
10.18. WDS5021 CRU1 SN1, SN2 Opto Wiring Diagram ...................................... 10-22
10.19. WDS5022 RCT Heater Wiring Assembly..................................................... 10-23
10.20. WDS5024 Base Board 2 PCB Wiring Assembly.......................................... 10-24
10.21. WDD05001 Wiring Diagram of CANMAX Barcode for ASP......................... 10-25
10.22. Microscan Barcode Scanner........................................................................ 10-26
10.23. WDS5025 Backplane 1 PCB Wiring Assembly............................................ 10-27
10.24. Rear Panel Load cell Connection and Waste Mounting Bracket Led........... 10-28
10.25. Rear Panel Float sensor Connection and LED indication ............................ 10-29
10.26. WDS5028 Interface PCB Wiring Assembly ELS52016R1 ........................... 10-30
10.27. ARM Interface PCB Assembly Wiring .......................................................... 10-31
10.28. WDS5029 RCT Sensor Wiring Assembly .................................................... 10-32
10.29. WDS5030 SPT, R1PT, and R2PT Assembly Wiring and Looping (New) .... 10-33
10.30. SPT, R1PT, R2PT Assembly Wiring and Looping (OLD)............................. 10-34
10.31. SPP, R1PP, R2PP Syringe Wiring Diagram (Sapphire and ITO)................. 10-35
10.31.1. Sapphire Syringe................................................................................................ 10-35
10.31.2. Pulssar Syringe .................................................................................................. 10-35
10.31.3. WDS5031 ITO Syringe....................................................................................... 10-36
10.32. WDS5032 Stirrer 1 and Stirrer 2 Assembly and Looping Diagram ........... 10-37
10.33. WDS5033 CRU Assembly Wiring and Looping Diagram ............................. 10-38
10.34. WDS5026 Backplane 2 PCB Wiring Assembly............................................ 10-39
10.35. WDS5036 Base Board 1 PCB Wiring Assembly.......................................... 10-40
10.36. WDS5037 AC Drive PCB Wiring Assembly ................................................. 10-41
10.37. Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................ 10-42
10.38. WDS5038 Mains Wiring Diagram ................................................................ 10-43
10.39. WDS5039 TX1 Transformer Assembly ........................................................ 10-44
10.42. WDS5044 Rotary Cam Switch Wiring Assembly ......................................... 10-47
10.43. WDS5045 Pressure Tank with Heater Assembly......................................... 10-48
10.44. WDS5047 Regulator PCB Wiring Assembly ................................................ 10-49
10.45. WDS5048 Photometer Lamp PCB Power Supply........................................ 10-50
10.46. WDS5049 Hydraulic Earthing Wiring Assembly........................................... 10-51
10.47. WDS5049 ST10 and FPGA Programming Wiring Diagram ......................... 10-52
10.48. WDS5057 24V/1.1A SMPS and 4 Channel ISE Wiring Assembly ............... 10-53
10.49. WDS5058 Auto Startup PCB Wiring Diagram.............................................. 10-54
10.50. WDS5059 ±15V Regulator PCB Wiring Assembly....................................... 10-55
10.51. WDS5060 SPT Arm Probe Wiring with LLS PCB Assy ELS22036R2.1 ...... 10-56
10.52. WDS5062 R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with LLS PCB Assy ELS22036R2.1.. 10-57
10.53. WDS5063 Probe Interconnection Wiring with LLS PCB ELS52023R0 ....... 10-58
10.54. WDS5064 R1, R2 Probe Assy with ELS52023R0 ....................................... 10-59
10.55. Sleep Mode PCB Wiring Diagram For 220 V AC ......................................... 10-60
10.56. Motor Electrical Assembly............................................................................ 10-62
10.57. RGT Window Heater Assembly ................................................................... 10-63
10.58. WDD05005 Clot Detection PCB Wiring Assembly....................................... 10-64
VII
10.59. Electrical Assy Stirrer 1 & 2 EAS5004 ......................................................... 10-65

10.60. Electrical Assembly BIPPER - FSPXL716 ................................................... 10-65
10.61. Electrical Assembly KEYTO syringe EAS5045 ............................................ 10-66
10.62. Electrical Assembly KEYTO syringe EAS6026 ........................................... 10-66
10.63. Electrical Assy Microscan Barcode EAS5040.............................................. 10-67
10.64. Electrical Assembly SMC VALVE 100V EAS5029....................................... 10-67
10.65. Electrical Assembly RCT Sensor EAS5021 ................................................. 10-68
10.66. Electrical Assembly Vacuum Pump EAS5007 ............................................. 10-68
10.67. Electrical Assembly Motor EAS5003 ........................................................... 10-69
10.68. Electrical Assy Leuze Barcode RGT EAS5046............................................ 10-70
11. Mechanical Description ............................................................................................ 11-1
11.1. Sample, Reagent 1, and 2 Arm Assembly ....................................................... 11-1
11.1.1. Function.................................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2. Components of SPT, R1PT and R2PT Arm Assembly .......................................... 11-1
11.2. Sample (SPP), Reagent 1 (R1PP) and Reagent 2 (R2PP) Syringe Assembly 11-3
11.2.1. Function.................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.2.2. Components of SPP/R1PP/R2PP Syringe Assembly ............................................ 11-3
11.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit Assembly (CRU)............................................................. 11-5
11.3.1. Function.................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.3.2. Components of Cuvette Rinsing Unit Assembly..................................................... 11-5
11.4. Cuvette Mixing Assembly (STR1 and STR2) ................................................... 11-6
11.4.1. Function.................................................................................................................. 11-6
11.4.2. Components of STR1 and STR2 Assembly ........................................................... 11-7
11.5. Auto Sampler Assembly (ASP) ........................................................................ 11-8
11.5.1. Function.................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.5.2. Components of ASP Assembly .............................................................................. 11-8
11.6. Reagent Tray Assembly (RGT)...................................................................... 11-10
11.6.1. Function................................................................................................................ 11-10
11.6.2. Components of RGT Assembly............................................................................ 11-11
11.7. Reaction Cuvette Table Assembly (RCT) ...................................................... 11-12
11.7.1. Function................................................................................................................ 11-12
11.7.2. Components of RCT Assembly ............................................................................ 11-12
11.8. Pressure Tank Assembly ............................................................................... 11-14
11.8.1. Function................................................................................................................ 11-14
11.8.2. Components of Pressure Tank Assembly ............................................................ 11-14
11.9. Level Sensing Platform Assembly ................................................................. 11-15
11.9.1. Function................................................................................................................ 11-15
11.9.2. Components of Level Sensing Platform Assembly .............................................. 11-15
12. Hydraulic Description ............................................................................................... 12-1
12.1. Hydraulic Section............................................................................................. 12-1
12.2. Hydraulic System Operation ............................................................................ 12-3
12.2.1. Valve and Pump Functions .................................................................................... 12-3
12.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit ........................................................................................ 12-4
12.4. Hydraulic Diagram ........................................................................................... 12-5
13. Maintenance............................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1. Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.1. Servicing at Customer Site..................................................................................... 13-1
13.2. Maintenance Intervals...................................................................................... 13-9
VIII
13.2.1. Daily Maintenance.................................................................................................. 13-9

13.2.2. Weekly Maintenance .............................................................................................. 13-9
13.2.3. Quarterly Maintenance ......................................................................................... 13-10
13.2.4. Annual Maintenance............................................................................................. 13-11
13.2.5. Service Technician Quarterly Maintenance Log................................................... 13-12
13.2.6. Service Technician Annual Maintenance Log ...................................................... 13-13
13.2.7. Replacement Schedule for Spares and Consumable .......................................... 13-14
13.3. Actions Taken in the Event of Trouble ........................................................... 13-14
13.3.1. Information Requested by Our Customer Service Department............................ 13-14
13.3.2. Malfunction at the Time of Operation ................................................................... 13-15
13.3.3. Anomalous Measurement Results ....................................................................... 13-15
13.3.4. Check for Preparation of Reagent, Calibrator or QC Sample .............................. 13-16
13.3.5. High Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all Samples ........................... 13-17
13.3.6. Low Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all Samples ............................ 13-17
13.3.7. Randomly Derived Erroneous Measurement Results .......................................... 13-18
13.3.8. Anomalous Resultant Values from all Methods for a Sample .............................. 13-18
13.3.9. Equipment Malfunction......................................................................................... 13-18
13.3.10. Maintenance Menu............................................................................................. 13-72
13.3.11. Auto Startup ....................................................................................................... 13-91
13.3.12. Maintenance Log................................................................................................ 13-94
13.4. Backup........................................................................................................... 13-96
14. Introduction to ISE Module....................................................................................... 14-1
14.1. Four Channel ISE Module Mechanical ............................................................ 14-2
14.2. Three Channel ISE Module Mechanical........................................................... 14-6
14.3. ISE Technical Specification ............................................................................. 14-8
14.3.1. Four Channel ISE................................................................................................... 14-8
14.3.2. Three Channel ISE................................................................................................. 14-8
14.4. ISE Measurement Theory .............................................................................. 14-10
14.5. Electrodes and Reagents Used ..................................................................... 14-11
14.6. Urine ISE Dilution Rerun................................................................................ 14-12
14.7. Storage and Usage of the Reagents.............................................................. 14-13
14.8. Turning Off the Power.................................................................................... 14-13
14.9. Shutdown Procedure ..................................................................................... 14-13
14.9.1. Preparing the ISE Module for Storage ................................................................. 14-13
14.9.2. Reference, Na+ and Cl- Electrodes....................................................................... 14-13
14.9.3. K+ and Li+ Electrode ............................................................................................. 14-14
14.9.4. Reagent Pack....................................................................................................... 14-14
14.9.5. Analyzer Tubing ................................................................................................... 14-14
14.9.6. Analyzer Re-activation ......................................................................................... 14-14
14.10. ISE Calibration............................................................................................. 14-14
14.10.1. Procedure for ISE Calibration............................................................................. 14-15
14.11. Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................ 14-17
14.12. Acceptable Calibration Ranges.................................................................... 14-17
14.13. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 14-18
14.14. Procedure for Installing New Reagent Pack ................................................ 14-20
14.14.1. Pre-requisite ....................................................................................................... 14-21
14.14.2. Procedure........................................................................................................... 14-21
14.15. Error Codes ................................................................................................. 14-22
14.16. Error Message for ISE Unit .......................................................................... 14-23
IX
15. Accessories, Spares, and Consumables................................................................. 15-1

15.1. Spares Recommended for Distributor Stocking ............................................... 15-7
15.2. Spares Recommended for Customer Stocking.............................................. 15-13
16. Adjustment and Verification Procedure .................................................................. 16-1
16.1. Verifying Proper Mechanical Function ............................................................. 16-1
16.1.1. Verify Light Beam Alignment .................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.2. Verify Proper Laundry Alignment ........................................................................... 16-1
16.1.3. Verify Sample Arm Alignment ................................................................................ 16-2
16.1.4. Verify Proper Sample Arm Function....................................................................... 16-4
16.1.5. Verify Reagent 1 Arm Alignment ............................................................................ 16-4
16.1.6. Verify Proper Reagent 1 Arm Function .................................................................. 16-5
16.1.7. Verify Reagent 2 Arm Alignment ............................................................................ 16-5
16.1.8. Verify Proper Reagent 2 Arm Function .................................................................. 16-6
16.1.9. Verify Stirrer Arm Alignment................................................................................... 16-7
16.1.10. Verify Sample Tray Alignment.............................................................................. 16-8
16.1.11. Verify Reagent Tray Alignment ............................................................................ 16-9
16.2. Load cell Verification Procedure .................................................................... 16-10
16.3. Pressure Tank Verification Procedure ........................................................... 16-10
16.4. Laundry Flow Adjustment Procedure ............................................................. 16-11
16.4.1. Detergent or Cleaning Solution Flow Adjustment Procedure ............................... 16-11
16.4.2. CRU Water Flow Adjustment Procedure.............................................................. 16-11
16.5. Temperature Verification Procedure .............................................................. 16-12
16.5.1. Reagent Temperature Verification Procedure...................................................... 16-12
16.5.2. Reaction Temperature Verification Procedure ..................................................... 16-12
16.6. Probe Dispense Verification (R1, R2, and Sample) ....................................... 16-12
16.6.1. Sample ................................................................................................................. 16-12
16.6.2. Reagent 1............................................................................................................. 16-13
16.6.3. Reagent 2............................................................................................................. 16-13
16.7. Photometer Verification Procedure ................................................................ 16-13
16.8. Clot Detector Circuit Tuning Procedure ......................................................... 16-14
17. Programming Procedures ........................................................................................ 17-1
17.1. Programming ST10 Micro Controller ............................................................... 17-1
17.1.1. Pre-requisite ........................................................................................................... 17-1
17.1.2. Programming Procedure ........................................................................................ 17-1
17.2. FPGA ............................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2.1. Pre-requisite ........................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2.2. Programming Procedure ........................................................................................ 17-3
17.2.3. Cable Drawings ...................................................................................................... 17-5
17.3. Auto-startup PCB for downloading H86 or .mcs Files ...................................... 17-8
18. Digital Pressure Indicator ......................................................................................... 18-1
18.1. Digital Pressure Indicator (APC33-W).............................................................. 18-1
18.2. Access for different Settings ............................................................................ 18-1
18.3. HI/LO Pressure Setting Procedure .................................................................. 18-2
18.4. Mode Configuration ......................................................................................... 18-3
18.5. Error Check during Run ................................................................................... 18-4
18.6. Operating Procedure for Pressure Sensor Panasonic – DP102 ..................... 18-5
18.7. Error Check during Run ................................................................................. 18-12
X
19. Replacement, Alignment, and Calibration Procedures .......................................... 19-1

19.1. Replacement Procedure .................................................................................. 19-1
19.1.1. Lamp Replacement ................................................................................................ 19-1
19.1.2. Probe Replacement................................................................................................ 19-3
19.1.3. Syringe Replacement ............................................................................................. 19-6
19.2. Alignment Procedures.................................................................................... 19-10
19.2.1. Probe Alignment................................................................................................... 19-10
19.3. Calibration Procedures .................................................................................. 19-12
19.3.1. RCT Temperature Calibration .............................................................................. 19-12
19.3.2. RGT Temperature Calibration .............................................................................. 19-14
19.3.3. Pressure Tank Temperature Calibration .............................................................. 19-24
19.3.4. Alignment Procedure for Sample Barcode XL640 (CANMAX type) ..................... 19-25
19.3.5. Alignment Procedure for Reagent Barcode XL640 (CANMAX type).................... 19-25
19.4. MS-3 Laser Barcode Programming Procedure .............................................. 19-26
19.5. Service Menu Software Layout, Functions and Opto Status.......................... 19-41
19.5.1. Arms/Stirrer .......................................................................................................... 19-41
19.5.2. Syringes ............................................................................................................... 19-47
19.5.3. Stirrers (Choose Stirrer 1 or 2) ............................................................................. 19-48
19.5.4. DCF ...................................................................................................................... 19-49
19.5.5. Sample Tray ......................................................................................................... 19-50
19.5.6. Reagent Tray........................................................................................................ 19-51
19.5.7. Reaction Tray (RCT) ............................................................................................ 19-52
19.5.8. PC Communication .............................................................................................. 19-53
19.5.9. Calibration ............................................................................................................ 19-54
19.5.10. Misc Commands................................................................................................. 19-54
20. Miscellaneous............................................................................................................ 20-1
20.1. Fuse Ratings.................................................................................................... 20-1
20.2. Transformer SMPS Details .............................................................................. 20-2
21. Appendix .................................................................................................................... 21-1
21.1. TBM Image Installation .................................................................................... 21-1
21.1.1. Scenario ................................................................................................................. 21-1
21.1.2. Installing TBM Image into Analyzer PC.................................................................. 21-1
21.1.3. Identifying Various Drives....................................................................................... 21-6
21.2. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 21-9
21.2.1. SQL Server 2005 Configuration ........................................................................... 21-10
21.3. Troubleshooting Guide................................................................................... 21-13
22. Revision History ........................................................................................................ 22-1
XI
Document Conventions
Before reading the manual, please get familiarized with the following icons used in this
manual.
Icons Warning About
Bio-hazard
Electric Shock
High Temperature
Injury
Warnings and Caution
Notes, Usage, Tips, and

Additional information
Information or note related to

Closed System
XII
1. Safety Information
The user is requested to read the safety information in the manual before installing
the analyzer.
1.1. Safety Instructions

The followings icons are used in the document:
During operation, do not touch auto sampler unit, reagent
container unit, nozzles and any other moving mechanical parts
in the analyzer. During operation, shut cover all the time.
Never touch patients' samples with bare hands to prevent

operator from possible infection. Handle SPT nozzle, RPT
nozzle, reaction cells, wash nozzles, waste nozzles and Stirrer
paddle in the same way. Wear medical rubber gloves to keep
skin from direct contact with patients' samples.
Give special consideration to keep skin and mucous membrane
from contact with reagents to prevent operator from possible
infection. Always wear medical rubber gloves, goggles, etc. to
keep skin and mucous membrane from contact with reagents.
The contact with the wastes such as used reaction cells and
solutions may cause infection. Handle them with gloved hands
without exception. Follow the national or local laws and rules
when they are thrown out. There are two kinds of liquid wastes
drained from this analyzer, i.e. high- and low-concentrated
wastes.
The access to the conductive parts within the analyzer may
cause serious electric shock. When removing parts, make sure
to shut off the power supply. Leave any maintenance and repair
of electrical parts inside the equipment to qualified service
personnel.
Never leave reagent bottles on the working table (upper surface
inside the analyzer). Careless handling of reagent bottles may
cause tumble and leak.
Read the statements of virtues provided with reagents, prior to
their use.
Do not make any modification to the analyzer.
Exchange the halogen lamp for a new one after a lapse of 30
minutes since the power switch of the analyzer is turned off to
avoid danger of burns.
1-1
1.2. Warning Labels

The following warning labels are affixed on the places that are the potentially
hazardous.
LABEL LOCATION
On the 5-piece Top Cover
Plates
LABEL LOCATION
On the 5-piece Top Cover
Plates
LABEL LOCATION
On the Bio-hazardous waste
can (10 Liters)
1-2
LABEL LOCATION
On Waste Can (20 liters)
LABEL LOCATION
On Cleaning Solution Can (10
liters)
LABEL LOCATION
On DI Water Can (20 liters)
1-3
2. Installation Conditions
Read the instructions carefully before using the analyzer for the first time. You
must be trained before you may perform the procedures described in this
document.
Only qualified trained personnel should use the analyzer.
1. Precaution to be taken while installing the analyzer.
a. Keep the analyzer out of the rain and any other water splash.
b. Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt or
sulfur, etc.
c. Pay attention to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during
transportation), etc.
d. Do not install the analyzer at the place adjacent to the storage room of
chemicals or the place where any gas is likely to be generated.
e. Pay attention to frequency, voltage and permissible current (or power
consumption).
f. Connect the analyzer to the operational computer using accompanying
Serial cable supplied with the analyzer.
When the other cable is used, this may cause the
analyzer to suffer from disturbing noise, exert an
adverse effect on its surroundings or get incorrect
measurement results.
2. Precaution to be taken before operating the analyzer.
a. Check the power supply frequency, voltage and current capacity (power
consumption).
b. Ensure that the analyzer is correctly and well grounded.
c. Ensure that all the necessary electrical cables are correctly connected:
 Power cord between Mains and Analyzer
 Serial cable between Analyzer and Computer
 Float sensor cables with CANs
d. Check that the contact conditions of switches and indicators are
appropriate and that the analyzer is ready to be activated correctly.
Extreme care must be taken not to result in misdiagnosis or pose any
danger to the analyzer or human body when the analyzer in conjunction
with other equipment.
2-1
e. Wipe the probe tips of SPT and RPT several times with cloth or by
rubbing alcohol before the analyzer is used. At this time, do not forget to
put medical rubber gloves. Pay attention to prevent bare skin of hand or
arm from being touched by or pricked with the probe tip.
3. The caution should always be exercised when replacing the halogen lamp.
a. Replace the halogen lamp by a new one after a lapse of 30 minutes after
the analyzer is turned off, to avoid the danger of burns. Keep hands
away from the glass part of the new halogen lamp. Make sure that there
is no crack or breakage in the glass part.
4. The following cautions should be exercised during the operation of analyzer:
a. Pay attention not to exceed the time and volume necessary for
diagnosis.
b. Keep monitoring the behavior of the whole system in order to detect any
malfunction.
c. Take immediate corrective measures including shutdown of operation
when any malfunction is detected in the analyzer.
d. Avoid possibilities of any direct access by the patients.
5. The following cautions should be exercised after the use of the analyzer:
a. Turn off the power after every operation so that control is restored to its
previous state as directed.
b. Do not remove the line cord plugs from receptacles by pulling the cords
so that no undue stress is developed in the cords.
c. Wipe the probe tips of SPT and RPT several times with cloth or by
rubbing alcohol before the analyzer is used. At this time, do not forget to
put medical rubber gloves. Pay attention to prevent bare skin of hand or
arm from being touched by or pricked with the probe tip.
d. Pay attention to the storage area.
i) Keep the analyzer out of the rain and any other water splash.
ii) Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure,
temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust and air containing salt,
sulfur, etc.
iii) Pay attention to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during
transportation), etc.
iv) Avoid areas adjacent to the storage room of chemicals or areas that
are likely to generate gasses. Avoid areas that are likely to be subject to
inclination, vibration and shock.
e. Organize and store parts and cords associated with the analyzer after
they have been cleaned.
2-2
f. Keep the analyzer clean not to cause any inconvenience to the next use.
6. In the event of trouble, do not fiddle with the analyzer. You must contact the
authorized service personnel for troubleshooting.
7. Maintenance and checks.
a. It is important for the analyzer and its associated parts to be periodically
checked and replaced. For example:
 Arm probes
 Cuvette rinsing unit (laundry)
 Stirrers
 Syringes
Refer section 19.1 Replacement Procedure as directed in the operator
manual.
b. Ensure that the analyzer operates normally and correctly, when it is
reused after being kept unused for some time.
 Perform Daily, Weekly, Monthly and Annually maintenance
procedures as directed in the service manual. Refer section 13
Maintenance for more details.
8. The following cautions should be taken when using and handling the
reagents:
a. After unpacking the reagents, be sure not to allow dust, dirt or bacteria
to come in touch with the reagent.
b. Do not use expired reagents.
c. Handle a reagent gently to avoid formation of bubbles.
d. Take care not to spill the reagent. If it spills, wipe it off immediately using
a wet cloth.
e. Follow other instructions described in the package insert on each
reagent.
f. If a reagent happens to enter your eye, wash it off immediately using
plenty of water, and take medical treatment at once.
g. If you swallow it inadvertently, call for a doctor immediately and drink
plenty of water.
2-3
Some reagents are strong acids or alkalis. Exercise great care so

that your hands and clothing do not come into contact with reagents.
If your hands or clothing come into contact with either reagent,
immediately wash them off with soap and water. If a reagent comes
into contact with your eye(s), immediately rinse with water for at least
15 minutes.
9. Prohibit any alteration and/or modification to the analyzer without
permission by manufacturer.
10. The following precautions should be taken for preventing infection due to
sample handling:
Do not touch the samples, mixtures and waste liquids with bare
hands. Be sure to wear gloves to protect you from infection. In case
any samples come in contact with your skin, thoroughly rinse the
area that came in contact with the sample and consult a physician.
Immediately wipe off any contaminants from the system.
11. The following precautions should be taken for disposing the bio-hazardous
waste:
Treat the drain water as infectious waste. Collect the drain water in
reserve can and allow it to be disposed of by expert distributors.
2-4
3. Introduction
3.1. Overview
The XL-640, designed with the needs of modern clinical laboratories in mind,
easily fits into any laboratory environment. The XL-640 analyzer is a fully
automated, random access, time optimized, and patient sequential discrete
computerized chemistry analyzer. Once programmed, it is a walk-away system.
The analyzer features user-friendly operation with minimum operator intervention.
It is a highly sophisticated system and therefore it is of utmost importance that the
operator and service personnel read the instructions and becomes familiar with the
operation theory.
The analyzer comprises of a state of the art Photometer and sophisticated robotics
combined with an Operating Console and Data Processing Unit (DPU).
The DPU in the analyzer provides a schedule to the analyzer, after executing the
schedule as per the programmed sequence, the photometric results are then sent
to the analyzer’s computer connected to the analyzer where they are processed,
stored and then reported.
The robotics consist of Sample arm, Reagent 1 arm, Reagent 2 arm, Stirrer
assembly, Cuvette Rinsing Unit, Sample tray, Reagent tray, Reaction tray and
three Syringes one each for Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 arm.
Barcode identification system is provided for both, reagents and samples.
3.2. Operating Principle

3.2.1. Measurement and Photometry
The XL-640 analyzer is an automated clinical biochemistry analyzer based on the
principle of photometry, it measures light transmittance at various wavelengths.
White light as we see it is actually composed of several colors. This becomes
evident, when we pass a beam of white light trough a prism. If the light emerging
from the prism on the opposite side were allowed to fall on a screen, we would see
a wide spectrum of colors, beginning with red on the top and ending with violet at
the bottom. The colors visible in between are in the order of indigo, blue, green,
yellow, and orange.
3-1
Incident or white light contains the entire spectrum, objects that appear colored,
absorb light at a particular wavelength and reflect others, thus giving different
colors. That is color is a function of its wavelength.
Light having a wavelength of less than 400 nm is termed Ultraviolet, where as light
having a wavelength greater than 800 nm is described as Infrared, both ultraviolet
and infrared lights are invisible to the human eyes. Light corresponding to
wavelengths between 400 nm and 800 nm is visible to the human eye and is
termed as visible light.
3.2.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry

Beer’s Law
If light is allowed to pass through a colored solution, the solution will absorb some
light while the rest of it will be transmitted. The amount of light absorbed is
proportional to the nature, concentration and color of the solution. (Light absorbed
Concentration of the solution).
Lambert’s Law
The light absorbed by the colored solution is directly proportional to the light path
of the color solution (diameter of the cuvette): that is if the cuvette diameter is
doubled, the light absorbed will be doubled.
3-2
Since the total incident light = light absorbed + light transmitted, it follows that:
Therefore as the absorbed light (Absorbance) increases, the transmitted light will
decrease.
As we increase the concentration of the colored solution, the light absorbed
increases, and we find that the transmittance varies inversely and logarithmically
with concentration.
3.3. Sequence of Operation

The instrument works on the principle of light photometry combined with the best
mechanics for sampling. The sample under test is sampled into the cuvette, which
is then read at defined time intervals to find out optical densities.
The entire operation can be divided into the following sequence.
1. Getting ready for operation.
3-3
2. Cuvette rinsing (cleaning).

3. Reagent 1 addition
4. Sample addition
5. Stirrer 1 mixing.
6. Reading and then reporting.
7. Reagent 2 addition (optional).
8. Stirrer 2 mixing (optional).
9. Reading and then reporting.
10. Cleaning.
3.3.1. Measurement Operation Table

The measurement flow is given below:
Time (Minute) Cycle Number Analyzer action
0:00 0 Dry the Cuvette + Add Reagent 1
0:09 1 Measure reagent absorbance
0:18 2 Add Sample + Stir 1 + Measure reaction absorbance
0:27 3 Measure reaction absorbance
3-4

3:45 25 Add Reagent 2 + Stir 2 + Measure reaction absorbance
3-5

9:27 63 Measure reaction absorbance + Final result reporting
9:36 64 Empty Cuvette contents + Add detergent
9:45 65 Empty Cuvette contents + Add DI Water
10:30 70 Measure Cuvette blank absorbance
10:39 71 Empty Cuvette contents
10:48 72 Drying the Cuvette
3-6
4. Technical Specifications
4.1. General Specifications
Item Description
Throughput 400 tests per hour for a cycle time of 9 seconds (640 tests per hour
with ISE).
System type Discrete, automated, random access, patient prioritized, 1/2 Reagent
system.
Sample Serum, Urine, CSF, Plasma, Whole Blood, Others.
Measurement principle Latex Turbidimetric Immunoassay, Colorimetry (Rate/End Point), Ion

Selective Electrodes (optional).
Applicable analytes  Photometric assays: Enzyme, lipid, protein, sugar, nitrides,
inorganic substances, complements and others.
 Turbidimetric assays: IgG, IgA, IgM, C3, C4, RF, CRP, ASO,
Transferrin and others.
Test method Absolute measurement, Relative measurement, ISE (optional).
On board Reagent 56 test items maximum; 60 test items with ISE.
Positions
Programmable Any number of photometric tests
parameters Any number of calculation items
Serum indices
(Optional) 4 ISE tests (Na, K, Cl and Li).
Assay modes 1-Point, 2-Point, Rate-A, and Rate-B.
Sample volume 2-70 μl (adjustable in 0.1 μl step).

Reaction volume 180μl – 660μl.
Reaction temperature 37 °C, Temperature stability: ± 0.2 °C.
Serum information The degree of Lipemia, Icterus, and Hemolysis can be measured and
printed during Run.
Reaction time Depends on the designated cycle time and number of reagents used:
For 1 step assay (using R1)
 567 seconds (9 minutes 27 seconds) for a cycle time of 9
seconds
For 2 step assay (using R1 and R2)
 1st reaction 216 seconds (3 minutes 36 seconds) + 2nd reaction
351 seconds (5 minutes 51 seconds) for a cycle time of 9
seconds.
Test selection Setting of tests one by one or with profile key for each sample.
Group order test entry is possible.
Setting from host computer via interface (optional).
4-1
Calibration Calibrators used at a time are limited by Curve Type.

Selective calibration (Curve correction/Normalization) is possible (with
Blank).
Dead Volumes User programmable dead volumes for sample, standard and reagent
positions.
Mixers  Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers.

 Two mixers (3 variable mixing speeds).
 Mixing positions.
 The 1st position: Right after sample dispense into the first
reagent.
 The 2nd position: 1st reagent + Sample +2nd reagent
Maintenance Programmable maintenance actions: Cuvette Rinse, Water Save,
Auto Wash, Sample Probe Wash, R1/R2 Probe Wash, Prime Wash,
ISE maintenance and Calibration, Dead Volume Calibration, Auto-
span and manual span.
Barcode identification Sample tube barcode ID (NW-7, Code 39, Code 128, ITF, 2 of 5
Standard, ISBT-code 128).
Reagent barcode ID (ITF)
During batch run, automatic barcode scan for reagent is performed
after closing the tray lid on Reagent Tray.
Water supply unit Water consumption: Less Than 13.5 liters/hour.

Manufactures and supplies: Type 2 quality (by NCCLS standards) ion
exchange water.
Stand-by 30 minute warm-up time.
Safety mechanism Vertical obstruction detection.

Clot Detection.
Capacitance based liquid level sensing.
Noise level Less than 65 dB with cover closed.
4.2. Installation Conditions

Item Description
Power source/ AC 220 V ± 10%, 50 ± 1 Hz or AC 110 V ± 10%, 60 ± 1 Hz

consumption Power consumption: 800 VA
Drainage Used sample (concentrated waste solution) and washed sample
(diluted waste) are to be drained separately.
Ambient temperature 15 – 30 °C.
Variation during operation: Less than ± 2 °C per hour.
Relative humidity 40 – 80% free from water dew formation.
Dimensions 897 (L) x 655 (B) x 1170 (H) mm.
Weight Approximately 200 kg.
4-2
4.3. Sampling Unit

Item Description
Sample container Blood collection tube 10 ml (16 x 100 mm), 7 ml (14.5 x 84 mm), 5 ml
(13 x 75 mm)
Adaptors will be provided for 5 and 7 ml tubes
Standard cup 2 ml
Sample placement Sample Tray
 Inner rim: 25 positions for placing barcode tubes.
 Outer rim: 25 positions for placing barcode tubes.
Standard Tray
 Inner rim: 12 positions for placing standard cups without
barcode.
 Outer rim: 20 positions for placing standard cups without
barcode.
STAT samples Place anywhere on the Sample Tray / Standard Tray
STAT samples are measured preferentially
Interrupt permitted even during analysis
Sampling Pipetting system with plunger, driven by stepper motor.
Sample volume: 2-70 µl (adjustable in 0.1 µl step).
Pipetting mode Discharges set volume of sample into cuvette for photometric tests or
into ISE module for Na, K, Cl, Li.
Sampling probe Micro-pipette with level sensor.
Washing solution.
Outside: Preheated de-ionized water.
Inside: Preheated de-ionized water.
Equipped with vertical obstruction detection facility to prevent probe
crash and clot detection.
Sample dilution Dilution ratio: 2 to 150 times.
A cuvette is used as dilution vessel.
Set amount of diluents is dispensed into a cuvette by reagent probe
and set amount of sample is dispensed into it by sample probe.
Dilution possible for repeat run.
Direct increased/decreased sample volume runs are also possible.
Repeat run Execution by repeat run list or auto execution.
Auto execution according to abnormal marking and/or range over.
Increased/decreased sample volume repeat run also possible.
Sample identification Sample bar-code ID (barcode reader provided as standard).
Position ID for non bar-coded samples.
4.4. Reagent Unit

Item Description
Type Turn table type reagent tray.
Reagent tray Common reagent tray with 56 positions for placing Reagent 1 and
4-3
Reagent 2.
Reagent cooling 4 to 12°C cooled with refrigeration unit.
temperature
Reagent bottles 28 positions for 20 ml
28 positions for 50 ml
Reagent dispensing Pipetting system with plunger, driven by stepping motor.
R1 dispensing in the 0.5th cycle
R2 dispensing in the 25th cycle
Reagent probe Micro-pipette with level sensor
Outside washing solution: Preheated de-ionized water
Inside washing solution: Preheated de-ionized water
Equipped with vertical obstruction detection facility to prevent probe
crash
Reagent volume Reagent 1: 60 – 300 µl (adjustable in 1 µl step).
Reagent 2: 0, or 10 – 300 µl (adjustable in 1 µl step).
Dead volume User programmable dead volumes for reagents, samples and
standards.
Mixing Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers.
Two mixers (3 variable mixing speeds).
Mixing positions.
 The 1st position: Right after sample dispense into the first reagent
 The 2nd position: 1st reagent + Sample + 2nd reagent
Reagent identification Position ID.
Reagent bar-code ID (optional).
Residual volume Calculated by countdown system as well as measured by capacitance
information type level sensor and displayed on screen.
Reagent positions Total 56 positions which can be used for reagent 1/2.
Reagent protection Reagent cover to protect from evaporation, dust, and direct light.
Carry over actions Provision for extra Detergent/Reagent Wash given for Carry Over Pairs.
4.5. Reaction Unit

Item Description
Type Turn table.
Reaction tray Rotating tray.
Number of reaction cuvettes: 72.
Temperature control: Turn table direct heating by foil heaters.
Reaction temperature 37 ± 0.2 °C
Cuvettes Reusable.
Number of reaction cuvettes: 72.
Dimensions: 5 x 5 mm.
Optical path length: 5 mm (factor to be fed for 10 mm).
Material: Hard glass.
Volume: 700 µl.
4-4
Reaction liquid volume: 660 µl maximum, 180 µl minimum.

Reaction liquid mixing Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers.
Two mixers (3 variable mixing speeds).
Mixing positions.
 The 1st position: Right after sample dispense into the first reagent
 The 2nd position: 1st reagent + Sample + 2nd reagent
Cuvette washing Type: By the automatic washing system.
The reaction waste is aspirated out, then cuvette is washed by washing
solution and repeatedly by DI water, finally residual liquid is removed.
Number of washing operation steps: 8 steps.
 Reaction waste removal: 1 step
 Washing: 6 steps
 Residual liquid removal: 2 steps
Number of washing solution application.
 Detergent solution: 1
 Ion exchange water: 5
Washing solution container.
 Detergent: 10 liters Capacity
Reaction waste is collected into two waste cans (concentrated waste
and diluted waste) by pumps.
In built cuvette overflow protection.
4.6. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit

Item Description
Type Multiple wavelengths, diffraction spectrophotometer.
Photometric system Multi-wavelength direct measurement of light after penetration into
reaction cuvette (transmitted light).
Wavelength 12 Wavelengths: 340, 376, 415, 450, 480, 505, 546, 570, 600, 660,
700, 750 nm.
Wavelength per One or two wavelength.
chemistry
Measurement interval 63 measurements.
Each measurement at an interval of 9 seconds.
OD range OD 0 – 3.
Light path calculated as 10 mm.
Resolution 0.0001 OD
Light source Pre-aligned Halogen lamp (12V/20W).
Life expectancy 600 hours (approximate).
Grating Concave grating.
Detector Silicon photo-diode array.
Cell blank correction Corrected by water blank measured after cuvette washing.
Minimum reaction 180 µl.
liquid volume
4-5
4.7. Data Processing Unit

Item Description
Calibration curve K-Factor, Linear (one point, multipoint, and point-to-point), Cubic
Spline, Exponential, 4P Calibration Logit-log, 5P Calibration Logit-log
Polynomial.
Multipoint curves up to 10 points.
One point correction (using Blank) to multi-point calibration line is
provided.
Auto-dilution for nonlinear curves.
Quality control Within day as well as day-to-day X and X-R control diagram.
Mean, SD, %CV, R are calculated for the each chemistry.
QC graph based on west gard QC rules.
Repeat run Execution by repeat run list or auto execution.

Auto execution according to abnormal marking or range over.
Increased/Decreased sample volume repeat run also possible.
Monitor function Reaction curve, Calibration curve, Status of sample operation and
Reagent level in bottles on Reagent Tray can be viewed graphically.
Calculation between Correlation correction factor (Y = aX + b).
items Calculation by the formula defined by user.
 No limit on programmable calculated items.
 Each calculation item can include up to 5 chemistries.
Recalculation of results possible
Test profile can be defined.
Report/list format Report generation: Patient wise, Test wise, Date wise, Location wise,
Abnormal result wise, Doctor name wise, Batch wise.
Lists: Abnormal values list, Recalculated result list, Repeat run list.
Backup Partial backup of selective data such as Consumables, Patient, and
Patient with Results, Test Parameters, Calibration, Error Log, and
System parameters is possible in the Text, XML, XLS and CSV
formats.
Full backup of database.
Special treatment Reagent blank correction.
Data check Reference range check by age, gender, sample type.
Panic limit check.
Reagent absorption check.
Technical limits check.
Reaction linearity check.
Reaction mixture absorbance checks.
Antigen excess/prozone check (by reaction curve analysis method).
Alarms and notices Types of alarms: Erroneous operation, mechanical malfunction of
analyzer, data processor hardware error, erroneous test results.
Alarm level: Notice, temporary halt of analysis, suspension of analysis,
system stop.
4-6
Prompts on display alarms.

Diagnostic checks Mechanical movements and functional performance can be checked
through diagnostic menu.
Password Different user ID with password to login into the application.
Access Control for Menu options can be defined by Administrator.
4.8. Ion Selective Electrodes

Item Description
Type of measurement Ion selective electrode.
Direct measurement for Serum samples.
Urine sample diluted with urine diluent (on board, on Reagent Tray).
Sample types Serum, Urine (urine diluted 10 times on board for first determination).
Test items Na, K, Cl, Li.
Measurement cycle Serum: 30 seconds/sample.
Urine: 40 seconds/sample.
4.9. Computer Specifications

A minimum specification for the system is shown in the table below. However, you
are recommended to use the most powerful system available to you.
Item Description
Processor Core 2 duo or above
Memory Minimum 1 GB RAM for Windows XP with Service Pack 2/3.
Minimum 2 GB RAM for Windows 7.
Disk Space 120 GB or above
Key Board English Standard Keyboard
Operating System Windows XP with Service Pack 2/3, Windows 7 Professional 32-bit
English Edition
Printer Laser Jet / Desk Jet.
Ports  Serial Port is required to connect Analyzer with CPU of analyzer
PC for analyzer to CPU connection.
 Second Serial Port is required to connect the Analyzer PC to a
Host PC i.e. LIS (Optional).
Regional settings Language English (US)
The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
4.10. Technical Features of the System

4.10.1. Salient Technical Features
 On board Biohazard and regular waste management.
4-7
 2 Teflon coated mixer (stirrers) with 3 different mixing speeds

 2 Reagent capability
 72-position hard glass molded cuvettes
 56 positions to accommodate 20 ml and 50 ml Reagent bottles
 On board reagent cooling through Peltier cooling system
 50 positions on sample tray to accommodate 5 ml, 7 ml and 10 ml tubes
 30 positions to accommodate 2 ml cups for placing Blanks, Standards,
Calibrators and Controls on standard tray
 2 positions for ISE on standard tray.
 Throughput of up to 400 tests per hour for a cycle time of 9 seconds (640
tests per hour with ISE)
 Barcode identification for Sample tubes and Reagent Bottles
 Bi-directional host computer interface capability
4.10.2. Other Features

Advantages of XL-640 chemistry analyzer.
 Sample tray ─ Flexibility and convenience
The sample disk of XL-640 provides unmatched flexibility and convenience.
The routine tray has positions to accommodate up to 50 routine samples.
Samples tubes can be bar-coded or non bar-coded.
The standard tray has 32 positions (20 standards, 2 blanks, 2 ISE, and 8
controls). For large batch of patient’s samples, the 32-position of standard
tray can be replaced with the new tray, there by maximizing the number of
sample positions.
Emergency samples can be loaded anywhere on the sample tray.
The sample tray accommodates standard tubes of 5, 7 or 10 ml sample
tubes on routine tray and 2 ml cups on standard tray.
Patient Samples, Calibrators, Blank, Controls, and Standards can be placed
anywhere on the sample tray.
 Reagent Tray ─ Offers a wide choice of on-board tests
The XL-640 reagent tray can accommodate 56 reagent bottles. All reagents
are refrigerated to ensure extended stability. The wide choice of on board
reagents eliminates the need for sample splitting and cuts down the
turnaround time of reporting.
 Economy ─ Quick returns without compromise
4-8
The XL-640 uses permanent hard glass cuvettes, thereby eliminating

recurring costs of disposable cuvettes. Low reagents requirement per test,
maximizes the number of tests per sample tray.
 Barcode Identification
The bar-coded reagents and sample identification system provides sample
identification faster and accurate, minimizing operator’s programming time.
 Optical System ─ Ensures reliability of results
The XL-640 uses a high resolution, flat field, and optically corrected
diffraction grating to ensure high degree of photometric accuracy. The user
can select 12 available wavelengths, from 340 nm - 750 nm to cover the
entire clinical chemistry application range.
The main features of the analyzer.
 Unique soft start and stop of all mechanical assembly including reagent/
sample probes and rotors, ensures perfect alignment of all assemblies.
 Software routines provide the user with all functions to run the analyzer.
 User-friendly graphic interface and easy to learn system operations.
 A vertical obstruction detection (VOD) system of XL-640 detects
obstructions and protects the needles from damage.
 Capacitance probe liquid level detection ensures accurate level
detection.
 Bi-directional host computer interface capability.
 Instrument analytical features.
 Barcode identification system for Samples tubes and Reagent bottles
 56 position reagent tray with built-in cooling.
 Capability to run 1 or 2 reagent chemistries.
 Instrument performance features.
 Throughput of 400 tests per hour for a cycle time of 9 seconds.
 Throughput of 640 tests per hour for routine biochemistry tests with ISE.
 Automatic maintenance procedures on start of the day.
 72 permanent hard glass cuvettes.
 Sample tray accommodates sample tubes of 5, 7 or 10 ml and 2 ml
sample cups.
 Low reagent requirement per test.
4-9
 12 wavelength diffraction grating.
4.11. Equipment Overview

4.11.1. Front View
Refer section 8.1 Identification of the Main Components for more details.
4-10
4.11.2. Left Side View
For ISE unit
4-11
4.11.3. Right Side View
ON/OFF
switch
4-12
5. Pre-installation
5.1. Floor Requirements
5.2. Electrical Requirements

Improper grounding to the XL-640 analyzer bypasses important safety
features and may result in permanent damage that may void the
warranty. It is absolutely necessary to ensure proper grounding.
 Voltage and Frequency
Single-phase continuous stabilized AC 220 volts ± 10%, 50/60Hz or AC 110
volts ± 10%, 50/60Hz supply. The XL-640 comes equipped with a three-pin
power cord. The type of cord and plug depends on the source voltage for
the system.
 Grounding
It is absolutely necessary that a perfect earthing must be provided at the
power source with all applicable local requirement (only a certified rounded,
3 pin power plug should be used.
5-1
 Plug Points
Four 5 Amp sockets must be available near the analyzer. (Four sockets are
required, one each for the analyzer, computer, monitor and printer.
It is recommended that two extra sockets be provided near the analyzer, for
use by a measuring equipment or engineering tool if required while
servicing (example oscilloscope, soldering iron etc.).
Heavy-duty electrical devices like air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens etc.
should not be operated on the same electrical lines as the analyzer.
The 3 pin power cord plugs shipped with the analyzer,
computer, printer and monitor may not be compatible with
the local electrical sockets of some countries, to have these
procured from the local market prior to the installation.
5.3. Site Requirement

The proper location is an important consideration. A poor location can lead to
malfunction of the analyzer. Please follow the following environmental and
electrical suggestions to ensure the accuracy and precision of the analyzer.
This will also ensure a high level of operator and technical service
personals working comfort and safety.
5.3.1. Environmental Requirements

5.3.1.1. Room Temperature
 The recommended temperature of the laboratory should be 15 to 30 °C.
 There should not be a variation of more than 2 °C in room temperature per
hour.
5.3.1.2. Proper Ventilation

 Make sure there is at least 0.25 meters of the space around the instrument
on all three sides, to enable proper ventilation.
 There should not be any stationary items or other objects in the vicinity that
hinder proper access to the analyzer.
 There should be no direct air from the air-conditioning system on to the
analyzer.
5.3.1.3. Dust Free Environment

Verify and ensure a dust free environment for analyzer, this is a small but very
important consideration when installing the analyzer.
5-2
5.3.1.4. Verifying Proper Voltage

With the help of a Voltmeter Measure the following AC Voltages on the mains
socket.
Test Points Expected Voltages
Phase and Neutral 220 Volts (± 10%) or 110V ± 10%
Phase and Earth 220 Volts (± 10%) or 110V ± 10%
Neutral and Earth Not more than 5 Volts
5.3.2. External Interferences

 Heavy-duty electrical devices like air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens,
centrifuges etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines or in the
close vicinity of the analyzer.
 The room should be free of vibrations from heavy duty devices like
centrifuges and compressors.
 The room should be free from strong magnetic fields caused by other
medical equipment, like CT Scans, MRI etc.
5.3.3. Proper Room Lighting

There should be sufficient room lighting, the lighting should be even, and there
should be no shadow areas, this problem can be eliminated by the use of multiple
light sources from diagonally opposite directions.
This will enable efficient operator use, and will give a clear visible access to the
internal components of the analyzer during operation and technical servicing.
5-3
6. Installation
This section deals with the installation of the analyzer.
Only a trained service representative should install the analyzer.
Contact your local service representative for the installation and
relocation of the instrument.
Problems resulting from the installation and relocation of the
analyzer by anyone other than an authorized service representative
will not be covered under warranty.
6.1. Basic Operational Information

6.1.1. Procedure to Install XL-640 Analyzer
6.1.1.1. Receiving Instructions
The analyzer has been thoroughly tested before shipment and has been packed
carefully to prevent the damage during shipping and handling. Please follow these
following guidelines when you receive the analyzer:
1. Check to see that the arrows on the sides of the packages are pointing up.
If the arrows do not point up, make a remark about this on the invoice copy.
2. Visually inspect the outside of the package for rips, dents, or possible
shipping damage. Document any sign of damage on the bill of lading,
regardless of how insignificant it may appear. This is to protect your
interests.
3. Notify your service representative that the analyzer system and its
components have arrived.
4. Wait for your service representative to unpack the system and open the
packages.
5. Follow the unpacking and storage instructions provided on the outside of
the package. Special requirements such as refrigeration are clearly marked
on the outside of the cartons and will be included in the unpacking
instructions and pack inserts.
6.1.1.2. Warranty Information

All analyzers are warranted against defective materials or workmanship for a
period of one year commencing from the date of the shipment of the analyzer. This
warranty does not cover any defect, malfunction, or damage due to:
1. Accident, neglect or willful mistreatment of the product.
2. Failure to operate service or maintain the product in accordance with the
applicable Operator Manual and Service Manual.
6-1
3. Use of reagents or chemicals of corrosive nature, though the unit is an open

system allowing the use of any commercial reagents from any manufacturer
that are meant for such an automated clinical chemistry analyzer.
6.2. Unpacking the Analyzer

Unpack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you may damage the
accurately adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
The XL-640 is fully tested before the shipment and is packed carefully to prevent
any shipping damage. It is the responsibility of the customer to inspect all cartons
upon arrival and notify the carrier of any apparent damage.
XL-640 is shipped in two wooden carton boxes; one contains the main unit and
other has computer trolley with accessories.
The main unit and accessories are packed in separate cartons. Reagents and
other additional accessories may be packed in another carton. The representative
is responsible for unpacking, installing and initial setting up of the analyzer:
The instrument is shipped, mounted on “Z” brackets; the “Z” bracket
and the footrest may support the entire weight of the instrument.
Cautiously open the bolts of the “Z” bracket to prevent any personal
injury.
Follow the procedure to unpack the analyzer:
1. Remove the nuts and bolts that hold the side ply of the analyzer box and
carefully remove the side ply – preferably front ply and the rest as one unit.
2. Remove the buffers and un-wrap the plastic protective sheet, from around
the analyzer.
3. The instrument is bolted down to the wooden pallet on four sides with the
help of " Z " brackets, remove these bolts carefully with the help of a
spanner, and carefully slide out the " Z " brackets one at a time.
The instrument is shipped with the castors in midair, the "Z"
bracket and the footrest support the entire weight of the
instrument. Cautiously open the bolts of the “Z" bracket to
prevent any personal injury.
6-2
4. Gently lift or slide the analyzer out of the wooden pallet, and place it on the
floor.
5. Lift the footrest up by rotating them, thereby letting the analyzer to rest on
its castors.
6. Gently lift the top dome of the analyzer and gently slide the Sample arm
upwards, making sure you do not damage the Sample probe, once you
have reached the top most position, rotate it and position it over the trough.
Remove the protective material and any debris, from within the sample tray
well.
7. Gently slide the Reagent 1 arm upwards, making sure you do not damage
the probe, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and
position it over the trough.
8. Gently slide the Reagent 2 arm upwards, making sure you do not damage
the probe, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and
position it over the trough. Remove the protective material and any debris,
from within the reagent tray well.
9. Gently slide the Mixer arm upwards, making sure you do not damage the
paddles, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and position
it over the trough. Remove the protective material.
6-3
10. Gently slide the CRU arm upwards to the top most position, making sure
you do not damage the probes, and remove the protective material and
clean debris.
11. Remove the buffers that are present in the RGT and ASP areas, as well
around the CRU and Stirrers.
To avoid electric shock, ground the analyzer, computer, printer, and
monitor using a 3 pin grounded electric outlet.
Do not use an adapter, as it could cause a loose contact and improper
grounding.
Confirm that all cuvettes have been fitted properly into their
respective slots on the reaction tray and none of them are jutting
out.
When removing or placing the cuvettes into their slots make sure
that you grip them by their sides and top end, never let the fingers
or any sharp objects come in contact with the optical area.
6.3. Inspections and Accessories Checklist

The analyzer is fully inspected before leaving the factory and carefully packed to
withstand shocks in transit.
On receiving the analyzer, check the package externally; make sure that there is
no external visible damage to the shipping container. If there is damage please
make a note of it, if possible photograph it and inform the designated service
personnel. Verify with the invoice, if all the boxes have arrived.
The accessories supplied with the analyzer are subject to change
without prior notice.
The shipment generally contains the following packages:

1. Analyzer wooden box.
2. Other accessories boxes (optional):
6-4
6.3.1.2. Standard Accessories Checklist

Serial Item
Description Quantity
Number Code
Accessories Box
1 115252 ASSEMBLY D.I. CAN 20 LTR, ADAPTOR & 1 NO.
STICKER_S
2 115253 ASSEMBLY WASTE CAN 20 LTR, ADAPTOR & 1 NO.
STICKER_S
3 115255 ASSEMBLY BIOHAZARD CAN 10 LTR, ADAPTOR & 1 NO.
STICKER_S
4 115254 ASSEMBLY DETERGENT CAN 10 LTR, ADAPTOR & 1 NO.
STICKER_S.
5 181368 RGT TRAY 50+20 ML; 56 BOTTLES (INJ) 1 NO.
6 100631 REAGENT BOTTLE POSITIONING RING 1 NO.
7 105591 REAGENT TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY. 1 NO.
8 MOULDED SAMPLE TRAY ASSY. DISK –1 (1-50) 2 NOs.
182639
WITH STANDARD PLATE
SHIPPER BOX
9 114769 CABLE USB JUMPER USB2.0 28X1P+ 24X2C - USB 1 NO.
A TO B 2.0 VERSION WITH FERRITE CORE (BOTH
SIDE A,B ) 1.8 METER
10 100343 TYPE E / F PLUG - 2MTR. LENGTH 1 NO.
11 182581 REAGENT BOTTLE ( 50 ML ) WITH CAPS 28 NOS.
12 182584 REAGENT BOTTLE ( 20 ML ) WITH CAPS 27 NOS.
13 -- REAGENT BOTTLES (20 ML.) WITH CAPS AND BAR 2 NOS.
CODE LABELS
14 -- REAGENT BOTTLES (50 ML.) WITH CAPS AND BAR 2 NOS.
CODE LABELS
15 -- TEST TUBES (5ML) WITH BARCODE LABELS 10 NOS.
16 100634 TEST TUBE ADAPTER FOR MOULDED SAMPLE 105 NOS.
HOLDING PLATE(COLLAR)
17 100592 5 ML REAGENT BOTTLE ADAPTER (NEW) 50 NOS.
18$ 108159 ASSEMBLY OF WASTE CAN TUBE & CAN CAP 1 NO.
19$ 108162 ASSEMBLY OF BIO-HAZARD CAN TUBE & CAN CAP 1 SET.
20$ 108160 ASSEMBLY OF DI WATER CAN TUBE & CAN CAP 1 NO.
21$ 108161 ASSEMBLY OF CLEANING SOLUTION CAN TUBE & 1 NO.
CAN CAP
22 106653 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 20 LITER DI 1 NO.
WATER CAN
23 106654 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 10 LITER 1 NO.
CLEANING SOLUTION CAN
24 106655 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 10 LITER BIO- 1 NO.
HAZARDOUS CAN
25 106656 LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY FOR 20 LITER WASTE 1 NO.
CAN
6-5
Serial Item
Number Code
26 100660 PVC SUPPORT FOR 20ML REAGENT BOTTLE 28 NOS.
27 110318 CABLE TIE SIZE 2.5 MM X 100 MM KP138 25 NOS.
28 110317 MOUNT ADHESIVE 10 NOS.
29 110321 FLAT CABLE SUPPORT KP161E 5 NOS.
30 109855 OUTER HOLDER FOR 5ML REAGENT ADAPTOR 5 NOS.
31 SCREW CAP (PP) OF 19mm RED COLOUR FOR 10 NOS
121410
BOTTLES
32 109522 KIT FOR SYRINGE BUBBLE REMOVEL 1NOS.
33 102932 SAMPLE CUP 450 NOS.
34 108605 FUNNEL 1 NO.
35 100679 CALIBRATION PLATE 1 No.
36 100263 CUVETTE 4C:0609 5 Nos.
37 201989 PROBE HEIGHT GUAGE 1 No.
38 - RGT BARCODE ALIGNMENT JIG 1 No

P.M. KIT
39 102851 CUVETTE DRIER (4.4.SQ) 2 NOS.
40 105470 LAUNDRY ASPIRATION TUBING SET – (TWO- 2 SET
PROBE)
41 105471 LAUNDRY DISPENSING TUBING SET – TWO 1 SET
PROBE CONSTRUCTION.
42 182220 PHOTOMETER LAMP ASSEMBLY 4 NOS.
43 105696 SET OF FUSES 1 SET
44 107580 BD SPINAL NEEDLE (25 GA 3.5IN,0.50X90MM, ITEM 1 NO.
405257)
45 101677 PROBE CLEANER 1 NO.
46 107613 10 MICRON FILTER (125MM LENGTH) 4 NOS.
47 109712 WASHER FOR CRU KNOB 1 NO.
48 114435 FILTER 25 MICRON (75MM LENGTH) 4 NOS.
49 100675 COUNTER WEIGHT FOR DETERGENT 4 NOS.
50 100937 SILICON TUBING R3350 2 MM X 4 MM (INTEGRA) 4ft
51 107623 10-32 SPECIAL TAPERED THREAD WITH 1/4? HEX 2 NOS.
TO 200 SERIES BARB 3/32? (2.25MM) ID TUBING,
NATURAL KYNAR PVDF; X220-J1A
52 10-32 SPECIAL TAPERED THREAD WITH 1/4" HEX 2 NOS.
108103 TO 200 SERIES BARB 1/16" (1.6MM) ID TUBING,
NATURAL KYNAR PVDF; X210-J1A
53 1/16-27 NPT THREAD WITH 5/16" HEX TO 200 3 NOS.
107621 SERIES BARB, 1/8"(3 MM) ID TUBING, NATURAL
KYNAR PVDF; 16230-J1A
54 1/16-27 NPT THREAD WITH 5/16" HEX TO 200 3 NOS.
108084 SERIES BARB, 3/32" (2.25 MM) ID TUBING,
NATURAL KYNAR, PDVF-16220-J1A
ACCESSORIES FOR ISE UNIT *
6-6
Serial Item
Number Code
55 113952 REF. ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.*
56 113954 NA ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.*
57 113953 K ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.*
58 113956 ECL ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1 NO.*
59 100346 SPACER ELECTRODE 5206 1 NO.*
60 113957 CLEANING SOLUTION 1 NO.*
61 100315 REAGENT PACK 1 NO.*
MISCELLANEOUS
62 -- APPLICATION SOFTWARE CD 1 NO.
63 -- INSTALLATION AND OPERATIONAL MANUAL 1 NO.
64 -- DRIVERS CD 1 NO.
65 -- UNIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION SHEET 1 NO.
66 -- HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM SHEET FOR XL – 640 - R 1 NO.
67 -- FQC REPORT 1 NO.
68 -- ROHS Declaration 1 NO.*
69 121368 ERBA XL Wash kit NEW (04X100ml) 1 NO.
OPTIONAL ITEMS
70 -- COMPUTER WITH MAINS CORD 1 NO.*
71 -- KEYBOARD 1 NO.*
72 -- MOUSE 1 NO.*
*Optional (As per the customer requirement)
6.4. Installing the Components of the Analyzer

6.4.1. Installing Sample Tray and Reagent Tray
1. Unpack the Sample tray from the accessories box.
2. Hold the sample tray with your right hand.
3. Gently place the sample tray into the sample tray container.
Make sure that the index pin on the Sample tray holding disk slides into the
index hole provided on the sample tray and rotate the knob in clock wise
direction to fix it.
4. Unpack the Reagent tray from the accessories box and hold the Reagent
tray with your right hand. Gently place the Reagent tray into the reagent tray
container.
Make sure that the index pin on the Reagent Transport slides into the index
hole provided on the Reagent tray.
5. Place the Reagent tray lid over the reagent tray.
6-7
Make sure that the index pin on the Reagent transport slides into the index
hole provided on the Reagent tray.
6.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous and Waste

Cans
1. Unpack the Float Sensors for the 4 Cans and place them on one side.
2. From the accessory box remove the 20 liters De-ionized water can, 20 liters
Waste can, 10 liters Bio hazardous waste can and 10 liters Cleaning
solution can, and put them on floor.
3. Unpack Float Sensors cables and connect one end to switch provided on
the rear panel and connect other end to the respective Cans (Longer Float
Sensors with blue sleeves for DI Water, green sleeves for Cleaning
Solution, red sleeves for Bio-hazardous Waste, and yellow sleeves for
Waste Can).
4. Unpack the tubing from the accessory box.
5. Take two separate tubes and connect one end to the analyzer outlet
number 1 and 7. Connect other ends to the 20 liter DI WATER CAN on the
SS (stainless steel) nozzle and white ringed nozzle (SS nozzle on the CAN
is used for DI water and white ring nozzle is for lamp cooling).
Make sure that the blue ringed tube from the analyzer is
connected to the SS nozzle on the CAN and white ringed
tube is connected to the white ringed nozzle on the CAN.
6. Now take one tube and connect one end to the analyzer outlet number 2
and other end to the 10 liter CLEANING SOLUTION can.
7. Take two separate tubes and connect one end to the analyzer outlet
number 3 and 4. Connect other ends to the 10 liter BIO-HAZARDOUS can.
8. Take one tube and connect one end to the analyzer outlet number 5 and
other end to the 20 liter WASTE can.
9. Now connect the large diameter silicon tube to the analyzer outlet number 6
marked WASTE and connect the other end of the tubing into the 20 liter
Waste CAN.
10. Fill 5 liters of DI water into the cleaning solution to prepare working cleaning
solution: Add 50 ml of neutral cleaning solution like (EXTRAN) to 5 liter of DI
water to prepare a 1% solution. Connect one end of silicon tube (one meter
length and 2 x 4 mm thickness) to the detergent outlet on the instrument
and insert the other end into the cleaning solution can.
Refer Figure 6-1. Tube outlet/Inlet and Figure 6-3. Tube connections on the Rear
Panel for more details.
6-8
Take care that all the above-mentioned tubes reach their

respective containers without any sharp bends or
obstructions.
Make sure that the large silicon waste tube from the rear of
the analyzer to the Waste can is slant and in downwards
direction without any bends.
Figure 6-1. Tube outlet/Inlet

OR
Figure 6-2(1). Tube outlet/Inlet
6-9
To Bio-
hazardous
To DI water on Can on red
Stainless steel ringed nozzle
nozzle
Float sensor
cable (red) to
To DI water
Bio-hazardous
Can on white Can
ringed nozzle
Large silicon tube

Float sensor to Waste Can
cable (blue) to
DI Water Can
To Waste Can
on yellow
Float sensor
ringed nozzle
cable (green)
to Cleaning
Solution Can Float sensor
cable (yellow)
To Cleaning to Waste Can
Solution Can
on green
ringed nozzle Figure 6-3. Tube connections on the Rear Panel
OR
Tubing and Tubing and

Float sensor Float sensor
cable (blue) to cable (yellow)
DI water CAN to Waste CAN
Tubing and
Float sensor
Tubing and red cable (red)
Float sensor to Bio-
cable (green) hazardous
to Cleaning CAN
Solution CAN
Figure 6-4(1)
6-10
Bio-
hazardous
Can
Waste Can DI Water Can
Cleaning
Solution Can
Figure 6-5. Tube connection on the CANs
OR
Bio-
hazardous
Can
Waste Can DI Water Can
Cleaning
Solution Can
Figure 6-6(1). Tube connection on the CANs
6-11
6.4.3. USB Communication between Computer and Analyzer

(New)
Follow these instruction to connect the analyzer from the computer:
1. Unpack the USB cable from the accessories box, and connect its one end
to the appropriate USB port of the computer and other end to the BAFO
connector located on the back side of the instrument, as shown in figure
below.
2. Connect one end of the power cord to the analyzer’s power inlet and other
end to the main power supply as shown in figure above.
Make sure that the On/Off power button should be OFF
before turning on the main power supply.
3. The instrument is now connected to the computer and ready for operation.
6.4.3.1. BAFO setting for low speed procedure

1. Select My Computer, click on Prosperities
6-12
4. From System properties select Hardware & click on Device Manager
5. Screen will displays the list of devices

6. Double click on Ports (COM & LPT), screen displays list of ports.
7. Select Prolific USB-to-serial Comm. Port and right click to Properties
6-13
8. Select Port Settings and click on Advanced
9. On Advanced setting screen, move the green bar for Receive Buffer
6-14
& Transmit Buffer to lower side & Press Ok
Move to lower side
OR
6.4.4. Serial Communication between Computer and Analyzer
(Old)
1. Unpack the serial interface cable from the accessories box, and connect its
one end to the serial port 1 of the computer and other end to the connector
located on the back side of the instrument, as shown in figure below.
Rotate
clockwise to fix
properly
2. Connect one end of the power cord to the analyzer’s power outlet at the
back side and other end to the main switch as shown in figure below
6-15
Power
Inlet
Power Cord
The main switch of the analyzer supplies power to the

Analyzer as well as the Reagent cooling system and the ISE
unit, if ISE unit is installed on the instrument make sure that
the all electrodes and the ISE reagent are fitted properly.
6.4.5. Printer Installation (DeskJet or Laser)

Check for following points before using Application Software to generate printouts:
1. Check that printer driver is installed.
2. Connect the printer to the analyzer PC.
3. There should be no paper jam or any other obstruction in the printer.
4. Feed the paper to the printer and switch it ‘ON’.
5. Print a test page from the analyzer computer to confirm correct printing.
6.4.6. Power On
6.4.6.1. Primary Power-ON of main unit
If the main unit is attached with the ISE unit, all electrodes and Reagent pack (with
sufficient Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B solution) should be fitted properly to the ISE
unit in advance before turning on the main switch.
The power switch is located on the rear panel of the main unit.
6-16
Main ON/OFF
power switch
Power Inlet
This is the main switch of the analyzer and supplies power to the analyzer switch
as well as the Reagent cooling system and the ISE unit, if installed (ensure that the
electrodes are fitted, the ISE reagent pack is connected and the ISE power
connector is connected).
6.4.6.2. Secondary Power-ON of main unit

This is the secondary switch, which supplies power to the rest of the analyzer and
is located at the right side of the analyzer. See figure in section 4.11.3 Right Side
View.
In case the malfunction occurred is fatal and the instrument is not able to come to
its stable state then the user needs to switch OFF the switch provided on the
instrument. This will turn OFF the instrument and will not allow further hazard. The
user can turn ON the instrument again so as to restart the functionality.
6.4.6.3. Power-ON of personal computer (PC)

1. Power on the PC that is connected to the main unit.
2. The MultiXL application will be automatically started on PC startup. See
section 6.5.7 Accessing MultiXL Software for more details.
3. If the analyzer is already turned ON, the system goes through a series of
automatic service maintenance actions. Typically, these actions are
performed before the work day begins, so that the instrument is ready to
use when you start work. No user action is required in this process.
See section 13.3.10.6 Auto Maintenance for more details.
The maintenance actions can be performed any time through Maintenance screen
6.4.7. Test Loader Device Connecting to Analyzer PC

Follow the steps below to connect Test Loader to USB port on analyzer PC.
1. Unpack the Test Loader device, Test Loader stand and USB cable from the
accessories as shown in below figure
6-17
2. Place USB -B end of USB cable inside the Test Loader stand as shown in below figure.
3. Fix the Test Loader device on this connector as shown in figure.
4. Now connect the USB-A connector to USB port on analyzer PC
6-18
5. Once connected to analyzer PC, it gives the beep sound that means Test Loader device
is ready to scan.
6. To ensure if Test loader device is connected to analyzer PC, go to Start > Computer >
right click > Manage as shown in below screen;
7. By clicking Manage, following screen will be displayed
6-19
8. Click Device Manager > Human Interface Devices
9. Click Human Interface Devices ; following screen will be displayed;
6-20
10. It detects HID – compliant device that means Test Loader is connected with the
analyzer PC.
OR
11. Go to Start > click Devices and Printers ; following screen will be displayed;
6-21
12. It detects the HID device, that means Test loader is connected with analyzer PC.
13. Close the Computer Management / Devices and Printers screen.
14. Now Keep the System Reagent pack in front of scan side of Test Loader device
as shown in below;
15. Go to Status Monitor > Scan Pack >System Pack details>Scan Pack, scanned
details will be displayed on analyzer PC.
Do not disconnect the device while scanning and registering the

pack. It may damage the device.
16. If Test Loader device is unconnected, pack details can not be scan and following
message will get displayed.
6-22

17. Check the connectivity of Test Loader device by following above steps 6-12.

18. If Test loader device is unconnected, device manager can not detect the HID
device.
6.5. Software Installation Procedure

This section guides you through the installation and up-gradation procedure of
MultiXL software.
You must read the installation instructions carefully before installing the software.
6.5.1. Overview
The MultiXL software is the application software for the XL-640 automated clinical
chemistry analyzer.
This software is multilingual and supports even Asian languages like Chinese,
Japanese, and Thai etc.
6.5.2. Pre-requisite
6.5.2.1. System Configuration
Processor Pentium IV 2.8 GHz or above
Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Service pack 2 or 3
or
Windows 7 Professional English Edition (32-bit)
Hard disk 120 GB or above
RAM Minimum 1 GB RAM for Windows XP with Service
Pack 2/3 or
Minimum 2 GB RAM for Windows 7
Monitor 17 inch / 19 inch color monitor with 1024 * 768
resolution
3ULQWHU/DVHU'HVN-HW
6-23
6.5.2.2. PC Settings Required for Windows XP

PC Settings will be applied automatically while installing the
customized image of Windows 7 Embedded as Operating System.
* A customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is provided by the
analyzer manufacturer, as Operating System for Analyzer PC.
 Remove all memory resident software including anti-virus software from the
Analyzer PC.
 Remove firewall, automatic update, other security software and / or settings
from the Analyzer PC.
 Do not run any other application on the Analyzer PC during batch run on
Analyzer.
 Disable Screen-savers and Power Management on Analyzer PC before
starting the Application Software.
 Ensure that a default printer (Laser Jet / DeskJet) is configured and
connected to Analyzer PC. Set appropriate printer should be set as default
printer.
 Delete the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and “Microsoft
XPS Document Writer” from the system. Following is the procedure.
Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes. Select the
“Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and delete.
Similarly, delete “Microsoft XPS Document Writer”.
 Windows Login User requires Administrative privileges to Install and Run
the Application.
6.5.2.3. Regional and Language Settings for Windows XP

Use the following procedure for setting the regional and language options:
1. Select Regional Options tab, and define the following settings. See figure
below:
6-24
2. Select Languages tab, and define the following settings. See figure below:
3. Select the Advanced tab, and define the following settings.
6-25
6.5.2.4. PC Settings Required for Windows 7

 Remove all memory resident software including anti-virus software from the
Analyzer PC if installed. Use the following procedure:
Click Start button, and click Control Panel. Now, under the Category view,
go to Programs > Programs and Features. Select the desired anti-virus
software from the list, and click Uninstall.
 Remove firewall, automatic update, other security software and from the
Analyzer PC.
go to System and Security > Windows Firewall, and click on the link Turn
off Windows Firewall on or off. Now select the option Turn off Windows
Firewall (not recommended), and then click OK button.
To turn off automatic updates, under Control Panel, go to System and
Security > Windows Update, click on the link Change settings, and select
the Never check for updates (not recommended) from the drop down list,
and click OK.
 Do not run any other application on the Analyzer PC during batch run on
Analyzer.
 Ensure that a default printer (Laser Jet / DeskJet) is configured and
connected to Analyzer PC. Set appropriate printer as default printer.
6-26
 Delete the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and “Microsoft

XPS Document Writer” from the system.
go to Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right click on the
Microsoft Office Document Image Writer, and choose Remove Device to
delete. Similarly, delete “Microsoft XPS Document Writer”.
 Windows Login User requires Administrative privileges to Install and Run
the Application.
 Disable Screen-savers and Power Management on Analyzer PC before
starting the Application Software.
Use the following procedure for disabling the screen saver and power
management:
a. Open Screen Saver Settings by clicking the Start button, clicking
Control Panel, clicking Appearance and Personalization under
Category view, clicking Personalization, and then clicking Screen
Saver.
b. To turn off all screen savers, under Screen Saver, select (None) from
the drop-down list, and then click OK.
6-27
c. Now click on the link Change power settings. The following screen will
be displayed.
d. Click on Balanced Change plan settings.

 Set Turn off the display to Never
6-28
 Set Put the computer to sleep to Never
e. Click on Change advanced power settings.

Set Turn off hard disk after to Never
6-29
Similarly apply same settings to power saver option. Repeat the step c
to e.
 User account control settings
a. Open User Account Control Settings by clicking the Start button, and
then clicking Control Panel. Under Small or Large icons view, click on
User Accounts and then click Change User Account Control
settings.
6-30
The following screen will be displayed:
b. Move Pointer to Never Notify and click OK.

You must re-start the analyzer PC to turn on the User Account Control.
6.5.2.5. Regional and Language Settings for Windows 7

Use the following procedure for setting the regional and language options:
6-31
Ensure that the following regional and language settings are appropriate.
Note that these are critical settings for the communication with the analyzer.
Go to Settings > Control Panel > Clock, Regional and Language Options >
Change the date, time and number format.
a. Following should be the settings for Formats tab:
b. To set Number and Currency Click on Additional settings
6-32
6-33
c. Following should be the Location tab:
d. Following should be the Language tab.
6-34
e. Click on Change Keyboards following screen will display:
6-35
f. Following should be the settings for Administrative tab:
6.5.3. Installing MultiXL Software

Follow the instructions in this section in case you are installing the application
software for the first time on the computer i.e. there is no previous installation of
the software on that computer.
Refer to section 6.5.4 Upgrading MultiXL Software, to upgrade software from
existing version to the new higher version.
6.5.3.1. Installing MultiXL

Follow these instruction for installing the application:
1. Insert the Software Installation CD into the CD drive of the analyzer PC. On
inserting the CD, the MultiXL Installation screen will be displayed.
OR
Go to Windows Explorer. Right-click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive. Click on
AutoPlay option.
6-36
OR
Go to Windows Explorer. Right-click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive. Click on
Explore and double-click on Launcher.bat.
The following screen will be displayed.
2. Click on Install MultiXL Application & Database link and follow the on-
screen instructions.
OR
Click on the Browse this CD link.
The software installation CD contains the folders and files as shown in the
figure below:
6-37
3. Open Setup folder, and double-click on the setup.exe.

On clicking, the following screen will be displayed.
This screen will not be displayed if .NET framework 2 is

already installed on your computer.
6-38
4. Click Accept to continue.

This screen will not be displayed if Crystal Reports for

.NET framework 2.0 is already installed on your computer.
5. Click Accept to continue.

6-39
This screen will not be displayed if SQL Server 2005

Express Edition is already installed on the analyzer
computer.
In case, Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) is already installed
then the following screen will be displayed in Windows XP. The installer
will not proceed with the MultiXL installation.
Click on Close and uninstall the Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine from
Control Panel > Add / Remove Program. Then start the MultiXL
installation again.
Please refer to Migration Guide for Database Engine, MSDE to SQL Server
Express 2005 from the Installation CD, namely “Migration Steps from MSDE
to SQL Express.chm”.
6-40
In case of Windows 7 operating system, following screen may appear while

installing MultiXL Application. Please click on Run Program button to
continue with MultiXL Installation.
It is not necessary to apply SQL Server 2005 Service Pack

3 (SP3) or later Service Pack as shown in the above
screenshot.
On clicking, the following screens will be displayed in a sequence.
6-41
Wait until the setup wizard is visible on the screen as shown below.
6. Click Next.
On clicking, the following window will be displayed.
6-42
On keeping Configure Database checkbox checked (ticked), the installer

will create or upgrade the database along with the installation of MultiXL.
(In case, the Database is found present then the existing database will be
upgraded to the latest version. When the Database is not found then the
installer will create a blank Database).
In case, Configure Database option is unchecked; the installer will not
create/upgrade the database and you have to install it manually. Refer
section 6.5.3.2.1 Installing Blank Database for more details.
7. Click Next.
6-43
The installer will install the software in the default location C:\Program
Files\MultiXL\.
The installation in a location, different from the default
one, is not recommendable.
8. Ensure that “Everyone” is selected, and click Next.

On clicking, the following window will be displayed. Click Next to confirm
the installation.
6-44
9. On clicking Next, the installation is started and the status will be displayed,
as shown below.
6-45
The following screen will be displayed if the Configure Database option is

selected.
Once the above operation is completed, the software icon will be created on
the desktop and the Installation Complete screen will be displayed
6-46
10. Click on Close to close the screen and restart the computer.
11. Now double click on MultiXL icon [ ] from the desktop or choose Start >
All Programs > MultiXL to start the application.
The Detect Regional Settings screen will be displayed
and the application halts in case, if the language setting
is other than English (United States).
See section 6.5.2.3 Regional and Language Settings for Windows XP in

more details.
For Windows 7 operating system, refer section 6.5.2.5 Regional and
Language Settings for Windows 7.
The following observations are noted after installing MultiXL on Windows 7
Embedded operating system:
 MultiXL Shutdown
On clicking Shutdown button in MultiXL, Analyzer PC will shut down
automatically, after completing auto-maintenance activities on analyzer.
 The windows key (left and right) will be disabled from the keyboard.
Logging of MultiXL start and shutdown events (for internal use).
 MultiXL screen will cover the desktop in its maximized state.
 USB mass storage devices will be disabled.
USB drive can be accessible through Administrator login
only.
To copy software data to USB drive, use Utility > Backup
screen. See section 13.4.1.2 Copy Data to USB for more
information.
 Restricted user account for MultiXL.
6-47
To install and uninstall any application from the PC, you must be logged on
as (windows) user “Administrator”.
To log in to the administrative account, go to Start > Shutdown > Logoff
and then click the Administrator icon and provide the administrator
password. The default administrator password is tbm1234@.
6.5.3.2. Installing Database

The installation and restoring database should be performed by
the trained person only.
Database installation is required only if the Configure Database option was de-
selected (unchecked) during installation (Refer step 6 of section Installing MultiXL).
In case, Configure Database option is selected (ticked by default) during Software
Installation then the Database will be created / upgraded automatically as part of
installation. (Database, when already exists, will be upgraded to the latest version.
When database is not found on PC, then the installer will create a blank database).
In case, the Configure Database option is not selected, then the database should
be installed manually, as follows.
Always use Database Utility folder from the software CD, which
consists of files required to install or upgrade the database.
See section 6.5.3.2.1 Installing Blank Database for more details.

If you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)”
while performing the above mention steps then refer section
21.2.1 SQL Server 2005 Configuration for settings.
6.5.3.2.1. Installing Blank Database

For installing the Blank Database from Software CD, use the following instructions:
1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL installation screen as
shown below.
6-48
OR
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and
double-click DatabaseUtility.exe.
Default Database folder is the one from where the DatabaseUtility.exe is
running. Database folder refers to the Database, required for performing
various operations and storing the result data.
2. Click on CHECK DATABASE.
This command will check for the existing database on your computer. If no
database is available, a message is displayed on the following screen.
3. Click on CREATE DATABASE.

This will create the database from the location specified on the screen. This
is the default location where the blank database is stored in software
installation CD.
6-49
(To restore the backup of new database, you need to change the location
using BROWSE FILE button. Refer section 6.5.5.2.2 Restoring Backup of
New Database in more details).
For example, in the above screen, the database location is E:\Database
Utility\MultiXL BKP.
If Archive is not available then utility will ask for Blank Database location
and the following window will be displayed.
4. Now click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the
software CD, and then click Open.
After some time, the database will be created successfully and the
following screen will be displayed.
6-50
5. Once the database is created, click CHECK DATABASE to ensure the

proper creation of the database. The following screen will be displayed.
6. The above screen indicates that the database is installed successfully. Click
Close to exit from the utility screen.
7. Now you can access the MultiXL application. Refer section 6.5.7 Accessing
MultiXL Software for more details.
1. Make sure that all software versions are installed correctly.

2. To check the installed software versions, go to Service Check
screen, right click on the Misc Commands button, and choose
Software Version option.
6-51
6.5.4. Upgrading MultiXL Software

If the MultiXL software is already installed on the analyzer computer and you
receive a newer version of software, then the following steps should be performed:
 Upgrade MultiXL Software
 Upgrade MultiXL Database
Take a database backup, before proceeding with software
upgrade.
6.5.4.1. Upgrade Software

You can upgrade the software version by un-installing the existing software
version from the PC and installing the newer version from the CD as follows.
6.5.4.1.1. Un-installing Software
To un-install the software, do one of the following:
1. Click on the Uninstall MultiXL Application from the MultiXL Installation
screen as shown below.
OR
Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel. In the Control Panel, double click
on Add or Remove Programs. This method is used only, if you are using
Windows XP operating system.
For Windows 7 operating systems, click Start button on the desktop, under
Category view, go to Control Panel > Programs > Programs and
Features.
2. Select the MultiXL software, and then click Remove.
6-52
On clicking, the software will be removed from the computer.

To uninstall the MultiXL software you must be logged on as
user “Administrator”.
6.5.4.1.2. Installing Software - New Version

Refer section 6.5.3.1 Installing MultiXL for more details.
6.5.4.2. Upgrade Database

Upgrade the database using the software CD of the newer version whenever you
install the new software version.
Database can be upgraded to match the newer software version without deleting
the database of the existing version.
Ensure to take Database backup before upgrading the
Database.
6.5.4.2.1. Upgrading Database

Follow these instructions for upgrading the database:
1. Click on the Run Database Utility link from MultiXL Installation screen as
shown below.
OR
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Double-
click on DatabaseUtility.exe.
2. Click UPGRADE DB.
6-53
On clicking, the system prompt to select the upgrade script file, as shown
in the following screen.
Select the upgrade script file from the software CD, and then click Open.
The upgrade script file is provided in the application
software CD in the Database Utility folder.
On clicking, the upgrade process starts. If archive Database is not available

then the utility will prompt to select the path for Blank Database and the
3. Click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the software
CD, and then click Open.
6-54
After some time, the database will be upgraded successfully and the
4. Click to close the database utility screen.

6-55
After installing the new software version, if the database is

not upgraded using the upgrade script file provided in the
Software CD then the following screen will be displayed on
starting the application software. This screen indicates the
software and database version mismatch.
In case, the software and database version mismatch screen is displayed; upgrade
the database using the script file, provided in the software CD. Refer section
software CD. Refer section 6.5.4.2.1 Upgrading Database for more details.
6.5.5. Database Utility Options

The Database Utility can be used to take the Database Backup or change the
Database.
6.5.5.1. Database Backup

Follow these instructions for taking the backup of database:
1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and double-
click DatabaseUtility.exe.
6-56
3. Click on BACKUP DATABASE. The following screen will be displayed.
4. Choose the path to store the backup, and then click Save.
On clicking, the following screen will be displayed to confirm the successful
completion of backup database.
6-57
If archive database is present then backup will be stored with “ARH”

extension with the same default file name.
For example: In this case archive backup will be stored on the same path
with file name “MultiXL1812013.ARH”. The default file name contains
“MultiXL” (the application name), followed by date, month and year.
6.5.5.2. Change Database

In case, if you wish to change the database, you must delete the existing database
and then restore the backup of another database using database utility,
It is recommended to change the database with proper
guidance of expert service engineer. Improper installation
may impact the calibration of the analyzer, in addition to
loss of data such as QC data and chemistry calibration.
Before installation, you should take the backup of the

database before deleting or changing the database.
Database can be changed in two parts:

1. Delete (existing) Database.
2. Restore Backup of another Database.
6.5.5.2.1. Deleting existing database
Follow these instructions for deleting the database:
1. Click on the Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and
double-click DatabaseUtility.exe.
2. Click on CHECK DATABASE to check whether the database is present.
6-58
3. Click on DELETE DATABASE to delete the existing database. The

4. Click on Yes to continue with database deletion.

On clicking, the warning message will be displayed to re-confirm the
deletion.
5. Click Yes to continue.

On clicking, a message will be displayed to take the database backup
before deletion.
6-59
6. Click Yes to take the backup.

The following window will be displayed to select desired Backup location.
Select the appropriate location for saving the backup database.
On clicking No, Production (Live) & Archive database will be

deleted without taking the database backup.
Best Practice: Backup database before deleting the same.
7. Click Save to save the database.
The following screen will be displayed after successful deletion of the
database.
6-60
6.5.5.2.2. Restoring backup of new database

1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Double-
3. Now, click on the BROWSE FILE.
Select the location where the backup database file is saved.
4. Select the database file and then click Open.
6-61
5. Click on CREATE DATABASE.

On clicking, the database will be created and the following screen would
be displayed.
If the Archive is not available then utility will ask for blank
database location. Select blank database file (MultiXL.BKP)
from the latest software CD.
6. Click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the
application CD.
7. Click Open.
The following screen will be displayed after successful creation of
database.
6-62
8. Click on CHECK DATABASE to ensure proper creation of the database.
9. Click to close the database utility screen.

6.5.5.2.3. Restoring Archive Database
Follow these instructions to restore the archived database:
1. Click on the Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen.
Or
Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Double-
2. Click on RESTORE ARCHIVE.
The following window will be displayed. Select the appropriate location
where the archive database is saved and then click Open.
6-63
3. After restoring the archive database successfully, the following screen will be
displayed.
6.5.5.3. Taking Diagnosis Backup

This button is used to take the database backup for diagnosis which will be without
patient demographics to support patient privacy policy.
Diagnosis backup can be used by support team only for troubleshooting purpose.
Following are the list of demographics that are excluded from the diagnosis
database: Patient Name, Patient ID, Patient Address (line 1, 2 and 3), and Patient
Tel. No. Patient Remarks, Area i.e. Location of the Sample Collection, Reference
Doctor Analyst.
To take the backup of the data base, use the following steps:
6-64
1. Run Database Utility.

2. Click on DIAGNOSIS BACKUP.
On clicking, the diagnosis backup database will be created with a file name
and saved in the location C:\MultiXLLog folder. See figure below.
For example, diagnosis backup created on 30 Sept 2013 at 11:30:45 am will

have file name “MultiXL_20130930113045.DIAG”.
After the completion of backup, user should copy the file name and send to
support team for diagnosis.
6.5.6. Installing Team Viewer

Team Viewer is used to access analyzer computers, which makes it an ideal solution for
Remote Monitoring and Trouble Shooting purposes.
Pre-requisite for Analyzer PC and Remote PC:
a) Internet connection availability - uninterrupted with good speed.
b) Team-viewer is not blocked in System Settings for PC/Network Security.
Team Viewer connectivity depends upon the Internet speed

available at the Lab/Site and load on analyzer PC. Team Viewer
uses remote desktop technology to control a computer from an
alternate location. The main cause of lag when controlling a
remote computer is network speed.
6-65
Regular PC cleanup and maintenance should be carried out to

keep your PC running at optimum speed. Disk Cleanup
application scans and deletes unnecessary files and Disk
Defragmenter improves performance by eliminating the gaps in
data. Use the Start menu's search box to locate these programs.
Viruses also impact performance. Update your virus definitions
and complete a full system scan.
It is not recommendable to use Team Viewer remote control
session during Batch RUN with Actual Patient samples on the
analyzer, as it may slow-down / interrupt the system
performance.
Installation Procedure:
1. On insertion of CD on Auto-play, MultiXL Installation screen will be displayed with the

option to install Team Viewer.
OR
1. Go to Windows Explorer and Right Click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive and Click on Auto-
play.
2. Click on Install Team Viewer. On selection of this option, following pop-up appears;
6-66
3. Team Viewer installation is carried out at default installation location C:\Program Files\
TeamViewer.
4. After Team Viewer is installed successfully, above screen will be closed automatically
and user will be redirected to the Launcher Screen.
Start-up procedure for Team Viewer remote support.
Open Team Viewer 10 Host from Windows Start menu. Following screen appears;
6-67
Team Viewer ID (Your ID marked in Red in above image) is unique for every device.
This ID of the Analyzer PC is required for connecting another Remote PC through
TeamViewer. Password is “tbm1234@”, by default.
Password is pre-configured by default, during installation of
TeamViewer Host.
Analyzer user / operator have to share Your ID (Team Viewer ID marked in RED) to
the support team for Remote Support (Remote control session on Analyzer PC)
Do not change the default password for the seamless remote
support.
6.5.7. Accessing MultiXL Software

MultiXL screens are best viewed with 1024 * 768
resolutions.
On starting MultiXL, the monitor resolution, if different, will
change automatically to 1024*768 pixels.
On closing MultiXL, the resolution will be restored to the
previous.
Once MultiXL software is installed successfully; next time on PC startup, MultiXL
software will be launched automatically.
To access the software, perform one of the following steps:
 Turn on the analyzer PC. MultiXL application will start automatically
 Double click on the MultiXL icon created on your desktop
 Click on Start > Programs > MultiXL.
When starting MultiXL first time, the product login screen as shown below
will be displayed.
The product login and password is written on the application software CD.
Enter the appropriate details in the PRODUCT LOGIN and PASSWORD
text box, and click OK.
6-68
User login screen as shown below will be displayed.

This screen will be displayed every time, on starting MultiXL.
Enter the following details, and then click OK. You may use this Login
details for the first time and create the other login IDs with appropriate user
access rights.
Login ID : Guest or guest.
Password : Guest (Case – sensitive)
6-69
The main screen will be opened as follows.
6.5.8. Password Recovery Procedure

This section describes the procedure to recover the password for the user login
Guest, in case you lose or forget the password. However, the password for other
user logins can be reset by the administrator for their login from the Settings >
User Rights screen.
Follow this procedure to recover the login password for Guest:
1. In the login screen, enter Guest in the Login ID text box and click on the
link “Click Here” as shown in figure below.
6-70
2. On clicking the link, a text file with the password details is created at the
location C:\MultiXLLOG. The file name and the path will be displayed as
follows.
3. Go to folder C:\MultiXLLOG, and send the generated text file, for example
“ForgotPWD20101018.Txt” in the above example; to the service engineer.
4. Click OK to close.
6.5.9. Steps Performed by the Service Engineer

The following steps will be performed by the service engineer:
1. Open Password Recovery Utility software from the CD.
2. Click Browse, and select the appropriate text file that is received by the
operator.
3. Click Ok.
6-71
6.5.10. Main Menu Software Layout
The Main Menu consists of following options:

Patient Entry – This option is used to define patient demographics and schedule
tests, Calculation items, and Test profiles.
6-72
Test Parameter – This option is used to define Test details, set Auto-rerun for a
single or multiple test, set Online Calibration to trace reagent bottle change,
Download & Upload test, and initialize test.
Profiles / Calc – This option is used to define Profiles or Calculated Items.
QC/Calibration – This option is used to schedule calibration (Blanks, Standards,
and Calibrators) and Controls. This option is also used to view the calibration
curves for a particular test, the QC Data and Twin Plot graph.
Consumables – This option is used to define consumables such as Blanks,
Reagents, Standards, Calibrators, Controls, Diluents/Serum diluent, Wash
Solution, SI reagent, and Urine ISE diluent.
Status Monitor – This option is used to perform calibration/patient batch run,
view liquid level of reagents for different Tests and perform Sample & Reagent
Barcode scans. It is also used to view online reaction curve and the progress of
the batch run.
Search – This option is used to search Patient Results, Calibration / Control
Results, Patients, Consumables or Test Details.
Reports – This option is used to view Patient Reports, Statistical data using Test
Statistics screen, the test results on Result Reprint screen, calibration of a test
over a period of time on Calibration Trace screen, Calibration Monitor screen with
current calibration, errors reported (during sample run, service, maintenance, and
auto-startup) in Error Log screen, Reaction curves, Reagent consumption and
ISE calibration details.
Master – This option is used to define miscellaneous parameters like Area
(location of collecting samples), Laboratory, Doctor, Analyst, Manufacturer,
Reference range, Unit, Calculation formula and Instrument (for offline result
entry) details.
Utility – This option is used to define Reagent Positions and Backup Data, to
enter and print Offline Results and recalculate the results obtained from analyzer.
Service Check – Only the authorized Service Personnel should use this option.
Maintenance – This option is used to perform various maintenance operations
on analyzer, dead volume calibration for sample and reagent. The automatic
maintenance on startup and shut-down of analyzer can be initiated from this
option. Auto-maintenance activities (to be performed after wake-up from sleep
mode) can be scheduled from here.
Settings – This option is used to define system parameters, carryover pairs, test
sequence, rerun flags, to assign user rights, serum indices. This option is also
used to establish the communication between the analyzer PC and host
computer (LIS) using Host settings screen.
Hibernate/Wake-up – This option is used to manually hibernate the analyzer to
save power. This power-saving mode requires supporting hardware on the
analyzer. Hence, the option will be visible only if the analyzer is having the
6-73
required hardware. On clicking Hibernate, this option will turn as Wake-up to

activate the analyzer from the power-saving mode.
Archive – This option is used to archive patient results and view the Archived
data at a later date. This option will be visible only after the patient data exceeds
the defined threshold limits for the first time, requiring to archive the data.
Shut Down – This option is used to turn off the application software with / without
maintenance of analyzer.
The selected menu option will be displayed in yellow color.
The menus can also be accessed using the keyboard shortcut keys shown in
brackets.
Following screenshot shows list of common buttons used:
A – Moves to First Record.

B – Moves to Previous Record.
C – Moves to Next Record.
D – Moves to Last Record.
E – Prints the Screen Details in Report Format.
F – Saves a new Entry or Modified Entry.
G – Clears the data on the current screen.
H – Edit or modify the data on the current screen.
I – Deletes a patient record.
Following is a three dotted button available on most of the screens. This button is
to be clicked either to select or enter data for that text box.
For example: In the screenshot below, button is placed near a box with caption
‘Test’. If this button is clicked, small window opens up for selecting a particular test.
Following is an indication bar available on most of the screens. This provides help /
warning messages to the user.
The sign * near any of the text box, checkbox or drop down list on the software
screens indicate that it is mandatory. The sign ** near any of the column in the
master option indicate that row is a default row and can’t be deleted by the user.
6-74
6.6. Display Language Settings

You may change the language of your choice from the available list of languages.
MultiXL application uses this language in dialog boxes, menus, captions, header in
the screen, and other items in the user interface.
List of Languages supported: English, Chinese, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese,
Russian, French, German, Polish and Czech.
Changing the language is as follows:
1. Click on the Settings from the main menu.
2. Now go to System Parameters screen, and click on the three dotted
button available on the Default Language text box.
On clicking, the Change Language dialog box will be displayed
3. Select the desired language from the Set Language drop down list.
4. Click OK. The captions on the screen will appear in the selected language.
6.7. Installing Touch Screen Monitor

1. Logoff current session of PC and Login with User ID Administrator.
2. Copy the folder “Touch” from CD to C:\
3. Double Click “Touch.bat” from CD.
4. Command window will open and Installation will start automatically.
Installation process will take around approximately 10 to 15 seconds only.
5. After Installation, Command window will close automatically.
6. Now Restart the PC manually. Windows update will happen during
shutdown and Start. After windows update PC will restart once again.
7. Now TBM OS becomes touch enabled.
8. Then Install the Touch Driver provided along with Monitor as per instruction
given by the provider.
6-75
7. Relocation
This section provides instructions for decontaminating, draining out the analyzer,
disconnecting peripheral devices and packing the analyzer securely for
transportation, and is intended for use by only a Transasia Bio-medicals Limited
trained field service engineer.
Only a trained service representative should carry out the relocation
of the analyzer. Problems resulting from the relocation of the
Analyzer by anyone other than a service representative will not be
covered under warranty.
Besides the various decontamination procedures listed out, under

section 7.2 Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System. Other
procedures listed out by local, State or National law/ authorities,
should also be carried out, all bio hazardous items must also be
disposed off in accordance with these regulations..
Voltages present in the XL-640 can produce severe electrical

shocks. Place the analyzer and the computer in the OFF (0) position
and disconnect all line chords before attempting any maintenance
procedure.
Pack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you can damage accurately

adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
Any analyzer spares being shipped back, that has had Bio-
hazardous material run on it, must be decontaminated, and the
decontamination certificate that has been included under section 7.4
Decontamination Certificate , must be filled, duly signed, and
attached with the shipping documents..
The sample probe may come directly in contact with human sera
and is highly bio-hazardous, please take the necessary precaution
to protect yourself when carrying out this procedure.
7-1
When carrying out this procedure, sufficient precaution should be

taken to protect you from potential injury or infection.
To prevent contaminating yourself and others, treat all human sera
as potentially Biohazards.
7.1. Tools and Materials Required for Packing the

Analyzer
 Base pallet with “Z” bracket and XL-640 standard wooden box.
 Cardboard boxes for the accessories.
 Protective Packing material like a bubble sheet, or foam.
 “Z “brackets with nuts, bolts and washers.
 XL-640 standard tool kit.
 Sodium hypo chloride
 Disposable paper tissues.
 Gloves.
 5.25% Sodium hypo chloride (bleach solution)
 Four black stopper caps and a white semitransparent big cap required for
the analyzer rear outlet nozzles.
7.2. Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System

1. From the Maintenance screen, perform a cuvette rinse cycle. To do this, in
the Wash frame, select CUVETTE RINSE, and then press START. Perform
this operation with cleaning solution and two more operations with DI water
in cleaning solution CAN.
2. Take a printout or backup of the error logs on the memory. To do this, go to
Reports screen, and click Backup from the menu. Select the backup path
where you require the data to be stored by using Browse and click Backup.
3. Remove and discard, all Sample cups and Reagent bottles old and new
(DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER)
4. Remove the Cleaning solution and DI water CAN, along with their external
associated tubing and discard them in regulation with the local law (DO
NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER).
5. Drain the system. To do this, go to the Maintenance screen, and perform
cuvette rinse operation. Repeat the cycle multiple times till all the water from
the pressure tank and associated tubes have been drained out.
6. In case of ISE, perform this operation prior to step 1. To drain the ISE
system, go to Maintenance screen, in the ISE frame, click on the ISE UNIT
7-2
and choose CLEAN > ISE ON > START. Perform the clean cycle using ISE
Cleaning solution. Follow this with multiple PURGE cycles (approximately 5
cycles).
7. Remove the Cal A bottle and discard its contents, perform multiple PURGE
cycles. After this, put old / dummy electrodes and place Cal A tube
assembly into the DI water (slightly warm 35 – 37 ° C) and perform PURGE
about 10 times. Remove DI water and perform PURGE at least 15 times
(drain all tube of water / fluid).
8. Remove the electrodes, and pack them in their respective original boxes
(PLACE Cal A solution in K electrode flow path and close with waterproof
tape) that were supplied with them.
9. Place the electrodes in the accessories box.
10. Drain the water of the Pressure tank. Locate the drain tube and open the
Shut off valve (mounted on the bottom right side of the analyzer’s chassis),
and allow the entire contents of the pressure tank to drain out. See figure
below.
11. After completing the draining procedure DO NOT FORGET TO CLOSE

THE DRAIN NUT.
12. Using a suction pump, drain out water from the Large Waste tube outlet
(Gravity flow path). Put the Black stopper caps onto the Biohazards waste,
cleaning solution and De-ionized water outlet nozzles and the white
semitransparent big cap onto the waste outlet nozzle that is located on the
rear of the analyzer.
13. Turn off the power to the Analyzer, computer, monitor and printer.
14. Remove the Waste and Bio Hazardous waste CAN’S, and discard them in
regulation with the local law (DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE
ANALYZER).
15. Turn off the power to the Analyzer, computer, monitor and printer.
16. Disconnect all external cables and peripheral devices.
7-3
17. Wipe the Monitor, Computer and Keyboard external surface with a
nonabrasive cleaner, or a use a soft lint free clot moistened with a 0.5%
dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochloride (Bleach) solution to clean and
decontaminate the trolley, computer, monitor and printer external surface.
18. But before using it, make sure that you test it on a small section of the
computer, wait till it dries, see the results, only if you are satisfied that there
is no damage or change of colors to plastic parts, then proceed to clean the
entire computer with this cleaning solution.
Make sure that no solution falls or seeps into the Computer,
Monitor, Printer, or Keyboard.
19. Adequately pack all the cables, Power cord, and peripheral devices into the
accessories box.
Do not ship any accessories that have been in contact with
Bio Hazardous fluids.
Due to possible spillage, the sample tray comes in contact

with body fluids, To prevent contaminating yourself and
others, treat all human sera as potentially Bio-hazardous.
Take the necessary precautions to protect yourself from
contamination and personal injury.
20. Lift and remove the Sample and reagent tray carousel, with the help of a
soft brush and a lint free clot moistened in a 0.5 % dilution of a 5.25 %
Sodium hypo chloride (bleach) solution clean and decontaminate the
Sample and reagent tray, also remove all debris and spillage from the wells
of the Sample and Reagent trays, dry and pack them individually, and
appropriately into cardboard boxes.
The Cuvettes comes directly in contact with human sera and
is highly Bio-hazardous, please take the necessary
precaution to protect yourself when carrying out this
procedure.
21. Remove the Sample, Reagent 1, and Reagent 2 Probes and place them
into a beaker or test tube filled with a mild Sodium Hypochloride or extra
solution, the level of the solution should be such that only the lower half
centimeter of the probe is in contact with the solution.
22. The sample probe system comprises of two metal concentric probes that
are used for liquid level sensing. In order to clean this probe from the
outside, soak a tissue paper in 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium
Hypochloride (Bleach) , and wrap it around the probe upper end, then gently
slide the tissue paper down towards the tip and out of the probe, repeat this
cycle numerous times until you are satisfied that the probe is thoroughly
7-4
cleaned . Make sure that this cleaning procedure is done only in one
direction that is from top to down and not in the reverse. Repeat the same
procedure with de-ionized water.
23. In order to clean the sample probe internally, gently with the help of a
syringe (5 ml) flush the probe first with a 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium
Hypochloride (Bleach) and then flush it multiple times with de-ionized water.
Dry and adequately pack the probes with sufficient protection, in separate
boxes.
When replacing the cuvettes back into their slots, make
sure that you grip them by their sides and top end. Never let
the fingers or any sharp object come in contact with the
optical area.
24. Rotate the Sample, Reagent1 and Reagent 2 arm and lower them into the
Sample and reagent tray, wells.
25. To decontaminate, the Stirrer paddles, soak a tissue paper in 5.0% dilution
of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochloride (Bleach) , and wrap it around the probes
upper end, then gently slide the tissue paper down towards the tip and out
of the probe, repeat this cycle numerous times until you are satisfied that
the probe is thoroughly cleaned. Make sure that this cleaning procedure is
done only in one direction that is from top to down and not in the reverse.
Repeat the same procedure with de-ionized water,
26. Move the Stirrer arms to the Trough position, and lower them into the
trough. Place the buffers below the Stirrer base.
The cuvette rinsing unit suction probes comes directly in
contact with human sera and is highly Bio-hazardous. Take
the necessary precaution to protect yourself when carrying
out this procedure.
27. Unscrew the metal thumbscrew located above the cuvette rinsing unit plate,
lift the Laundry unit upwards and place it in a shallow tray. Clean individual
probes with the help of a lint free tissue moistened with a solution of 0.5%
dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochloride rinse thoroughly with de-ionized
water and dry.
When refitting the Cuvette rinsing unit make sure that the
suction probes go directly in the center of the cuvette slot,
and they do not touch the walls.
28. Refit the Cuvette rinsing unit and place a buffer packing material between
the Laundry plate of the rinsing unit and the top plate of the analyzer.
7.3. Packing the Analyzer

Pack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you can damage
the accurately adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
7-5
Do not ship any accessories in the main analyzer box. All

accessories should be shipped separately in the accessories box.
1. Wrap the plastic protective sheet, around the entire analyzer.

Lift or slide the analyzer onto the wooden pallet by holding
the base plate of the analyzer, lifting the analyzer by its
side panels can damage the analyzer.
2. Place the base pallet just besides the right side (hydraulics side) of the
analyzer.
Make sure the pallet is positioned correctly, that is the
analyzer will finally rest on the pallet, with the front of the
analyzer facing the side marked front on the pallet.
3. Gently lift the hydraulics side of the analyzer (as it is the lighter side) and
slide the wooden pallet below the side castors of the analyzer, when doing
this a foot should be placed on the one or slide of the pallet to prevent it
from lifting gently slide the analyzer onto the wooden pallet and position it,
rotate the foot rests downwards, in order to enable the analyzer to rest on
the foot rest only and the castors are in mid air, make sure that all four foot
rests are adjusted to about the same height.
4. Carefully slide in the “Z” brackets one at a time, making sure that they fit
into the groove provided on the footrest, bolt down the “Z” brackets onto the
wooden pallet.
The instrument must be shipped with the Castors mildly
taking analyzer weight; the “Z” bracket and the footrest
should also support the weight of the analyzer. Cautiously
fit the “Z” bracket to prevent any personal injury.
5. Fit the side ply of the wooden box and make sure that the following
markings are clearly indicated on the wooden box
6. Indication as to which side is the top and which is the bottom of the
analyzer.
a. Fragile indication.
b. Do not tumble.
c. Do not stack on top this box.
d. Protect from sunlight and rain.
e. Precession instrument.
f. Copy of the certificate of decontamination
7-6
7.4. Decontamination Certificate

TO WHOMSOEVER IT MAY CONCERN, THIS ANALYZER ALONG WITH ITS
RELATED ACCESSORIES HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND DECONTAMINATED
IN ACCORDANCE TO THE STIPULATED PROCEDURES LISTED OUT IN THE
SERVICE MANUAL, UNDER SECTION 7-2 UNINSTALLING AND
DECONTAMINATING THE SYSTEM AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL AND
STATE LAWS.
INSTRUMENT MODEL:
SERIAL NUMBER:
DISTRIBUTORS NAME:
DISTRIBUTORS ADDRESS:
CITY: COUNTRY:
CUSTOMERS NAME:
CUSTOMERS ADDRESS:
CITY: COUNTRY:
PROCEDURES CARRIED OUT BY: SIGNATURE DATE
7-7
8. Functional Description
8.1. Identification of Main Components
The XL-640 analyzer consist of the following main components:

1 Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) 6 Reagent Tray (RGT)
2 Sample Arm (SPT) 7 Reagent 2 Arm (R2PT)
3 ISE Reagent Pack 8 Reagent 1 Arm (R1PT)
4 Reaction Cuvette Tray (RCT) 9 Stirrer
5 Sample Tray or Auto Sampler Unit (ASP)
8-1
8.2. Functionality
8.2.1. Auto Sampler Unit
The auto sampler unit (ASP) consists of a removable turntable with sample tube
holder, a rotating mechanism, and a bar code reader for identifying the samples.
The ASP can accommodate 50 sample tubes. Each sample is aspirated by the
sample pipette unit (SPT) and dispensed into cuvettes of the Reaction Tray Unit
(RCT).
Outer ring of
inner tray Outer tray or
routine sample
tray
Inner ring of
inner tray
Inner tray or
standard
tray
The ASP tray of the analyzer consists of two trays:

 Outer or routine sample tray
 Inner or standard sample tray
The outer tray or routine sample tray has 50 positions that are used for placing
patient’s or Emergency samples. The adapters are available for loading the tubes
of different sizes.
The inner tray or standard disk has 32 positions that are used for placing Blanks,
Controls, Standards, and Calibrators. Emergency samples can also be placed on
these positions. It is a detachable tray mounted on top of the routine sample tray.
Two standard disks are available. On these trays, only 2 ml sample cups can be
placed in the positions as marked on the disk.
The outer ring of the standard tray contains 20 positions for Standards (marked
S1-S20).
8-2
The inner ring contains 8 positions for Controls (marked C1-C8), 2 separate
positions for optional ISE solution (marked ISE1 and ISE2) and 2 positions for
blanks (marked B1 and B2).
The types of usable sample tubes and cups are shown below:
 10 ml tubes
 5 or 7 ml tubes
 2 ml cups
8.2.2. Sample Barcode Reader

The barcode reader reads barcode of the label affixed on the outer surface of the
sample tube. The reader uses a laser beam that is sensitive to the reflections from
the line and space thickness and variation. The reader translates the reflected light
into digital data that is transferred to the analyzer computer.
The following readable barcodes types specified for sample tubes are:
Symbol Valid character and symbol
NW-7 Numerals (0 – 9), symbols (-, $, /, +).
Code39 Numerals (0 – 9), alphabetical characters, symbols (-, space, $, /, +,
%).
ITF Numerals only (0 – 9).
UPC Numerals only (0 – 9).
2 of 5 Standard Numerals only (0 – 9).
Code128: All ASCII code characters [numerals (0 – 9), alphabetical characters
Set A, Set B, Set C (uppercase/lowercase), symbols, control characters).
When the reader reads the barcode other than the specified barcode types, then
the appropriate error message is indicated.
8.2.3. Sample Pipette Unit
8-3
The sample pipette unit (SPT) consists of an up-and-down movement mechanism,

rotating mechanism, clot detection sensor, liquid level sensor and probe down limit
sensor. The sample pipette is connected to the syringe for sample aspiration via
PTFE tube. The sample on the ASP unit is aspirated by the pipette and then
dispensed into the cuvette in the RCT unit. The sample probe is coated with Teflon
from outside as well as inside to minimize any sample carry over.
When an optional ISE unit is fitted and the ISE measurement is performed, the
SPT aspirates sample for ISE measurement and dispenses it into the sample port
of the ISE unit. The SPT arm is equipped with Clot detection sensor to detect the
presence of clot in the sample.
8.2.3.1. Liquid Level Sensor (LLS)

When the tip of the probe reaches and touches the sample surface, the
electrostatic capacitance of the metallic nozzle varies. The variation of the
capacitance is detected and consequently the level of sample is detected.
8.2.3.2. Probe Down Limit Sensor

When the tip of probe hits the bottom of sample tube (or sample cup) due to the
insufficient sample volume, the lower limit sensor detects that the tip of nozzle hits
the bottom and stops its downward movement.
8.2.3.3. Clot Detection Sensor

When the tip of the probe detects the clot in the sample tube/sample cup, the clot
detection sensor detects the clot and stops sampling of the current schedule and
performs sample probe wash. Further action whether to permanently pause the
sampling or continue with the next sample is done according to the setting in the
System Parameter screen.
8.2.3.4. SPT Washing Station

The wash station for the sample probe consists of a single arrangement. The same
position is used as Drain Position” (for internal cleaning of the probe) and also as
“Trough Position” (for external cleaning of the probe). After the sample probe has
dispensed sample into the cuvette, the sample arm moves to the wash station
where it is throws away the excess sample into the drain and is cleaned internally
as well as externally using a jet of DI Water.
8-4
8.2.4. Reagent 1 and 2 Pipette Unit (R1PT and R2PT)
R1PT Arm
R2PT Arm
The reagent pipette unit (R1PT and R2PT) consists of an up-and-down movement
mechanism, rotating mechanism, level sensor and lower limit sensor. The R1PT
aspirates primary reagent contained in the reagent tray (RGT) and dispenses it
into cuvettes (reaction cells) in the RCT unit. The R2PT aspirates the secondary
reagent (during the 25th cycle) contained in the reagent tray (RGT) and dispenses
it into cuvettes (reaction cells) in the RCT unit.
8.2.4.1. Liquid Level Sensor

When the tip of the nozzle reaches and touches the reagent surface, the
electrostatic capacitance of the metallic nozzle varies. The variation of the
capacitance is detected and consequently the level of reagent is detected.
8.2.4.2. Probe Down Limit Sensor

When the tip of nozzle hits the bottom of reagent bottle due to the insufficient
volume of reagent in it, the lower limit sensor detects that the tip of nozzle hits the
bottom and stops its downward movement.
8.2.4.3. R1PT/R2PT Washing Station

The wash station for the reagent probes (R1PT and R2PT) consists of a double
arrangement. The same position is used as Drain Position” (for internal cleaning of
the probe) and also as “Trough Position” (for external cleaning of the probe). After
the Reagent1/Reagent2 probe has dispensed the reagent into the Cuvette, the
reagent arm moves to the wash station where it is throws away the excess reagent
into the drain and are cleaned internally as well as externally using a jet of DI
Water.
8-5
8.2.5. Reaction Tray (RCT)
Cuvettes
The reaction tray (RCT) consists of the cuvette ring set and rotating mechanism.
RCT is provided with 72 hard glass cuvettes (5mm * 5mm) on its outer
circumference and the temperature inside is kept at 37ºC (±0.2º C) constantly. The
cuvettes are moved at 9-second step and a series of process including
dispensation, stirring, photometric measurement and washing be performed.
8.2.6. Reagent Tray (RGT)

Inner
circumference
Outer
circumference
The reagent tray is used for accommodating reagent bottles. The reagent tray can
accommodates at maximum 56 reagent bottles (28 on the inner side and 28 on the
outer side). The reagent tray consists of Barcode reader, Cooler, Sensor and
Rotating mechanism.
The reagent tray rotates and the required reagent bottle is moved to the position
where the reagent is aspirated. At this position, the reagent is aspirated by the
R1PT/R2PT and then dispensed into cuvettes in the RCT unit.
The type of usable reagent bottles are shown below:
 Inner circumference: 50 ml
8-6
 Outer circumference: 20 ml
8.2.6.1. Reagent Bottles

The reagent bottles are available in two capacities: 20ml and 50 ml. Both the
bottles are graduated and the user can visualize the amount of reagent present in
each bottle. A picture showing the Reagent bottles provided with the analyzer is
shown below:
All bottles are screw capped to prevent evaporation of reagents while not in use.
On the outer ring of the tray (even numbered positions), 20 ml bottles can be
placed. The inner ring (odd numbered positions) is available for 50 ml and 20 ml
bottles. Bar-code reader affixes bar-coded labels on the reagent containers for
identification.
Reagent can also be placed in the 5 ml tube in the outer
circumference using 5 ml reagent adaptor. See figure below.
Holder
5 ml tube cap
adaptor
New 5 ml adaptor with cap
8-7
8.2.7. Reagent Barcode Reader

The barcode reader reads barcode of the label affixed on the outer surface of the
reagent bottle. The reader uses a laser beam that is sensitive to the reflections
from the line and space thickness and variation. The reader translates the reflected
light into digital data that is transferred to the analyzer computer.
The readable barcode type specified for reagent bottles is:
Symbol Valid character and symbol
ITF Numerals only (0 – 9).
8.2.8. RGT Cooling Unit

Even if the analyzer is switched OFF, the temperature inside the RGT unit is kept
within the specified limits by the Peltier element that is controlled by temperature
control unit.
8.2.9. Photometer Unit

The Photometer Unit consists of the optical measurement system and light source.
The absorbance inside the cuvette of the RCT unit is measured by using a
photometer. Measurement is performed with any combinations of 2 wavelengths
selected among the following 12 wavelengths:
340 nm, 376 nm, 415nm, 450 nm, 480 nm, 505 nm, 546 nm, 570 nm, 600 nm,
660 nm, 700 nm, 750nm.
The photometer consists of an illuminant (halogen lamp 12V – 20W), lenses,
optical filter and photoreceptor (photodiode). A flat field polychromator is used for
measuring the optical densities of reaction mixtures. This polychromator is
constructed with a concave grating which is optimized for forming image of the
entrance slit on the photo-detector array and for dispersing light into its component
wavelengths. This eliminates several optical interferences and greatly improves
the efficiency of the photometer.
The dispersed beam falls on the twelve photo detector elements with a narrow
optical window. The second order attenuation is achieved by deploying glass filters
for near IR and UV regions. The current generated by each element of the detector
array is converted to voltage and amplified by high gain operational amplifiers. The
amplified voltage signals are shielded and transmitted to a high precision Data
Acquisition System.
8.2.10. Stirrer Unit

The sample and reagent solution in the cuvette is mixed up by the stirrer unit. The
stirrer unit consists of the up-and-down mechanism and the paddle rotating
mechanism.
8-8
8.2.10.1. Stirrer-1
The sample and the primary reagent dispensed into cuvettes are stirred by rotating
the paddle. The paddle is washed in the stirrer-1 trough with system water at 38º C
and pressure of 0.8-1.2 bar.
8.2.10.2. Stirrer-2
The secondary reagent dispensed into the cuvettes is stirred by rotating the
paddle. The paddle is washed in the stirrer-2 trough with system water 38 °C and
pressure of 0.8-1.2 bar.
8.2.11. Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU)

The Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) is to wash the insides of cuvettes in which the
measurement of specimen have been completed and allow them to be reused.
The CRU consists of 8 stages of drainage and 6 injection nozzles (probe number 7
is for drainage only), one stage of residual wipe tip and nozzle up-and-down
mechanism. The processed solution in the cuvettes is drained at the end of the
completion of measurement, and then their insides are washed with DI water or
wash solution.
Probe 1 – Aspirates the bio hazardous waste and dispenses Cleaning Solution.
Probe 2 to 6 - Aspirates the cuvette contents, and dispenses DI water.
Probe 7 - Aspirates the cuvette content.
8-9
Probe 8 - Dries the reaction cuvette.
8-10
8.2.12. Pipetting Pump Assembly (SPP, R1PP and R2PP

Syringes)
There are 3 different syringes each for the Sample (SPP)-100ul, Reagent 1(R1PP)
-500ul and Reagent 2 (R2PP)-500ul.They are located at the front panel of the
analyzer as shown below.
R1PP
SPP
R2PP
OR
R1PP
SPP
R2PP
8-11
8.2.12.1. Sample Syringe

The sample syringe of the analyzer is positive displacement type and dispenses
volumes between 2μl to 70μl. Sample syringe have a maximum capacity of 100ul
Sample volumes can be increased in steps of 0.1μl. The sample syringe is located
behind the front panel of the analyzer and connected to the sample arm/probe
using appropriate tubing.
8.2.12.2. Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Syringes

The reagent syringes of analyzer are positive displacement type and are located
alongside the sample syringe. Both the syringes of Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 have
a maximum capacity of 500μl each. Reagents (R1 and R2) can be programmed in
steps of 0.1μl. R1 dispenses volume from 60μl to a maximum of 300μl. R2
dispenses volume from 10μl to maximum of 300μl. The reagent syringes are
connected to reagent arms by PTFE tubing.
8.2.13. Ion Selective Electrode Unit (ISE)

The ISE module measures the concentration of Li+, Na+, K+, and Cl- in serum,
plasma and diluted urine. This unit is located inside the analyzer on the left hand
side. See figure in section 4.11.2 Left Side View.
This unit is optionally supplied with the analyzer. The ISE unit consists of ISE
module, ion electrodes, supply and drain pump.
Components Description
ISE module This module unit is fitted electrodes (Na, K, Cl, Reference and
Spacer) and controls pumps, measurement of concentration by
electrodes and rinsing movement. Communication to the
analyzer is carried out through RS232C.
Ion electrode This unit consists of Na, K, Cl, Li reference and spacer
electrodes.
The reagent pack for Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B is placed on
the top panel. Dedicated wash solution are placed in the ASP
unit and wash solution is supplied by the SPT in the same way
as for the sample.
Supply pump These pumps perform the infusing of Calibrant-A and
Calibrant-B into ISE module.
Drain pump This pump performs the transferring of liquid in ISE module.
8-12
Waste
Pump
ISE
Electrodes
Calibrant B
Pump
Calibrant A
Pump
The following solutions are requested for the ISE unit:
8.2.13.1. Calibrant-A
Calibrant-A is used at the time of one-point calibration.
The one-point calibration is carried out at the same time when the Calibrant-A is
dispensed to wash electrodes every time the sample measurement is performed.
95μl of Calibrant-A and 36μl of Calibrant-B is automatically dispensed into the ISE
unit at every 30 minutes to prevent the electrode from drying during standby cycle.
Reagent pack containing Calibrant-A solution is placed on the front panel of the
analyzer.
8.2.13.2. Calibrant-B
Calibrant-B is used at the time of two-point calibration.
The two-point calibration should be carried out at the beginning of the day and at
least once every 8 hours or after completion of 50 samples.
Reagent pack containing Calibrant-B solution is placed on the front panel of the
analyzer.
8-13
8.2.13.3. Cleaning Solution

To avoid deposition of protein on the electrodes, the cleaning solution needs to be
dispensed into the unit.
The removal of protein build-up on the electrodes and fluid path is accomplished
by the use of cleaning solution. Cleaning solution is placed in a cup on the
analyzer sample tray, which is aspirated by the sample probe, and deposited into
the sample entry port.
This function should be carried out twice a day, once in the beginning of the day
before the calibration and at the end of day. When more than 50 samples of
measurement are carried out, washing must be carried out.
8.2.13.4. Diluent
The diluent is used to dilute urine to one-tenth in concentration. It is contained in a
reagent bottle that is placed on the reagent tray. The necessary volume for diluting
one sample is 200µl. The dilution is carried out using a cuvette in the CRU unit and
therefore one cycle of chemistry analysis is allocated to this processing.
Measurement Volume
In the case of analytic Sample for serum : 70 μl
measurement Sample for urine : 140 μl (after dilution)
In the case of full calibration Calibrant-A: 180μl, Calibrant-B: 180μl
In the case of 1-point calibration Calibrant-A: 180μl
8.2.14. Liquid Level Sensing for Cans (Float Sensors)

The Liquid Level Sensor are placed inside the respective Cans of DI water,
Cleaning solution, Bio-hazardous waste & normal waste Can. Accordingly, for DI
water & cleaning solution, the float based level sensors will sense the low level of
DI water or cleaning solution & respective LED will lit “ON” the instrument with the
beep sound. Similarly, full levels are detected for both the waste can & respective
LEDs are lit accordingly with beep sound. All the LEDS are placed just near to the
tube connection for the same cans.
8-14
OR
Float Sensor for Bio-Hazard Waste Can Float sensor for DI Water Can
Float Sensor for Cleaning Solution Can Float Sensor for Diluted Waste Can
8-15
8.3. Test Loader Device

Test Loader Device is used to scan the details of system packs for Closed channel
reagents.
Test Loader Functionality :
 Test Loader device scans the details of System Pack Reagent kits including lot
number, expiry date, pack size etc.
 Analyzer performs open/closed-channel tests only after scanning the System Pack
Reagent kits.
 Analyzer performs closed channel tests based on pack size (test count) of
respective reagent kit.
 Analyzer performs open channel tests not exceeding the total test-count, as read
from System Pack Reagent kits.
 Once open test-counts are exhausted, it is not allowed to perform further open
tests, until user scans the new System Pack Reagent kits.
 System will intimate user during run if open test count reaches 10 & below
Test Loader Device is for XL Closed Systems ONLY.
8-16
9. Electronics Circuit Description

This section deals with the electronic circuits and their functions. It gives an
overview regarding the general aspect of the PCB, location, functionality, test
signals. It provides the complete reference for the service personnel for diagnosis.
9.1. Electronic Description

Circuit Name Description
ELS22032/R1 ± 5V Regulator PCB
ELS22032/R1 ± 15 V Regulator PCB
ELS22030R2 Isolation Board
ELS22006R3 POS1
XL V2 R1ELS52013R2 Photometer
ELS62026R0 and ELS52010R4 LSH PCB and LLS PCB OR
OR ELS22036R2.1 OR New LLS PCB Assy
ELS52023R0
ELS52005R2 Backplane 1
ELS32010R1 Backplane 2
ELS52016R1 Interface PCB
ELS52021R2.1 Interface with ARM PCB
ELS52015R2 Baseboard 1
ELS52008R4 /R5 Baseboard 2
ELS32006R6 Stirrer PCB
ELS52004R2 RCT Heater PCB
ELS52002R4/R5/R6.1 Motor Drive
ELS32004R9 DC Drive
ELS32003R1 AC Drive Board
WGPT04 OR ELS22037R1 WGPT Board OR Float Sensor PCB
EL52018R0 LMPS PCB
ELS62004R0 Pump Connector PCB
ELS22001R1 LMPS Fan Power Supply PCB
ELD52002R3 Stirrer Motor Indicator
ELS62015R2 JTAG Interface PCB
ELS22019/R0 ISPS PCB (For 3-Channel ISE only)
ELS32015R4 Clot Detection PCB
ELS52022R0/R1 Canmax Support PCB
ELD52003R2 BI-COLOUR LED Inidicator PCB
ELS52005R0/R1/R1.1 Auto start Up PCB
ELS62033R1 Sleepmode PCB
Sparten CPU PCB
9-1
9.1.1. Electronic Functional Block Diagram

Functional Block diagram with ST-10 Interface PCB
Functional Block diagram with ARM Interface PCB
9-2
OR
9-3
Functional Block diagram with ARM Interface PCB : With USB interface CP2102
9-4
9.1.2. Regulator PCB: ELS22032R1

Regulator PCB assembly is being used to supply power for RCT HEATER PCB
assembly, Base Board1, LLS PCB assembly. It accepts 9-0-9 VAC from
transformer TX3 secondary at connector J1and delivers regulated output ±5V
DC,250mA power to the LLS board J5,Base board1 J4.
ELS22032R1: Regulator PCB assy. is also being used to
regulate ±15V DC with the help of regulator IC 7815, 7915 for
Photometer Assy.

regulate ±5V DC with the help of regulator IC 7805, 7905 for LLS
Power supply.
Connector J8 is being used to connect Transformer 0V to base plate of Analyzer’s
Sample and Reagent tray.
It consists of two separate power supply section. Positive fixed voltage regulator –
U1: IC 7805 TO220 Package for +5V (± 0.15V) and Negative fixed voltage
regulator –U2: –5V (± 0.15V).
The power supply cable goes from the regulator PCB assembly – J5 to the
Sample, R1, and R2 arm LLS PCB assemblies, J32 - Base board 1.
Regulated output voltage indications have been shown by LED LED1 RED - +5V,
LED2 – Green: -5V.
Location: The regulator PCB is located on the L-plate behind the card frames.
Following are the input and output voltage at respective test points on the board at
mains input voltage 220V Ac ± 10%:
AC voltage between TP2 with respect to TP3 should be in the range 8.5 to 9.9VAC
DC voltage between TP4 with respect to TP5 should be in the range 12 to 14 VDC
DC voltage between TP1 with respect to TP5 should be in the range -12 to -14
VDC
DC voltage between TP6 with respect to TP5 should be in the range +4.85 to
+5.15 VDC
DC voltage between TP7 with respect to TP5 should be in the range -4.85 to -5.15
VDC
The 10 pin - relimate connector J5 Pins (1-3) connected to +5V, Pins (4-6)
connected to ground and pins (7-9) connected to -5V.
The cable from connector J5 is being used to supply regulated ±5V DC power to
Sample, R1, and R2 Arm LLS PCB assembly.
The 3 pin - relimate connector J2, J4 have been pin1 connected to +5V, pin2
connected to 0V, pin3 connected to -5V and Base board1 PCB assembly.
9-5
The IC 7805 – U1 and IC 7905 – U2 TO220 package mounted on

Heat Sink.
Connector - J3 (3 pin relimate connector) – Optional.
9.1.3. Isolation Board ELS22030R2

This PCB assy is used for isolating the RS232 serial communication signals TxD,
RxD, GND between analyzer XL-640 and PC’s RS232 serial communication port.
It consists of two sections of communication ports, one is at PC side and other is at
Analyzer XL-640 side, to Auto start up pcb assy.
The board uses RJ45 connectors for connectivity to respective RS232 serial ports.
Isolated power supply has been generated with the help of two isolated windings
from transformer (0-9VAC) to connector J1 as Input. Regulated Output voltages
VCC (+5V DC) and VCC2 (+5V DC) have been generated with the help of fixed
Positive voltage regulator IC 7805 – TR1 – VCC and IC 7805 – TR2 – VCC2.
TxD, RxD signals are isolated for Analyzer and PC side by using High speed opto
isolators 6N137 in the circuit.
TTL level signal from analyzer TXD is being connected to R2IN of U1 as input and
output of U1 through U4 – Opto isolator connected to U2 T1IN , T1out is
connected to RXD at PC side and vice versa.
Serial communication between Analyzer and PC is through IC U1 Max 232,
U2 6N137, U3 Max 232, and U4 6N137 respectively.
Conn. J4 : To interface pcb assy – ST10 : J5 OR Arm 7 interface pcb assy J34
Conn. J5 – PC: From Rear panel serial port or USB port.
9-6
Conn. J3 – PC to Auto start up pcb assy

Location: Isolation PCB assembly is located on the L plate behind the card frames.
Ref.: Figure 2: Silkscreen layout of Isolation PCB ELS22030R2.
Following are the input and Output voltage at respective test points on the board
at mains input voltage 220V Ac ± 10% :
a) AC input voltage across J1 pin 1, 2 should be in the range 8.5V-9.9VAC.
b) AC input voltage across J1 pin 3, 4 should be in the range 8.5V-9.9VAC.
c) DC output voltage at Pin3 of TR1 – IC 7805 TO220 package w.r.t to Pin 2 of
TR1 - GND in the range of 4.85V – 5.15V DC.
d) DC output voltage at Pin3 of TR2 – IC 7805 TO220 package w.r.t to Pin 2 of
TR2 - GND in the range of 4.85V – 5.15V DC.
9.1.4. Opto PCB POS1 ELS22006R3/ R4

Opto PCB assembly is being used to get feedback of positions of Electro-
mechanical assemblies to microcontroller / FPGA/CPLD to process further action.
It provides a logic ‘HIGH’ (+5V) signal when the opto isolator is being interrupted
i.e. cut by a mechanical assembly due to motion, called as SENSE.
It provides a logic ‘LOW’ (0V) signal when the opto isolator is uninterrupted i.e. not
cut by mechanical assembly due to motion called as ‘NOT SENSE’.
9-7
The signal is interpreted by respective FPGA.

The flow of electrical signal is from Opto PCB › Baseboard1 PCB › Interface PCB.
Location: OPTO PCBs are distributed at various electromechanical assemblies in
the Analyzer i.e. RGT, RCT, CRU, ARM, STIRRER etc.
Ref.: Figure 3: Silkscreen layout of Top - SST and bottom side – SSB of Opto PCB
ELS22006R3.
Refer to the PCB assembly, the details of signals are as follows.CN1: VCC: +5V,
output: SN, GND. Three wires are soldered to respective pads on the solder side,
The pad closer to the SMD LED is ground (0V) and the pad to the other extreme is
+5V. The center pad is for opto status.
It is LOW when the opto is not cut; it is HIGH when the opto is cut.
OR
9-8
9.1.5. Photometer XL V2 R1 ELS52013R2

Photometer PCB assembly is being used to measure absorbance of light during
Chemistry RUN by applying spectrometer method i.e. Light is being passes
through reaction cuvette to respective wave lengths of optical filter and Photodiode
of Photometer assembly.
Photodiodes are being used to convert absorbed light in cuvette to proportional
electrical signals for measurement.
Photometer assembly is consisted of lens, Grating, Optical filter for 12
wavelengths as 340nm, 376nm, 415nm, 450nm, 480nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
600nm, 660nm, 700nm, 750nm,and Photodiode.
Location: Photometer PCB assembly is located in a closed black box, called
Photometer assembly, to the left of RCT assembly.
The flow of signals is Light source through reaction cuvette in to photometer PCB
assembly – J4 to Interface board via a special shielded cable.
The shield of the cable is connected to the chassis through a ‘Molex’ connector.
Power Supply +15V DC and -15V Dc is being used to Photometer circuit.
OPA111Am –to 99 package low BIAS current (1pA) and highly stable Opamp is
being used for 340nm and 800nm wavelengths.
OPA2111KP – DIP 8 pin package is being used to other 10 wavelengths. It is a
dual Opamp with low bias current (1pA) and highly stable.
OPA2111KP is being replaced to LMC6082AIN for other 10 wave lengths with
regulator IC’s to 7805 & 7905 for ±5V.
Photodiode S1337-16BQ – Silicon are used for all 12 wavelengths.
9-9
9-10
9.1.6. LSH PCB ELS62026R0 and LLS PCB ELS52010R4 (OLD)

The LLS (Liquid Level Sense) circuit is used to detect.
1. Level of sample in the Sample cup / test tube.
2. Level of Reagents in Reagent Tray as R1.
3. Level of Reagents in Reagent Tray as R2.
To detect vertical obstruction (VOD) of Probe mounted on respective ARM
assemblies as Sample, R1, R2 in cup, tube, bottle etc.
Opto is being used to generate electrical signal named as ‘VOD’ for respective arm
assembly and same will be sending to FPGA for further action.
The Liquid level Sense PCB assembly – LLS PCB assembly is made up of LLS
S/H PCB ELS52009R4.1and LLS Signal board ELS52010R4.
LLS Signal board is mounted on LLS S/H PCB ELS52009R4.1 with the help of 4
pin SIL Berg strip.
LLS out signal is being represented with the help of flashing of LED D3 as Probe is
touches/sense to Liquid.
Power is supplied to LLS PCB assembly through 4 Pin connector J4 as Pin1: +5V,
Pin2: GND, Pin3: -5V, Pin4: Unconnected.
LLS S/H PCB ELS62026R0: It is use to generate LLS out signal by converting
analog signal in to TTL signal with the OPAMP configured as differential amplifier,
in synchronization with Sample and Hold (U3), Opamp configured as comparator,
VOD signals. Reference voltage is generated to comparator with the help of D1 –
LM385 (2V5 – Shunt regulator- temp. compensated).
LLS Signal board ELS52010R4: It is used as compare delta of Probe capacitor
with reference of 100pF.
Reference frequency of 32.768 KHz is generated with the help of Crystal and
converted in to TTL square wave with Schmitt trigger IC 74HC14.
Frequency to voltage is converted with the help of F – V converter IC 2907(U1)
and output will be sending to Sample and Hold and Differential amplifier.
Probe signal is generated through Probe by connecting wire to probe body and
connected to J1 on LLS S/H Board.
The method of sensing is capacitive .The function of LLS is Respective ARM
assembly is positioned to respective location defined as per RUN. Auto Zero signal
is generated by FPGA to reset and buffered with the help of tri-state buffer U19A,
then arm is moving down towards liquid to sense liquid. Liquid is sensed by probe
of sample ARM assembly LED D3 flashes. LLS out signal is being sent to FPGA.
During sensing, traveling of ARM assembly, if probe obstruct then VOD signal is
being generated to display Error message as “VOD Error”.
Manually it can be checked by allowing probe to lift slightly in ‘UP’ direction.
9-11
Plate fixed to Arm assembly is cut the light path of Opto and change the state vice
versa. Arm initialized will encounter the VOD error.
The berg strip pin (#2) behind the ground pin of 4 pin connector is connected to the
output of the signal card.
The voltage at this pin (#2) WRT ground pin has to be approximately. 1.85V with
the probe in air.
As per system requirement LLS sense PCB’s, the following are the selected
components to respective arm assemblies.
 Sample Arm
 R3, R6 : SMD resistor 68K 0.1% 100ppm
 R8 : SMD resistor 1K5
 C1 : SMD capacitor 22nF
Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.10V DC approximately.
 Reagent Arm R1
 R3, R6 : SMD resistor 47K 0.1% 100ppm.
Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.50V DC approximately
 Reagent Arm R2
 R3, R6 : SMD resistor 47K 0.1% 100ppm
Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.50V DC approximately.
Location: LLS PCB assembly is located on the Sample Arm, Reagent R1 Arm, and
Reagent R2 Arm’s Base of the Arm assembly.
9-12
9-13
9.1.7. New LLS PCB ASSY: ELS22036R2.1 for Sample, R1, R2

Arm Assy
The LLS (Liquid Level Sense) circuit is being used to detect the level of sample in
the Sample cup / test tube & reagent in reagent bottles.
To detect vertical obstruction (VOD) in cup, tube etc. of Probe, opto U6 mounted
on ARM assy Opto U6 is being used to generate electrical signal named as ‘VOD’
& same will be sending to FPGA for further action.
The Liquid level Sense PCB assy – 455KHZ modulated signal is generated with
the help of 455 KHz resonator Y1 & IC U1 – 74HC14. Probe connected at J1 –
Pin1: Probe signal, Pin2: GND. IC U3: Quad Opamp TL074 is used as U3A: buffer,
U3B: Differ. Amplifier, U3C: Differentiator.
When Probe touches to liquid in cup, bottle etc. electrical signal generated with
respect to change of capacitance & is being converted to respective DC with Diode
D3, filter with RC low pass filter, amplified for measurement with the help of U3-B.,
Differentiated with U3-C. Output of Differentiator will be proportional to RC*change
of voltage w.r.t. Time.
When Probe touches to liquid Positive peak is generated & from probe travelling
from liquid to air negative peak will be generated. Output of Differentiator will be
sending for +ve peak detection to U2A w.r.t. Threshold +2.50V. When output
crosses TH. Voltage comparator changes its output & negative detection to U2B,
TH. Voltage: -2.50V. Output of comparator U2 will be sending to Clear / Preset of
D – FF U4 synchronized with Auto Zero/LLS Enable as a CLK to D-FF.
(JP1 : Pin 1 - 2 : ON)
Output of D-FF is LLS Out signal sending to CPU PCB assy for next action.
LLS out visually indicated by LED2.
+5V indicated by LED1 as Power ON.
J4: Pin1: +5V, Pin2: GND, Pin3: -5V, Pin4: Unconnected.
J5:Pin1: Auto Zero/LLS Enable, Pin2: LLS Out, Pin3: VOD OUT
Selected Components of LLS PCB Assy are mentioned as below.
For Sample : R11: 330K , R19 : 27K,
For R1,R2 : R11 : 330K , R19 : 15K
Reference voltage at Pin3 of U2: +2.50V DC, -2.50V at Pin6 of U2 Approx.
Location : On the ARM ASSY
Silk Screen layout of To Layer & Bottom Layer as mentioned below.
9-14
9.1.8. New LLS PCB ASSY: ELS52023R0 for Sample, R1, R2

Arm Assy
LLS signal input is to J1 connector Pin No 2 from the Probe
9-15
9.1.9. Backplane 1 ELS52005R2

The Backplane1 PCB assembly is being used as an interface between Stepper
Motor driver PCB assembly and FPGA through Base Board 1 PCB assembly.
Backplane 1 PCB assembly accommodates five stepper motor drive cards.
Signal flow for Backplane 1 PCB assembly is that, Input signals to Motor drive card
as Clock and Direction to respective stepper motor controller have been generated
by FPGA routed through Base board1 and backplane 1 to Motor drive card PCB
assembly.
1. Stepper motor driver Card 1 – J19: Sample assembly.
a. Sample Arm – UP/DN, Rotational motion
b. Sample Syringe - UP/DN motion
c. Sample Tray – rotational motion.
CLK and Direction signals to stepper motor driver : J15 (From J13 of
Base board 1 PCB assembly)
Sample Arm UP/DN motor : J6
Sample Arm Rotational Motor : J11
Sample Syringe UP/DN motor : J16
Sample Tray Rotational motor : J1
2. Stepper motor driver Card 2 – J20: Reagent 1.
a. Reagent Arm – UP/DN, Rotational motion
b. Reagent 1 Syringe - UP/DN motion
c. Reagent Tray – rotational motion.
Reagent 1 Arm UP/DN motor : J7
Reagent 1 Arm Rotational Motor : J12
Reagent 1 Syringe UP/DN motor : J17
Reagent Tray Rotational motor : J2
3. Stepper motor driver Card 3 – J21: Reagent 2.
a. Reagent 2 Arm – UP/DN, Rotational motion
b. Reagent 2
Reagent 2 Arm UP/DN motor : J8
9-16
Reagent 2 Arm Rotational Motor : J13

Reagent 2 Syringe UP/DN motor : J18
4. Stepper motor driver Card 4 – J22: Stirrer 1, 2.
a. Stirrer 1 – UP/DN, rotational motion
b. Stirrer 2 - UP/DN, rotational motion.
CLK and Direction signals to stepper motor driver : J29 (from J15 of
Base board 1 PCB assembly).
Stirrer 1 UP/DN motor : J34
Stirrer 1 Rotational Motor : J14
Stirrer 2 UP/DN motor : J9
Stirrer 2 Rotational motor : J39
5. Stepper motor driver Card 5 – J23: Drive Stepper motor for – RCT, and
CRU.
a. RCT – Rotational motion
b. CRU - UP/DN motion
CLK and Direction signals to stepper motor driver: J30 (From J17 of
RCT Rotational motor : J38
CRU UP/DN motor : J33
Power Supply to Back Plane1 is at J3 from terminal Block TB3.
Test Point TP1: Vs: 24V DC, Test Point TP3: GND (Vs: 24V DC).
Test Point TP2: VCC: +5V DC, Test Point TP4: GND (VCC).
It receives Clock and Direction signals from FPGA for driving the Stepper motors.
Motor driver Card 1, Motor driver Card 3, Motor driver Card 4, Motor driver card 5
is similar and can be interchangeable.
Stepper Motor Driver card 2: To give more drive to RGT motor (Torque is more)
hence this card is not identical.
The connectivity of CLK (pin1, 3, 5, 7) and Direction (pin2, 4, 6, 8) signals of
Stepper motors is from Base board 1 to Backplane 1 is through 10 pin FRC Cable.
The location for Motor Drive card 1 to 5 as J19, J20, J21, J22, and J23
respectively.
All Stepper motors are connected to the Backplane1 Molex 5557-04 (4 pin male
St) via Molex 4 pin female connectors.
NOTE: All the cables have stickers on their connectors. CN1 stands for Rotation
and CN2 stands for UP/DN.
9-17
Location: Back Plane 1 PCB is located on Left hand side and at rear end of upper
PCB cage of analyzer.
9.1.10. Backplane 2 ELS32010R1

The Backplane2 PCB assembly is being used as an interface between DC Valve
for Sample, R1, R2 Syringes, DC pump for Detergent and Bio Hazard, Stirrer
speed control through respective drive cards connected to J22 – DC Valve and
J26 for Stirrer on Back Plane 2 PCB assembly.
9-18
DC Valve Control Card – J22 - Syringe valves, Detergent Pump, Bio hazard
Pump.
Control signals to DC valves : J5 (From J14 of Base board 1 PCB assembly.)
R1PP and R2PP Syringe Valve : J18
Sample Syringe valve : J10
Detergent Pump : 16
Bio Hazard Pump : J19
Stirrer 1, 2 Control Card – J26 - Stirrer 1, 2 valve.
Control signals to Stirrer valves : J42 (From J31 of Base board 1 PCB
assembly)
Stirrer - 1 Valve : J41
Stirrer – 2 Valve : J39
Power to Back Plane 2 is from J17 : (From Terminal block -TB3)
Details of Power supply as follows: J17 - Pin 1 – NC.
Pin 2 – VCC ( +5V , ± 0.15V)
Pin 3 – GND (VCC)
Pin 4 – NC
Pin 5 – Vs (+24V , ± 0.5V)
Pin 6 – GND (VS)
Control Signals to activate and Deactivate DC Valves have been generated by
FPGA and routed through Base Board1 to Back Plane 2.
Location: BACKPLANE 2 PCB: ELS32010R1is located on Left hand side of
analyzer, at rear end of lower PCB cage.
9-19
9-20
9.1.11. Interface PCB ELS52016R1

The Interface board is a Central Processing unit of Analyzer. It generates control
signals to all interfaces and read status from all interfaces. Interface PCB
assembly consists of mainly sections VIZ: Power Supply, CPU – ST10 and
Photometer data acquisition, FPGA and External Memory, Serial communication,
Opto Drivers.
Kindly note that the legends a1, b1, c1 printed for the three euro
connectors are reversed. In fact pin labeled as a1 is a32, b1 is b32
and c1 is c32.
Power Supply Section

a. Analog Supply.
i) ± 15V (+15V – TP10, -15V – TP12) as an input to Interface card from
J28 of base board1 derived from LMPS OR Regulator Pcb Assy. (+/-15V
DC). It is used to generate +5V ANA –TP9 by using U17 - IC 7805
Positive fix voltage regulator wrt ANA GND TP11.
ii) With the help of negative fix voltage Regulator IC 7905 U18 and -5V
ANA – TP13 voltage is generated wrt ANA GND TP11.
b. Digital Supply.
i) VCC (5V) TP16 as an input to interface card from J26 of Base board 1
PCB assembly derived from SMPS (Through TB3).
ii) It is used to generate VCCO (+5V DC – TP6) and VCC INT (+5V DC –
TP7) with respect to digital GND TP17 with the help of IC U20 –
TPS70458 (Dual output Low Drop voltage regulator).
c. Programming Voltage: VPP (+12V).
i) +15V is used as an input to positive fix voltage regulator IC 7812 –
U19. Regulated 12V output at TP14 with respect to GND TP11 used as
VPP supply for ST10 – Pin84.
1. CPU Section.
a. ST10F168SQ6 - 16-bit MCU with 256K byte flash memory and 8K byte
RAM.
b. ST10F168SQ6 is having input and output ports P0 to P8.
9-21
The Port configuration is as follows.

Port 0
 It is two 8 bit Bidirectional Input / Output port P0L and P0H.
 P0 to P15 configured as Data bus D0 – D15.
Port 1
 It is two 8 bit Bidirectional Input / Output ports P1L and P1H.
 P0 to P15 configured as ADC0 to ADC15 to Data bus D0 – D15 of ADC
976A.
Port 2
 It is 16 bit bidirectional Input / Output port P2.0 to P2.15.
 This port is being configured for RCT, RGT cooler and USB serial
communication.
Port 3
 It is 15 bit bidirectional Input / Output.
Port 4
 It is 8 bit bidirectional Input / Output Port.P4.0 – P4.7.
 This port is being configured as an interface between CPU and FPGA.
9-22
Port 5
 It is 16 bit Input port only with Schmitt-trigger characterstic.P5.0 – P5.15
 It is unused.
Port 6
 It is 8 bit bidirectional Input / Output Port P6.0 – P6.7.
 It is unused.
Port 7
 It is 8 bit bidirectional Input / Output Port P7.0 – P7.7.
 P7.0 – P7.4: is being used as control lines to Multiplexer Mux
16/DG406DJ to select respective input to output.
 P7.5 P7.7 as a control / data lines for DS1267.
Port 8
 It is 8 bit bidirectional Input / Output port P8.0 – P8.7.
 P8.0 – P8.7 being used for ISE and RGT communication.
2. ADC – Section.
This section is consisted of Multiplexer, dual digital pot.DS1267 - for AGC,
OPAMP’s OP07 and ADC AD976A. The output from the photometer of
respective wavelengths is being connected to differential amplifier through
the dual Digital pot to the ADC AD976A.
Analog voltage from photometer assy. of selected wavelength is to be
measured at TP2. (Pin 28 of U5). Same voltages are buffered through
OPAMP OP07 – U28A and send to Dual digital pot pin11.
DS1267 is connected as feedback resistor (between pin 2 and 6) of OPAMP
U2 – OP07.R10 (20K pot) is used for offset adjustment. Output of U2
(TP15) is connected to OPAMP U3 – OP 07 with Gain of 4.7 at TP1 pin 6 of
U3.
R11 (20K Pot) is used for Offset adjustment of U3. Output of U3 is send to
Analog input of ADC AD976A (U4). ADC AD 976A is 16 bit Hi Speed A to D
converter working on single supply +5V.
3. FPGA Section: A field-programmable gate array.
XC2S200 – PQ208C is a semiconductor device containing programmable
logic components called "logic blocks", and programmable interconnects.
Logic blocks can be programmed to perform the function of basic logic
gates such as AND, and XOR, or more complex combinational functions
such as decoders or mathematical functions. In most FPGAs, the logic
blocks also include memory elements, which may be simple flip – flops or
more complete blocks of memory.
9-23
Combinational logic (CLB) is used in computer circuits to do Boolean

algebra on input signals and on stored data.
FPGA’s are field programmable, the source files are fed to a software suite
from the FPGA/CPLD vendor that through different steps will produce a file.
This file is then transferred to the FPGA/CPLD via a serial interface –JTAG
interface or to external memory device like an EEPROM.
a. XC2S200 – PQ208C.
It is having 2, 00,000 logic gates with 56K RAM bits.
FPGA1 (U8) and FPGA2 (U10) are being used in synchronization with
CPU ST10F168BQ6 to
i) Generate Stepper motor control signals.
ii) Read status of position of Stepper Motor and interface through Opto’s
and buffer.
iii) Generate signals to make ON/OFF DC/AC Valves.
iv) Generate signals to make ON/OFF DC/AC pumps.
v) Generate and read LLS signals. etc.
The Two Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) contains the
controlling logic for the various assemblies and is responsible for the
execution of the commands decoded by the ST10.
FPGA XC2S200 – PQ208C Block Diagram as follows.
9-24
4. Memory
XC18V04PC-PLCC44-U7: It is in system Programmable configuration
PROM. It is being used to store Xlinx FPGA configuration bit streams. JTAG
is being connected to connector J8 to program FPGA.
5. Voltage / Signals Test for the Interface board.

TP16 (VCC) and TP17 (GND) : 5V (LED D3)
TP10 (+15V) and TP17 (GND) :15V (LED D1)
TP12 (-15V) and TP17 (GND) : -15V (LED D2)
TP6 (3.3V) and TP17 (GND) : 3.3V
TP7 (2.5V) and TP17 (GND) : 2.5V
TP14 (+12V) and TP17 (GND) : 12V
TP8 : FPGA CLOCK
6. Opto Driver.
The status from respective Stepper motor assemblies Opto’s to be sent /
read through buffer for appropriate action.
The details of respective opto signal as mentioned below.
U11 : IC 74LS244: R2 ARM, R2 Syringe, RCT.
U12 : IC 74LS244: R1 ARM, R1 Syringe, Reagent tray.
U13 : IC 74LS244: Stirrer 1, Stirrer 2.
U15 : IC 74LS244: CRU assembly.
U16 : Sample Arm, Sample Syringe, Sample Tray.
The clock and direction signals for motors, Valve ON/OFF signals
generated by the FPGA for the motor driver boards are buffered on the
respective boards.
9-25
Communication cable connector and photometer connector are connected

directly to the interface board.
All the power supplies and Input/output signals are brought to the interface
board via the Baseboards.
7. EEPROM.
IC 24C256/ IC24C512 – It is used to store calibration parameters of
interfaces.
Serial Communication: MAX232 are used for RS232 serial communication
between the interfaces.
U22 : ISE.
U24 : Sample and RGT Bar code scanner.
U25 : RCT and RGT cooler temperature controller.
Location: Interface PCB is located on the rear side of the analyzer, below the CRU
/ Photometer.
9-26
9-27
9.1.12. Interface with ARM PCB ELS52021R2.1
Interface Pcb Assy Arm7 is also consisted of Spartan CPU Pcb assy. as Piggyback to
generate Motor’s CLK, Direction signals, and Read opto’s input from electro mechanical
assemblies as feedback to initiate further action.
ARM7 based interface pcb assy is a combination of interface pcb assy, Base board1,
Base Board 2.
The Signal details From / To Spartan CPU pcb assy are as follows.
9-28
9-29
9-30
Arm 7 interface pcb assy is being used to buffer the signals generated from Spartan CPU
pcb assy of CLK, Direction etc,Sample ,R1,R2 Arm assy’s AZ,LLS out and VOD signals ,
serial communications for Bar code scanners, ISE,RCT,RGT comm., pressure sensor
circuit. etc.
NXP make LPC2378: U4 is 32bit microcontroller Arm 7 TDMI-S.
9-31
LPC 2378: Block Diagram
9-32
Port 0 : 32 bit port configured as General purpose digital I/O OR can receiver input or
transmitter output OR I²C data input / output, slave select etc.as per our requirement.
9-33
Port 1 : Is being used for General purpose I/O port, Ethernet data input, output, PWM
Port 2 : Data bus with Spartan Cpu pcb assy. etc.
Port3 : I/O port with individual direction control.
Port 4 : General purpose I/O line OR External memory address line. : We have been used
for ADC interface with ARM7, P0-15 interfaced with ADC
1) Power Supply check :
a)Analog Supply :
+/- 15V from Regulator pcb assy. is connected to J47 on interface pcb assy.
+5V ANA (+/- 0.15V) TP15 wrt ANA GND TP11: is generated with the help U28:IC7805
visually indicated by LED5.
-5V ANA (+/- 0.15V): TP13 wrt ANA GND TP11: is generated with the help of U29: IC
7905 visually indicated by LED12.
b) Digital Supply:
From VCC 5V : TP17: 3V3 (+/- 0.1V): TP10 digital supply generated with the help of U30
LD1085 wrt GND TP14, visually indicated by LED4.
2). OPTO / LLS Signal check for Arm Assy’s :

a)Sample Arm Assy : Sample Arm Assy’s opto signals as UP/DN : J19 : Pin2 , Home :
J19 : Pin5 ,direction J19 : Pin 8 , Auto Zero : J19: Pin15 .LLS out: J19 : Pin14 , VOD
signals : J19 : Pin 11 are connected .
LLS signals are opto isolated with the help of IC U3.
b)R1 Arm Assy : R1 Arm Assy’s opto signals as UP/DN : J17-Pin2 ,Home- J17-Pin5
,direction J17-Pin 8,Auto Zero J17-Pin15 ,LLS out: J17 : Pin14 , VOD signals : J17 : Pin
11 are connected .
c) R2 Arm Assy : R2 Arm Assy’s opto signals as
UP/DN J18 : Pin2

Home J18 : Pin5
Direction J18 : Pin 8
Auto Zero J18: Pin15
LLS out J18 : Pin14
VOD J18 : Pin 11
2) Stirrer1, 2 Opto Signals : Connector J20 :

a) For Stirrer1 Opto :
9-34
UP/DN J20 : Pin2

Home J20 : Pin5
b) For Stirrer 2 Opto
UP/DN J20 : Pin18

Home J20 : Pin21
3) IC U14,U15,U16,U18,U19 : 74HC244 are used as buffer for R1 Arm signals,R2

Arm signals, Sample Arm Signals,CRU,RCT,Stirrer1,2 signals,
4) Serial communication interface :

a) RGT Barcode : Max 232 :U20 is being used for sample & Reagent barcode
interface.
J37 : Is being used for RGT barcode.
J32 : Is being used for Sample barcode.
b) RCT heater, RGT cooler serial communication :
IC U23 : Max 232 is being used for RCT heater serial interface, connected at J33.
IC U23 : Max 232 is being used for RGT Cooler serial interface, connected at J32.
c) ISE serial communication : IC U22: Max 232 is used for serial interface for ISE.
ISE module serial interface is being connected at J35.
d) PC serial interface : IC U21 : Max 232 is being used for serial interface between
PC & Analyzer, Connector J34:is being used for PC interface.
5) Pressure Sensor circuit : Pressure sensor connected at J41. Depend upon the
pressure, error signal (TTL) of HI pressure, LO pressure generated from pressure
sensor.
With the help of Logic circuit U26 : HI /LO Error signal generated as pressure
output at J42- pin1 wrt GND pin2.
6) ADC Section : Input voltage from Photometer assy wrt selected wave lengths
connected at J26. Multiplexer U5 : DG506 is being used to select output wrt
wavelength at TP4. Multiplexer output U5 is buffered worth the help of OPAMP
U36.
OpAmp’s U36 OFFSET voltage at dark light to be adjusted by POT P1.
U10 : TL072 is also used at buffer. Buffer output voltage is fed to U11 : OP 07.
Digital pot IC U6 : DS1267 -100 is used as Automatic Gain control, as feedback
resistor for U11. POT P2 is used for OFF SET adjustment.
9-35
Output of U11 is fed to U12 Opamp-OP 07 with a gain of 4.7. OFF SET voltage of
U12 adjusted by POT P3.Output voltage of U12 : TP5 fed to ADC ADS8505 –
ANAIN : Pin1. ADS8505 is 16 bit SAR ADC working on single supply voltage +5V
(Pin27, 28) wrt GND (Pin14, 2, 5) .Tristate data bus is being connected to Port 4 of
ARM7 : LPC2378.
U7 : ADS709 is being used for Power on RESET.
U8,U9 : 24C256 is EEPROM to save the parameters.
9.1.13. CPU PCB Assembly ELS62014 R4

CPU PCB assembly is being used as an interface between ARM 7 : LPC2378 &
motion profiles.
Spartan 3E – XC3S1200E – FG320: 320-ball Fine-pitch Ball Grid Array
XC3S1200E – BGA package is having Input/output ports 250 nos. (56 nos. are
only Input ports) & Differential 99 nos. (12 nos. are only input ports). At Power ON
Program from Micro blaze has been loaded in to Flash Memory M2516P.The flow
9-36
of the signals are that Application is sending an instruction to Micro blaze. Micro
blaze is decoded that instruction & send command to FPGA to complete task i.e.
Motion profile to all motors of interfaces
Power Supply Section:
CPU PCB assembly’s interfaces are working on +3.3V DC, +2.5V DC, +1.2V DC.
1. +3.3 V DC: +5V VCC as an input supply at TP1 to IC U1 – LD1085 – Pin3:
Low drop positive voltage regulator. Output voltage 3V3 DC at Pin2 of U1
(+/-2%) to be monitored at TP2 w.r.t. GND TP4, indicated by LED D1. 3V3
as VCCO connected to Xilinx FPGA.
2. +2.5 V DC: +5V VCC as an input supply at TP1 to IC U2 – LD1117 25 –
Pin3: Low drop positive voltage regulator. Output voltage 2V5 DC at Pin2 of
U2 (+/-2%) to be monitored at TP5 w.r.t. GND TP4, indicated by LED D2.
2V5 as VCCAUX connected to Xilinx FPGA.
3. +1.2 V DC: +5V VCC as an input supply at TP6 to IC U3 – LD1085 – Pin3:
Low drop positive voltage regulator. Output voltage 1V2 DC at Pin2 of U3
(+/- 2%) to be monitored at TP7 w.r.t. GND TP8. 1V2 as VCCINT connected
to Xilinx FPGA.
4. JTAG programming to the SPARTAN-3E: To Down load Program files in to
FPGA & Microblaze.
a. Shorting link JP2 : Pin 1 & 2 : Short
b. Shorting link JP5 : Pin 2 & 3 : Short
Location: CPU PCB ASSY – ELS 62012R4 is located as Piggyback on ARM7
Interface PCB Assembly.
9-37
Silk Screen Layout
9-38
CPU PCB ASSEMBLY : Signal details as follows:
9-39
9.1.14. Baseboard 1 ELS52015R2

(Not applicable with ARM7 Interface PCB assembly)
Base board 1 PCB assembly is used to make connectivity to stepper motor CLK
and Direction signals, Opto signals, Valves / pumps, Stirrer, LLS isolated signals
as Auto Zero – AZ, LLS OUT, VOD derived from / to Interface PCB assembly. The
10 pin FRC connectors are for the output signals (generated by FPGA).
LLS isolated signal are derived through QUAD Opto SFH6916, U1: Reagent 1- R1,
U2: Reagent 2- R2, U3 for Sample. Opto Input 3V3 supply is from Interface PCB
Assembly and Output of Opto 5V LLS from Regulator PCB Assembly.
The 16 pin FRC connectors and other connectors are for the input signals (read by
FPGA).
Location: Base Board 1 PCB is located behind the Interface PCB.
The details of the connectors are as follows.
Drive Signals
J11 : R1 Arm UP/DN, Rotation, R1 Syringe, R1 RGT CLK / DIR.
J12 : R2 Arm UP/DN, Rotation, R2 Syringe, R2 RGT CLK / DIR.
J13 : Sample Arm, Sample syringe, Sample tray
J15 : Stirrer 1, 2
J17 : RCT, CRU
J14 : R1, R2, Sample syringe Valve, Detergent Pump, Bio-hazard pump.
J16 : AC valves (Overflow, Trough valve etc.)
OPTO / Control signals
J21 : R1 ARM UP, Home, feedback, VOD, LLS Out , Auto Zero
J22 : R2 ARM UP, Home, feedback, VOD, LLS Out , Auto Zero
J23 : Sample ARM UP, Home, feedback, VOD, LLS Out , Auto Zero
J25 : Stirrer1, 2 opto
J1 : Reagent Tray opto
J4 : Sample Tray opto
J3 : R1, R2, Sample Syringe opto
J5 : RCT Opto
J6 : CRU Opto
Isolated LLS signals Auto Zero, LLS out, VOD for Sample Arm, R1, and R2 have
been generated with the help of Quad opto SFH6916.
9-40
9-41
9.1.15. Baseboard 2 ELS52008R4 / ELS52008R5

(Not applicable with ARM7 Interface PCB assembly)
Base board 2 is used to make connectivity between Interface card with Pressure
sensor circuit, Barcode scanners, RCT heater, RGT temperature Controller,
Proximity switch for RGT tray cover open sense, Load cell, ISE.
The details of connector functionality as mentioned below.
J1 : Serial communication signals of ISE, Barcode scanners
J3 : RGT Barcode scanner ( JP2, JP6 – ON for programming)
J4 : Sample barcode scanner(JP3, JP7 – ON for programming)
J5 : RCT communication
J9 : RGT temperature controller communication.
J10 : RGT cover sense Proximity switch
J14 : Pressure Sensor(Keyence APC033W), JP4 – ON
J11 : Power to Pressure sensor circuit:+24V DC
J6 : Sleep Mode logic Signals ( ELS52008R4)
J13 : Sleep Mode logic signals .( ELS52008R5)
Location: Base Board 2 PCB is located behind the Interface PCB.
9-42
9-43
9-44
9.1.16. Stirrer PCB ELS32006R6

The Stirrer PCB provides driving voltage for Stirrer motor 1 and 2 with variable
speed. FPGA is sending the pulses to opto’s on stirrer motor driver card.
Pulses from FPGA S1_C1, S1_C2 to opto’s U9, U10 transferring in to TTL level
and sending to U17 – 74HC138 with the help of 3 to 8 Line decoder. Output of
decoder is an output w.r.t speed and converted in to square wave with the help of
IC 74HC14 .Respective square pulses fed to PWM to control at pin1 ( IN1+) and to
stirrer motor through NPN transistor array IC U23 – ULN2003.Output of PWM at
Pin9,10 drive Stirrer motor M1.
Stirrer motor 1 speed control through PWM controller TL494 (U14).
Vref: 5V at pin14 of U14.
Oscillator frequency monitored at pin 5, 6 of U14.
Output 24V pulses to motor monitored at pin9, 10 of U14.
Same is applicable for Stirrer Motor 2:
Opto’s for Input : U7, U8
Decoder : U16
Schmitt trigger IC : U19
Transistor Array : U22
PWM TL494 : U13.
The flow of signals for stirrer DC motor driving voltage is from FPGA (gives logic
signals corresponding to speed required), to Baseboard1, to Backplane2 to Stirrer
card to Backplane 2, to DC motors.
Power Supply for Stirrer motor controller card: VCC (+5V): At pin 27, 28, 29, 59,
60, 61, 91, 92, 93 of Euro connector J1.
GND logic 30, 31, 32, 62, 63, 64, 94, 95, 96.
VS: +24V: Pin1, 2, 33, 34, 65, 66 of Connector J1
VS GND: Pin 3 – 6, 35-38, and 67-70 of connector J1
LED D13 : 24V power supply indication
LED D11: Stirrer motor 1 Output indication
LED D10: Stirrer motor 2 Output indication
Location: Stirrer PCB ELS32006R6 is located on the left hand side of analyzer in
PCB cage 2
9-45
9.1.17. RCT Heater PCB ELS52004R2

RCT Heater control card is being used to control RCT heater temperature between
37 ± 0.2 °C.
RCT heater assembly consisted of Heaters – 03 numbers and Temperature sensor
03 numbers are read respective heater temperature.
IC U2 89V51RD2FA is used as CPU to control RCT heater through PWM L298
U8,U11,Output of Sensor 1, 2, 3 is being selected by analog multiplexer IC 4051
U5 and output at U5 PIN3 – TP1.Analog output voltage proportional to temperature
is being send to ADC U4 CS5480A through OPAMP OP07 U6. Output of ADC is
send to CPU for further processing.
PWM Driver IC U8, U11 to control Heater H1- J7 (Indication LED4), H2 – J9
(Indication LED5) and H3 – J10 (Indication LED2) respectively to get temperature
37 ± 0.2 °C.
RCT heater card is connected to interface card assembly through serial interface
IC U12 MAX232.
IC U7 24C02 EEPROM is used to store parameters.
Power to Logic circuit VCC (+5V) at J4 from TB3 TB – TP2.
Power to Analog circuit +5V Analog – TP4, -5V Analog – TP3 are generated with
the help of NMH0509S and 7805, 7905 respectively.
Power to PWM +36 generated through SMPS 36V: 2A at connector J5.
TP3 WRT TP5: -5V (Analog supply).
9-46
9.1.18. Motor Drive ELS52002R6.1

Motor Drive pcb assy ELS52002R6.1 is with TI make DRV8825 stepper motor
driver. With reference to below mentioned jumper link selection, Motor driver card
to be configured for respective assemblies.
Motor driver Pcb assy ELS52002R6.1 is a Digital circuit card; hence no
programming is required as ELS52002R5.
Each Motor driver card would drive 04 nos. Stepper motors.
With the help of jumper selection Motor driver card would be configured for
Sample, Reagent 1, Reagent 2, Stirrer 1, 2, RCT, CRU interfaces.
The Stepper Motor Driver (SMD) card is being used to drive Stepper motor to
control RCT, RGT, Sample Arm, R1 ARM, R2 Arm, Stirrer 1, 2, CRU assemblies.
Power supply 3V3 : TP2, indicated by LED D9 wrt GND TP1, 5V VCC: TP3,
indicated by D11, 24V : TP4, indicated by D10.
9-47
CLK, Direction signals for stepper motor drive are opto isolated with the help of
Quad opto IC U7, U9.
Control Signals CLK (M1CL , M2CL, M3CL , M4CL ).Direction (M1DR, M2DR,
M3DR, M4DR) of respective stepper motors are generated from Interface board
through Base board1 to 96 pin Euro connector J1 OR from ARM7 : interface pcb
assy + CPU pcb assy.
Control signals are converted in to Square wave output with the help of Schmitt
trigger IC 7414 (U6, U10).
Respective stepper motor’s Clock signals are connected to CLK pin of respective
stepper motor driver IC U1, U2, U3, U4. Input of monoshot multi-vibrator U8, U11
to synchronize clock and direction signals. Output of U8, U11 are fed to reference
of PWM – Stepper motor driver IC U1, U2, U3, U4.
Stepper motor driver is connected to Stepper motors through 96 pin Euro
connector and Back Plane 1.
First Direction signal have been set and CLK fed to stepper motor.
Stepper motors used are MAE HY 200 2220 0062/ HS200 2221 0070 AF04 for
RCT, ARM UP/DN, Sample tray, CRU UP/DN, Sample, Reagent1, and Reagent 2
Syringe.
Stepper Motor HY200 2226 0190 - AX08 for RGT assembly.
Stepper Motor HY200 1713 0033 AP04 for Stirrer 1 assembly, Stirrer2 assembly.
Motor Driver card – 05 nos. are used to drive above stepper motors with respective
assembly configuration as selected by jumper link.
These PCBs are connected to the Backplane1 PCB.
The flow of the logic input signals (clock and direction) is from the Interface board
to Base board1 OR Arm7 interface pcb assy +CPU pcb assy.to Backplane1 to
Motor Drive board.
The flow of the output signals is from motor Drive board to Backplane1 to the
stepper motors of respective assemblies.
Location: Motor Driver cards are located on left hand side of analyzer in PCB
cage 1.
Jumper Selection for XL640
9-48
Component Layout:
OR
9.1.19. Motor Drive ELS52002R5

With the help of jumper selection Motor driver card would be configured for
Sample, Reagent 1, Reagent 2, Stirrer 1, 2, RCT, CRU interfaces.
The details of jumper selection have been mentioned on PCB assy.
A complex programmable logic device (CPLD) is a programmable logic device with
complexity between that of PALs and FPGAs and architectural features of both.
The building block of a CPLD is the macro cell, which contains logic implementing
disjunctive normal form expressions and more specialized logic operations.
9-49
Motor driver card consist of sections a) Signal circuit. b) Main Control circuit – Xlinx
CPLD XC9572PC84A. c) Stepper motor driver (PWM) – L6258.
Motor driver card would drive 04 nos. Stepper motors. Control Signals CLK (M1CL
– TP3, M2CL – TP4, M3CL – TP5, M4CL – TP6).Direction (M1DR, M2DR, M3DR,
M4DR) of respective stepper motors are generated from Interface board through
Base board1 to 96 pin Euro connector J1.
Berg Strip J4 is used to Program CPLD U7.
Respective stepper motor’s Clock signals are connected to Input / output port of
Motor driver controller U7 XC9572PC84A as well as to Input of monoshot multi-
vibrator U16, U9 to synchronize clock and direction signals. Output of U16, U9 are
fed to reference of PWM – Stepper motor driver IC U1, U2, U3, U4.
Input signals for PWM are from input / Output ports of U7 to control Stepper motor.
Output of PWM – Stepper motor driver is connected to Stepper motors through 96
pin Euro connector and Back Plane 1.
First Direction signal have been set and Clk fed to stepper motor.
The power to motor drive cards are:
 VCC (+5V DC) – TP7 at Pin B32, C32 of 96 pin Euro Connector J1
 GND – TP8 logic GND
 VS (+24V DC) – TP1
 TP2 – VS GND
Stepper motors used are MAE HY 200 2220 0062/ HS200 2221 0070 AF04 for
Syringe.
Stepper Motor HY200 17130033 AP04 for Stirrer 1 assembly, Stirrer2 assembly.
The winding resistance of the motor is 11.2 Ohm.
Motor Driver card – 05 nos. are used to drive above stepper motors.
to Base board1 to Backplane1 to motor Drive board.
motors.
CPLD in the motor driver card are programmed at the Production.
LED4 – ‘ON’ indicates that the program downloaded in the CPLD
has been executed.
9-50
cage 1.
OR
9.1.20. Motor Drive ELS52002R4

A complex programmable logic device (CPLD) is a programmable logic device with
complexity between that of PALs and FPGAs and architectural features of both.
The building block of a CPLD is the macro cell, which contains logic implementing
disjunctive normal form expressions and more specialized logic operations.
Motor driver card consist of sections a) Signal circuit b) Main Control circuit – Xlinx
CPLD XC9572PC84A. c) Stepper motor driver (PWM) – L6258.
Motor driver card would drive 04 nos. Stepper motors. Control Signals CLK (M1CL
– TP3, M2CL – TP4, M3CL – TP5, M4CL – TP6).Direction (M1DR, M2DR, M3DR,
M4DR) of respective stepper motors are generated from Interface board through
Base board1 to 96 pin Euro connector J1.
9-51
Berg Strip J4 is used to Program CPLD U7.
Respective stepper motor’s Clock signals are connected to Input / output port of
Motor driver controller U7 XC9572PC84A as well as to Input of monoshot multi-
vibrator U16, U9 to synchronize clock and direction signals. Output of U16, U9 are
fed to reference of PWM – Stepper motor driver IC U1, U2, U3, U4.
Input signals for PWM are from input / Output ports of U7 to control Stepper motor.
Output of PWM – Stepper motor driver is connected to Stepper motors through 96
pin Euro connector and Back Plane 1.
First Direction signal have been set and Clk fed to stepper motor.
The power to motor drive cards are:
 VCC (+5V DC) – TP7 at Pin B32, C32 of 96 pin Euro Connector J1
 GND – TP8 logic GND
 VS (+24V DC) – TP1
 TP2 – VS GND
Stepper motors used are MAE HY 200 2220 0062 / HS200 2221 0070 AF04 for
Syringe.
Stepper Motor HY200 17130033 AP04 for Stirrer 1 assembly, Stirrer2 assembly.
The winding resistance of the motor is 11.2 Ω.
Motor Driver card – 05 nos. are used to drive above stepper motors.
to Base board1 to Backplane1 to motor Drive board.
motors.
CPLD in the motor driver card are programmed at the Production.
LED4 – ‘ON’ indicates that the program downloaded in the CPLD
has been executed.
cage 1
9-52
9.1.21. DC Drive ELS32004R9

The function of this card is to turn ON/OFF the DC valves and pumps as per logic
signals generated from FPGA. It drives the Sample syringe, R1 Syringe, R2
syringe valves, detergent pump and Bio-Hazard pump (all operated on +24V Dc).
Input signals from FPGA at Pin J1A pin 2 – 9 for DC valve1 – 8.
R1Syringe Valve: Input signal C1_DCV1_IN (3V3 volt amplitude) from FPGA is
send to base of transistor Q5 (BC547), output of Q5 to input of Opto isolator
TLP621 U3.Output of U3 is to input of NPN Transistor array ULN2003 U7C.
Output of U7 at pin14 (24V DC) drive R1 Syringe valve. Output indicated is by D5
LED.
R2 Syringe Valve: Input signal C1_DCV2_IN (3V3 volt amplitude) from FPGA is
send to base of transistor Q6 (BC547), Output of Q6 to input of Opto isolator
TLP621 U4.Output of U4 is to input of NPN Transistor array ULN2003 U7B.
Output of U7 at pin15 (24V DC) drive R2 Syringe valve. Output indicated is by LED
D8.
Sample Syringe Valve: Input signal C1_DCV3_IN (3V3 volt amplitude) from
FPGA is send to base of transistor Q7 (BC547), output of Q7 to input of Opto
isolator TLP621 U5.Output of U5 is to input of NPN Transistor array ULN2003
U7A.
Output of U7 at pin16 (24V DC) drive Sample Syringe valve. Output indicated is by
LED D9.
9-53
Detergent Pump Valve: Input signal C1_DCV5_IN (3V3 volt amplitude) from
FPGA is send to base of transistor Q3 (BC547), output of Q3 to input of Opto
isolator TLP621 U1.Output of U1 is to base of NPN Transistor TIP122 Q1.
Output of Q1 i.e. collector (24V DC) drive Detergent pump. Output indicated is by
LED D1.
Bio-Hazard Pump: Input signal DCV7_IN (3V3 volt amplitude) from FPGA is send
to base of transistor Q4 (BC547), output of Q4 to input of Opto isolator TLP621
U2.Output of U2 is to base of NPN Transistor TIP122 Q2.
Output of Q2 i.e. collector (24V DC) drive Bio–Hazard pump. Output indicated is by
LED D3.
Power to DC Drive card :
 VCC (+3V3) at pin33, 65 of Euro connector J1
 VCC (+5V) at pin33, 65 of Euro connector J1
 D6 LED indication
 GND at pin 34, 66 of Euro connector J1
 Vs (+24V) at pin35, 67 of Euro connector J1.D7 LED indication
 VS GND pin 15,47,79 of Euro connector J1
The flow of the logic input signals is from the Interface board to Base board1 to
Backplane2 to DC Drive board. The flow of the output signals is from DC Drive
board to Backplane2 to the valves and pumps.
Location: The DC drive card is located in the (1st slot from left) in PCB cage 2 on
left hand side of analyzer.
9-54
9.1.22. AC Drive Board ELS32003R1

The function of AC Valve Drive card is used to drive the 100V AC valves. Input
signals from J16 of Base board 1 through FRC cable to J10 of AC valve card to
ON/OFF AC Valve / Pumps. Solid state relay (SSR) MP240D4 is 4A rating at 240V
AC output Single in line package (SIP), 4000V RMS opto isolated with Zero
voltage switching and internal snubber.
Overflow Valve: Overflow valve input at base of Q2 BC547. Output of Q2 to input
pin 4 of Solid state relay MP240D4 U2. LED D2 indicated input indication. Output
of solid state relay U2 pin 1 to connector J2.
Overflow valve is connected to J2 – Pin1: 100V output. Pin2: Neutral.
R2/SP Trough Valve: R2 Trough valve input at base of Q3 BC547. Output of Q3
to input pin 4 of Solid state relay MP240D4 U3. LED D3 indicated input indication.
Output of solid state relay U3 pin 1 to connector J3.
R2 Trough valve is connected to J3 – Pin1: 100V output. Pin2: Neutral.
Stirrer 1, 2 Trough Valve: Stirrer 1, 2 Trough Valve input at base of Q4 BC547.
Output of Q4 to input pin 4 of Solid state relay MP240D4 U4. LED D4 indicated
input indication.
Stirrer 1, 2 trough valve is connected to J4 – Pin1: 100V output. Pin2: Neutral.
Main Water Valve: Main Water valve input at base of Q5 BC547. Output of Q5 to
input pin 4 of Solid state relay MP240D4 U5. LED D5 indicated input indication.
9-55

Main Water valve is connected to J5 – Pin1: 100V output. Pin2: Neutral.
R1 Trough: R1 Trough valve input at base of Q7 BC547. Output of Q7 to input pin
4 of Solid state relay MP240D4 U7. LED D7 indicated input indication.
R1 Trough valve is connected to J7 – Pin1: 100V output. Pin2: Neutral.
Power AC Drive card
3V3 Pin9 of FRC connector J10
GND Logic Pin 10 FRC connector J10
100V AC Pin 2 of J9 connector. ( From TX1 transformer
CN3)
To pin 2 of U2,U3,U4,U5,U7 – MP240D4 (
Solid state relay)
Fuse F1 – 1A rating is connected to 100V AC
for protection.
Neutral Pin 1 of J9 connector.
The flow of the logic input signals is from the Interface board to Base board1 to AC
Drive board. The flow of the output signals is from AC Drive board to valves. A
fuse of 1A is fitted in the board.
Location: AC Valve Drive PCB is located on the rear side of Analyzer near the rear
switch.
9-56
9.1.23. WGPT Board WGPT04

WGPT PCB is used to sense the liquid levels of Waste Can, DI Water Can,
Detergent can, Bio-Hazard waste Can located inside load cell platform. Load cell
platform is being outside of the Analyzer.
A load cell is a transducer that is used to convert a force into an electrical signal.
This conversion is indirect and happens in two stages. Through a mechanical
arrangement, the force being sensed deforms a strain gauge. The strain gauge
converts the deformation strain to electrical signals.
The electrical signal output is typically in the order of a few milli volts hence
instrumentation amplifier is used to convert milli volts into proper measurable
voltage.
9-57
Waste: Load cell output voltage is proportional to volume of Waste is connected at

connector J1 pin2 and 3. Output of Load cell is connected to inverting and non
inverting terminal of OPAMP U1A- LM324, which is differential amplifier with Gain
of 22. Dead volume level for Waste can is set by pot R1. Output is monitored at pin
8 of U1-TP1.
Voltage at pin 5 of U1 is 1.85V approx. as a reference to comparator. Voltage at
pin6 of U1 crosses to 1.85V, Output at pin 7 of U1 become low, which drive
transistor Q1 BC557. Transistor output Q1 WST is sending to FPGA to generate
Error signal as output to beep buzzer as SIG. This reset Timer IC555. Output of
timer IC NE555 is drive buzzer and respective Error indication.
Bio-waste: Load cell output voltage is proportional to volume of BIO-Waste is
connected at connector J2 pin2 and 3.
Output of Load cell is connected to inverting and non inverting terminal of OPAMP
U2A- LM324, which is differential amplifier with Gain of 22. Dead volume level for
Waste can is set by pot R2. Output is monitored at pin 8 of U2-TP2.
transistor Q2 BC557. Transistor output Q2 BIO-WST is sending to FPGA to
generate Error signal as output to beep buzzer as SIG. This reset Timer IC555.
Output of timer IC NE555 is drive buzzer and respective Error indication.
Detergent: Load cell output voltage is proportional to volume of Detergent is
connected at connector J3 pin2 and 3. Output of Load cell is connected to inverting
and non inverting terminal of OPAMP U3A- LM324, which is differential amplifier
with Gain of 22. Dead volume level for Waste can is set by pot R3.Output is
monitored at pin 8 of U3-TP3.
pin 5 of U3 crosses to 0.776V, Output at pin 7 of U3 become low, which drive
transistor Q3 BC557. Transistor output Q3 DET is sending to FPGA to generate
timer IC NE555 is drive buzzer and respective Error indication.
DI - Water: Load cell output voltage is proportional to volume of Waste is
connected at connector J4 pin2 and 3. Output of Load cell is connected to inverting
and non inverting terminal of OPAMP U4A- LM324, which is differential amplifier
with Gain of 22. Dead volume level for Waste can is set by pot R4. Output is
monitored at pin 8 of U1-TP4.
transistor Q4 BC557. Transistor output Q4 DIW is sending to FPGA to generate
timer IC NE555 is drive buzzer and respective Error indication. Reference voltage
2V5 is generated by LM385 U12 and buffered with U13 – LM324. +2V5 and -2V5
for SET are generated by LM385 U11 and U10 respectively.
Power to WGPT PCB: Transformer secondary voltage is connected at J6, Output
voltage is generated by U7 - IC 7815 at TP5, indicated by LED D12.
9-58
If the level of the liquid is beyond the set limit, respective indicator LED’s mounted
on the rear panel of the Analyzer start flashing and a buzzer beeps.
The PCB provides the logic signal to indicate the liquid level limits crossover.
This signal flows from the WGPT board to 9 pin d-type connector on the rear panel
to Baseboard2 to Interface board.
Location: WGPT PCB is fixed in load cell platform.
9.1.24. PCB Assy Float Sensor ELS22037R1

Float Sensor PCB is being used to sense Level of DI water Can, Detergent, Bio-
waste, waste.
Respective float assy. input at J1, J2, J3, and J4 respectively, are being read
through U1 – 74HC244 & Error signal is being sent to interface. LED1, 2, 3, 4 are
lit ON during Error. Also Beeper will give a beep for user.
Connector J6 is for Power: +5V – Pin1 – TP2, GND: Pin2, 3 – TP1, Error signal:
Pin 4 – TP3.
Connector J5: To connect Beeper.
Location: PCB Assy is being located at Rear side on Waste mounting bracket.
9-59
9.1.25. LMPS PCB EL52018R0

The LMPS PCB is meant to supply highly stable 12V to the photometer lamp
(12V / 20W) and supply ±15V to Photometer card.
Lamp Power supply: Transformer secondary output voltage for Lamp is
connected at J1, J2. Rectified by BR1 - BR64 and filtered by C1, C2. IC 723 is
voltage regulator. Output voltage at pin 10 is drive transistor Q2 Tip122. Transistor
Q1 BU508A is connected as Darlington to draw load current through it.
Current sense resistor R2 0.18E gives current feedback to voltage regulator IC
723. Voltage feedback is adjusted through POT P1.
IC U3 LT1014 is Quad precision opamp.LM399 temperature compensated zener,
gives 6V8 voltage output. POT P2 adjusted to get +12V for lamp Assembly.Q4 is
BU508A mounted on Heat sink to drawn load current through it. Yellow LED D3
indicated +12V output TP6 for Lamp assembly.
IC 7812 U2 generates +12V Dc for Fan to cool heat sinks.
GND – TP5
Photometer Power Supply: Transformer secondary output voltage is connected
to J3, J4, and J5, rectified with BR2 BR64 and filtered with C12 for positive and
C16 for negative voltage. IC U5 7815 TO3 package mounted on heat sink to
generate +15V – TP3, indicated by Green LED D4.
Negative voltage is generated by U6 IC 7915 TO3 package mounted on Heat sink
to generate -15V TP4, indicated by RED LED D5.
GND – TP7.
Location: LMPS PCB is mounted in-line with the SMPS.
9-60
OR
 12 V/5A/6A SMPS is used for photometer lamp power supply.
regulate ± 15V DC with the help of regulator IC 7815, 7915 for
Photometer Assy. Refer section 9.1.2 Regulator PCB:
ELS22032R1 for details.
9.1.26. Pump Connector PCB: ELS62004R0

Pump connector PCB is used to make termination for Pump, so as to avoid
soldering of wires to pump terminals directly. Pump terminations are soldered to
PCB. Wires are soldered to PCB pads. Wire links are connected to R1, R2 for
connectivity of wires and pump terminations.
Location:
 PCB1: For Detergent pump termination
 PCB2: For Bio-Hazard pump termination
9-61
9.1.27. LMPS Fan Power Supply PCB ELS22001R1

(Applicable with LMPS Pcb assembly)
LMPS FAN power supply PCB is used to provide regulated +12V Dc voltage
supply required for the LMPS Power Supply PCB cooling fan.
Fan is being used to provide air cooling to Heat sink mounted on LMPS power
supply PCB.
Power 24V DC to LMPS Fan power supply PCB at CN IN pin2 is from 24V SMPS.
IC 7812 U1 mounted on Heat sink is positive fixed voltage regulator gives +12V
regulated output at CN out Pin1 and Pin2 is ground.
Location: LMPS Fan power supply PCB is located in front of the LMPS PCB.
9-62
9.1.28. Stirrer Motor Indicator ELD52002R3

Stirrer motor indicator PCB is used for easy termination to stirrer motor connector
from interface PCB assembly and stirrer motor to avoid connectivity problem.
Connector J1: Output of interface PCB assembly as a drive to Stirrer motor.
Connector J2: To Stirrer motor.
Resistor R1 and LED D1 is not used. It is used for Stirrer1 and 2.
Location: Stirrer motor indicator PCB mounted on base plate of Stirrer Arm.
9.1.29. JTAG Interface PCB ELS62015R2

(Applicable with ST10 Interface PCB assy.)
JTAG Interface PCB is used to download respective program in to CPLD / FPGA
with the help of PC parallel port.
Program Input / Output and control signals are at Connector J6 – PC parallel port
as follows.
PIN 1 : VCC Sense. : Input signal (4V)
PIN2 : DONE : Input signal
PIN3 : PROG : Control signal
PIN4 : DIN : Output signal
PIN5 : TMS_IN : Output signal
PIN6 : CTRL : Control signal
PIN7 : CLK : Output signal
PIN8 : GND
PIN9 : Not connected
Download the program file through PC parallel port. Signals are buffered with the
help of IC U1, U2 74HC125 – Tri-state buffer.
9-63
Buffered outputs at connector J5 – To FPGA / CPLD are as follows.

IC U2 signal to J5 signal
Pin5 : DIN to Pin5 : DIN
Pin 12 : TMS_IN to PIN 6: PROG
Pin 9 : CLK to Pin 3: CCLK
Pin 1 : PROG to Pin 4: D/P, Pin 2: GND, Pin 1: VCC
Location: JTAG Interface PCB is mounted in box.
9.1.30. Clot Detection PCB ELS32015R4

Clot Detection PCB assembly is being used to detect clot in Blood Sample. To
detect clot in blood sample Honeywell make PC26 sensor S1 is used.
The sensing element PC26 of a Honeywell - Sensing and Control solid-state
pressure senor consists of four nearly identical piezo resistors buried in the surface
of a thin square silicon diaphragm integrated circuit.
The thin diaphragm is micro machined by chemically etching a cavity into the
surface opposite the piezo resistors. The undetached portion of the silicon slice
provides a rigid boundary constraint for the diaphragm and a surface mounting to
some other member.
A pressure causes the thin diaphragm to flex, inducing a stress, or strain in the
diaphragm and also in the buried resistors. The resistor values will change
depending on the amount of strain they undergo, which depends on the amount of
9-64
pressure applied to the diaphragm. Therefore, a change in pressure (mechanical

input) is converted to a change in resistance (electrical output).
The change in voltage of Pressure Sensor 26PC (S1) is being monitored at Pin 2
(S1+) and 4 (S1-). Differential voltage has been sent to Opamp OP-07 (U2).
Output voltage is with gain of 100 of U2 at TP1. At U2 - Pot P3 is used for
OFFSET Adjustment.
U1A – LM339 Comparator is used for Pressure Signal. Reference to comparator at
inverting pin no. 6 is adjusted by Pot P1 and to be monitored at test point TP3
(+2.50V). During dispensing with High Pressure, When Potential crosses reference
voltage then output at pin 1 of U1 goes high. Output of U1A goes to IC U3 – Driver
pin 1 and 2. Pin 16, 15 of U3 - Output of U3 goes to Low. LED L1 shows Pressure
Error and L2 Shows Error. These Error signals are sent on Interface card.
U1B – LM339 Comparator is used for Vacuum Signal. Reference to comparator at
non-inverting pin no. 5 is adjusted by Pot P2 and to be monitored at test point TP4
(-1.20V). During Aspirating, Blood clot blocks the air path hence High vacuum is
created, When Potential crosses reference voltage then output at pin 2 of U1 goes
high. Output of U1A goes to IC U3 – Driver pin 3 and 4. Pin 13 - Output of U3 goes
to Low. LED L3 shows Vacuum Error and L2 Shows Error. These Error signals are
sent on Interface card with the help of connector J2.
Connector J2 – Output Signals.
Pin 1: Error.
Pin 2 : Vacuum
Pin 3 : Pressure
Pin 4: GND.
Power to Clot detection PCB assembly is with the help of connector J1. Pin1: +5V,
Pin 2: GND, Pin3: -5V.
Location: Clot detection PCB assembly is mounted near RGT Tray on base plate.
9-65
9.1.31. Front Panel Indicator PCB Assy – Bicolor: ELD52003R2

Front Panel Indicator PCB Assy - Bicolor is being used to differentiate Analyzer
Power UP at Mains Power by Rear Panel Power ON/OFF switch : RGT Cooling is
ON or at Control “ON” : Analyzer’s all interfaces are Power UP visually by RED &
Green colour LED array respectively.
Front Panel indicator Bicolour consisted of Relay to switch between Red & Green
LED Supply. Bicolor LED ( RED & Green) with Lens are used in the form of LED
Array visually at Front Side for User to identify the Analyzer is working in RGT
Cooling or Under User mode.
From 12V / 20A SMPS +12V Supply through NC contact is connected to Anode of
RED LED hence after Mains Power ON RED LED Array is lit i.e. Analyzer under
RGT Cooling mode.
From SMPS +5V supply is connected to through relay NO contact to Anode of
Green LED array hence after Control ON Green LED array is lit.
Location: Front Panel Indicator PCB Assy – Bicolor is mounted at Front side of
Analyzer to the Center.
Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & SSB – Bottom for reference.
9-66
9.1.32. Canmax Support PCB: ELS52022R0

Canmax support PCB assy is being an interface between Canmax barcode engine
& interface.
Canmax barcode engine is being fitted on Canmax barcode support PCB &
connected through FPC cable at J2 on Canmax barcode support PCB to read
barcode for Sample & Reagent.
U1 is Max 3232 as a serial interface between Canmax barcode & interface PCB.
Connector J1 for Power supply +5V & RXD, TXD signals.
LED D1 for Power ON indication.
Location: On bracket near Sample tray window & Reagent tray window.
9-67
OR
9.1.33. Canmax Support PCB: ELS52022R1
9-68
9.1.34. Auto start up PCB: ELD52005R0/R1/R1.1

Auto start up PCB assy is being used to schedule Analyzer ON / OFF as per
USER requirement.
Mains supply – 230V AC is being connected to connector J9 as L –N – E. TX1 is
step down transformer to generate 10V. DC unregulated supply is supplied to
Regulator IC U11 for +5V regulated output to supply for microcontroller 89C2051-
U4 & PC communication circuit – Max 232.
With the help of MultiXL “Instrument ON” command is being received to
microcontroller. Microcontroller is switched ON the Aux. relay: +5V: RL1 to switch
ON Power relay RL2. Power Relay RL2 is switched ON Analyzer. Please note that
Mains ON/OFF, Control ON/OFF switch should be kept ON.
Connector J2 is connected to Isolator PCB assy for serial communication.
Connector SW2 is for Auto / Manual mode. SW2: Open for Auto mode & close for
Manual mode.
Location: Auto start up PCB assy is located next to RCT PCB assy.
OR
9-69
Auto start up PCB: ELD52005R1
OR
Auto start up PCB: ELD52005R1.1
9-70
9.1.35. Sleep mode PCB: ELS62033R1

Sleep mode PCB assembly is being used to control mains supply of Lamp
assembly SMPS S60 -12(12V: 5A), CPU PCB assembly is detecting the hardware
present in machine & accordingly as per schedule in system sleep mode is
enabling & disabling.
During Sleep mode enable Lamp assembly Mains Input of SMPS S60-12 is made
OFF, which switched OFF the lamp assembly.
During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Lamp assembly SMPS is switched ON
with the help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U1 L MOC3061 & U2 Triac
T1235.
During Sleep mode enable Pressure Pump – DI water Pump Mains Input is made
OFF, which switched OFF the Pressure pump assembly.
During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Pressure pump is switched ON with the
help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U3 MOC3061 & U4 Triac T1235.
During Sleep mode enable Vacuum Pump Mains Input is made OFF, which
switched OFF the Vacuum pump assembly.
During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Vacuum pump is switched ON with the
help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U5 MOC3041 & U6 Triac T1235.
OR
9.1.36. Sleep Mode PCB Assembly ELS62033R2

Sleep mode PCB assembly is being used to control mains supply of Lamp
assembly SMPS S60 -12 (12V: 5/A) ,OR LS75-12 ( 12V : 6A), Vacuum pump 110V
AC, Pressure pump.- 220V AC
9-71
Sleep mode signal to sleep mode pcb assy .:J5 through J52 onArm based
Interface pcb Assy.
5V DC power supply for 5V DC Relay : J6 through JP16 ( Pin 2: VCC , Pin1 :
GND) on interface pcb assy.
CPU PCB assembly is detecting the hardware present in machine & accordingly
as per schedule in system sleep mode is enabling & disabling.
During sleep mode enable, Lamp assembly Mains Input of SMPS S60-12 / LS 75-
12 - J1 ( Pin 2 &4) , Vacuum pump-J4, Pressure pump-J3 are made OFF, which
switched OFF the lamp assembly, Vacuum pump, Pressure Pump.
Mains input : 220V AC connected to J1 pin 1 & 3 , Mains input 110V AC at J3
During Sleep mode disable,At J1 Mains input of Lamp assembly SMPS is switched
ON with the help of 5V DC relay RL1.
At J4 Mains Input of Vacuum Pump 110V AC is switched ON with the help of 5V
DC Relay RL3 .
At J2 Mains Input of Pressure pump 220V AC is switched ON with the help of 5V
DC Relay RL2.
9.1.37. USB Connector ELLC2003R4

USB interface between PC’s USB port & M/c is being established with the help of
USB connector pcb assy.
USB Connector PCB: Silicon lab make CP2102 – USB to UART Bridge is being
used for USB communication between CPU & PC – USB Port.
Serial USB signals- Isolator Pcb Assy : PC connector to USB connector PCB Assy
J4.
USB connector PCB assy J3 connected to PC USB port through USB cable.
Location: USB CONNECTOR PCB assy is located at Back Side On Rear Bottom
plate.
9-72
Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of USB CONNECTOR
PCB ELLC2003R4.
OR
9-73
9.2. USB Connector PCB Assembly ELLC2003R6

USB interface between PC’s USB port & M/c is being established with the help of
USB connector PCB assy.
USB Connector PCB: Silicon lab make CP2102 – USB to UART Bridge is being
used for USB communication between CPU & PC – USB Port. Serial USB signals-
CPU PCB assy through PC serial communication-– Interface
Location: USB CONNECTOR PCB assy is located at LHS – Back side of the
machine.
Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST and bottom side – SSB of USB
CONNECTOR PCB ELLC2003R6
SST SSB
9-74
9.3. IoT PCI-E Modem PCB

IoT (Internet of Thing) PCI-E Modem PCB is used for transfers the data of errors
occurring on the XL Analyzer at customer site.
Location : PCIe slot of analyzer PC.
9-75
10. Electrical Wiring Description

10.1. WDD05003 RGT SMPS (12V/18A, 12V/20A) and
Cooling Fan
10-1
10.2. WDS5007 12V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram (without

Sleep Mode PCB Assy)
10-2
10.3. WDS5007 12V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram (with

Sleep Mode PCB Assy)
10-3
10.4. WDS5004 24V/6.3A SMPS Wiring Diagram with

LMPS Fan
10-4
10.5. WDS5004 24V/6.3A SMPS Wiring Diagram without

LMPS FAN
10-5
10.6. WDS5006 36V/2.8A SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-6
10.7. WDS5009 5V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-7
10-8
10.8. WDS5010 RGT Controller Unit Wiring Diagram

10.8.1. Single Channel
10-9
10.8.2. Dual Channel
10-10
10.9. Isolator PCB Wiring Assembly

10.9.1. WDS5011 Isolator PCB Wiring Assembly XLRS232
OR
10-11
10.9.2. WDS5011 Isolator PCB Assy Wiring: XL RS232 / USB

Connector PCB Assy
10-12
10.10. WDS5013 RCT Heater PCB Wiring Assembly
10-13
10.11. R1, R2 and SPT Opto Arm Wiring Diagram
10-14
10.12. WDS5015 TB3 (24V and 5V) Terminal Block

Wiring Assembly
10-15
10.13. WDS5016 RCT Slip Ring Assembly

Old Assembly
10-16
New Assembly
10-17
10.14. WDS5017 RGT, ASP and RCT Tray Opto

Assembly
10-18
10.15. WDS5018 RGT Duct Fan Wiring Diagram
10-19
10.16. WDS5019 Stirrer 1 and 2 Opto for Arm Assembly
10-20
10.17. WDS5020 R1PP, R2PP and SPP Syringe Opto

Wiring Diagram
10-21
10.18. WDS5021 CRU1 SN1, SN2 Opto Wiring Diagram
10-22
10.19. WDS5022 RCT Heater Wiring Assembly
10-23
10.20. WDS5024 Base Board 2 PCB Wiring Assembly

(Not applicable with ARM7 Interface pcb assembly)
10-24
10.21. WDD05001 Wiring Diagram of CANMAX Barcode

for ASP
OR
10-25
10.22. Microscan Barcode Scanner
10-26
10.23. WDS5025 Backplane 1 PCB Wiring Assembly
10-27
10.24. Rear Panel Load cell Connection and Waste

Mounting Bracket Led
OR
10-28
10.25. Rear Panel Float sensor Connection and LED

indication
10-29
10.26. WDS5028 Interface PCB Wiring Assembly

ELS52016R1
OR
10-30
10.27. ARM Interface PCB Assembly Wiring
10-31
10.28. WDS5029 RCT Sensor Wiring Assembly
10-32
10.29. WDS5030 SPT, R1PT, and R2PT Assembly

Wiring and Looping (New)
OR
10-33
10.30. SPT, R1PT, R2PT Assembly Wiring and Looping

(OLD)
10-34
10.31. SPP, R1PP, R2PP Syringe Wiring Diagram

(Sapphire and ITO)
10.31.1. Sapphire Syringe
10.31.2. Pulssar Syringe
10-35
10.31.3. WDS5031 ITO Syringe
10-36
10.32. WDS5032 Stirrer 1 and Stirrer 2 Assembly and

Looping Diagram
10-37
10.33. WDS5033 CRU Assembly Wiring and Looping

Diagram
10-38
10.34. WDS5026 Backplane 2 PCB Wiring Assembly
10-39
10.35. WDS5036 Base Board 1 PCB Wiring Assembly

(Not Applicable with ARM7 Interface pcb assembly)
10-40
10.36. WDS5037 AC Drive PCB Wiring Assembly
10-41
10.37. Functional Block Diagram
10-42
10.38. WDS5038 Mains Wiring Diagram
10-43
10.39. WDS5039 TX1 Transformer Assembly
10-44
10-45
10-46
10.42. WDS5044 Rotary Cam Switch Wiring Assembly
10-47
10.43. WDS5045 Pressure Tank with Heater Assembly
10-48
10.44. WDS5047 Regulator PCB Wiring Assembly
10-49
10.45. WDS5048 Photometer Lamp PCB Power Supply
10-50
10.46. WDS5049 Hydraulic Earthing Wiring Assembly
10-51
10.47. WDS5049 ST10 and FPGA Programming Wiring

Diagram
10-52
10.48. WDS5057 24V/1.1A SMPS and 4 Channel ISE

Wiring Assembly
10-53
10.49. WDS5058 Auto Startup PCB Wiring Diagram
10-54
10.50. WDS5059 ±15V Regulator PCB Wiring Assembly
10-55
10.51. WDS5060 SPT Arm Probe Wiring with LLS PCB

Assy ELS22036R2.1
10-56
10.52. WDS5062 R1PT/R2PT Probe Wiring with LLS

PCB Assy ELS22036R2.1
10-57
10.53. WDS5063 Probe Interconnection Wiring with LLS

PCB ELS52023R0
10-58
10.54. WDS5064 R1, R2 Probe Assy with ELS52023R0
10-59
10.55. Sleep Mode PCB Wiring Diagram For 220 V AC
OR
10-60
10-61
10.56. Motor Electrical Assembly
10-62
10.57. RGT Window Heater Assembly
10-63
10.58. WDD05005 Clot Detection PCB Wiring Assembly
10-64
10.59. Electrical Assy Stirrer 1 & 2 EAS5004
10.60. Electrical Assembly BIPPER - FSPXL716
10-65
10.61. Electrical Assembly KEYTO syringe EAS5045

100Ul
10.62. Electrical Assembly KEYTO syringe EAS6026
10-66
10.63. Electrical Assy Microscan Barcode EAS5040
10.64. Electrical Assembly SMC VALVE 100V EAS5029
10-67
10.65. Electrical Assembly RCT Sensor EAS5021
10.66. Electrical Assembly Vacuum Pump EAS5007
10-68
10.67. Electrical Assembly Motor EAS5003
10-69
10.68. Electrical Assy Leuze Barcode RGT EAS5046
10-70
11. Mechanical Description

11.1. Sample, Reagent 1, and 2 Arm Assembly
11.1.1. Function
When the analyzer is initialized, the Sample, Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 pipettes
position themselves at the respective trough position (Home positions for the Arm
Assemblies).
R1PT pipettes the reagent from R1 bottle placed in the Reagent Tray and
dispenses in the cuvette. Then the Arm positions to the Trough position and the R1
Probe is cleaned with warm DI water internally and externally, at the trough
position.
Similarly, R2PT pipettes the reagent from R2 bottle placed in the Reagent Tray
and dispenses in the cuvette. Then the Arm positions to the Trough position and
the R2 Probe is cleaned with warm DI water internally and externally, at the trough
position.
In the same fashion, SPT pipettes the Samples/Standards/ Controls placed in the
Sample Tray and dispenses in the cuvette or into the ISE receptacle as the case
may be. Then the Arm positions to the Trough position and the SPT Probe is
cleaned with warm DI water internally and externally, at the trough position.
11.1.2. Components of SPT, R1PT and R2PT Arm Assembly

Component Function and Operation
Up/Dn Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts Up/Dn motion to the probe
Rotation Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts Rotation motion to the probe
Probe Aspirates / Dispenses Sample/Reagent. Respective Syringe
facilitates Aspiration/Dispensing
VOD Sensor Opto Interrupter. Vertical Obstruction Detection Sensor for Probe,
to prevent damage to probe
Trough Position Sensor Opto Interrupter. For Sensing the Home Position, i.e. the Trough,
in the Rotational direction
Rotation Position Sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the position of probe in Rotational
direction
Up/Dn Position sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Home position of the pipette
(Top Position) in the Vertical Direction.
11-1
11-2
11.2. Sample (SPP), Reagent 1 (R1PP) and Reagent 2

(R2PP) Syringe Assembly
11.2.1. Function
The SPP / R1PP / R2PP syringe assemblies enables the respective arm
assemblies to aspirate / dispense respective liquids (i.e. Air / Sample / Standard /
Control / Warm DI water in the case of SPP, Air/ Reagent /Warm Di Water in the
case of R1PP and R2PP).
11.2.2. Components of SPP/R1PP/R2PP Syringe Assembly

Up / Down Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts Up / Dn motion to the Syringe assembly.
Up Home Position Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Home Position of the Syringe
Sensor Actuator (Up / Position)
Plunger Moves up and down upon receiving appropriate command.
DI water Valve Solenoid operated valve meant for controlling the operational flow
of warm DI water to the probe.
Syringe In the normal operation, when the DI water valve is closed, the
Sample / Standards / Controls are aspirated / dispensed by the
action of the syringe. When the DI water valve is open, the syringe
is in the UP position, so that the warm water from the Pressure
tank flows through the syringe to the inner side of the probe, to
facilitate cleaning of the inner walls of the probe.
11-3
11-4
11.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit Assembly (CRU)

11.3.1. Function
The cuvettes are cleaned up through the nine positions of the CRU (One position
is NULL meant for taking out the cuvette blank readings). The sequences of the
cleaning steps are as follows:
1. Aspiration of Biohazard waste and dispensing of Cleaning Solution
2. Aspiration of waste and dispensing of DI water.
7. NULL (Cuvette Blank Reading!).
8. Aspiration of left over water.
9. Aspiration of left over water and cleaning up of cuvette.
11.3.2. Components of Cuvette Rinsing Unit Assembly

Up/ Dn Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts Up / Dn motion to the CRU unit
Up Sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing (Home) Up position of the CRU
Dn Sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Down position of the CRU
11-5
11.4. Cuvette Mixing Assembly (STR1 and STR2)

11.4.1. Function
The STR1 and STR2 assemblies are meant for performing the mixing operation of
mixing the sample and reagent(s) in the cuvette. When R1 and R2 both are
programmed, then both the units STR1 (meant for mixing R1 and Sample) and
STR2 (meant for mixing R2, R1 and Sample) will operate to perform the mixing
operation. When R2 is not programmed, the STR2 mixing station will be idle. To
reduce the possibilities of contamination due to adherence to paddle, the paddles
11-6
are coated with hydrophobic materials (e.g. Teflon).

After performing the mixing operation inside the cuvette, the arm swings itself to
the trough position, wherein the warm DI water from the Pressure tank cleans the
wetted surface of the Teflon coated paddle.
11.4.2. Components of STR1 and STR2 Assembly

Up / Dn Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts Up and Down motion to the Arm carrying
the mixing paddle.
Rotation Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts Rotation motion to the Arm carrying the
mixing paddle.
Arm This element carries the mixing motor and the paddle.
Paddle Stirrer paddle. Teflon Coated.
Up Sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Home position of the Arm
Trough Position Opto Interrupter. For sensing the home position in the rotary
direction. At home position, the stirrer paddle is over the trough
position.
Rotation sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the position of the arm in the rotary
direction.
11-7
11.5. Auto Sampler Assembly (ASP)

11.5.1. Function
The Auto Sampler (ASP) Assembly consists of Base Assembly and the Tray
Assembly. Two Discs, namely Disc 1 and Disc 2 are provided, each
accommodating 50 number of samples, numbered 1 to 50 and 51 to 100. An
emergency tray containing 32 positions (20+12) is also provided. This part of the
tray can easily be removed and reassembled, ensuring ease of use. For Standards
and controls, a separate disc containing 32 positions (20+12) is also provided. The
ASP assembly is capable of identifying the barcode labels stuck onto the sample
tubes, by means of Sample Barcode Reader.
11.5.2. Components of ASP Assembly

Rotation Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts rotary motion to the ASP.
Home position Sensor Opto Interrupter. Senses Home position of the ASP.
11-8
Position Sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the rotary position of the ASP Tray.
ASP Container This container, which is a stationary part, houses the ASP, contains
a window to facilitate barcode reading of the samples.
Barcode Reader Meant for mounting the Barcode reader.
Mounting Bracket
Sample Tray Assembly Assembly of Sample Tray.
11-9
11.6. Reagent Tray Assembly (RGT)

11.6.1. Function
The Reagent Tray (RGT) Assembly consists of Base Assembly and the Tray
Assembly. The receptacles in the tray are designed to receive 30 numbers of 20ml
bottles and 30 numbers of 50 ml bottles. The positions of the bottles are alternately
numbered with respect to inner bottles and outer bottles. The reagent bottles
meant for R1 are of 50 ml and are to be accommodated in the inner ring, whereas
the reagent bottles meant for R2 are of 20 ml and are to be accommodated in the
outer ring.
The RGT assembly is capable of identifying the barcode labels stuck onto the
reagent bottles, by means of Reagent Barcode Reader.
The reagent tray assembly is provided with thermally insulated lid, provided with
an interlock by means of a proximity switch.
11-10
11.6.2. Components of RGT Assembly

Reagent Tray Tray which receives the reagent bottles.
Rotation Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts rotary motion to the reagent tray.
Home position sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the home position of the reagent tray.
Rotation position sensor Opto Interrupter. Senses the rotational position of the Reagent
Tray.
Barcode Reader (Not shown in the figure) Meant for identifying the reagents by
means of barcode labels stuck on to the reagent bottles.
RGT container The container which houses the Reagent base assembly and the
reagent tray.
RGT Cover Lid that covers RGT assembly to help avoiding evaporation of
reagents. This lid is provided with an interlock proximity switch to
sense the opening and closing of the RGT cover.
11-11
11.7. Reaction Cuvette Table Assembly (RCT)

11.7.1. Function
The RCT assembly consists of base assembly, water jacket assembly and the
cuvette ring set assembly. The base assembly consists of the rotating shaft and
bearing assembly along with the slip ring assembly. The water jacket assembly is
a stationary assembly meant for covering the rotating part of the RCT i.e. the
housing and the cuvette ring set assembly. The cuvette ring set assembly consists
of 72 slotted ring, outer ring, cuvette retaining spring and cuvette retaining plastic
pieces along with the foil heater mounted at the bottom of the 72 slotted rings. The
cuvette ring set assembly also houses the three thermistor assemblies meant for
monitoring the temperature of the RCT. The terminals of the photometer lamp are
mounted onto the water jacket assembly.
11.7.2. Components of RCT Assembly

Rotating Motor Stepper Motor. Imparts rotary motion to the cuvette ring set
assembly
Home position sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the home position of the cuvette ring
set assembly.
Rotation position sensor Opto Interrupter. For sensing the rotation position of the cuvette
ring set assembly.
Cuvettes (Not shown). Reaction cuvettes, 72 numbers
Slip ring assembly To supply to the foil heater and to transport the sensing signals of
the thermistor.
Thermistor assembly (Not shown!) meant for monitoring the temperature of the cuvette
ring set assembly
Foil heater (Not shown) meant for heating the RCT table
Water jacket assembly Meant for covering the cuvette ring set assembly
11-12
11-13
11.8. Pressure Tank Assembly

11.8.1. Function
The main purpose of the pressure tank assembly is to provide warm water at
constant pressure to the SPT, R1PT, R2PT probes, CRU laundry section, and to
the troughs of SPT, R1PT and R2PT. To achieve this purpose, the pressure tank
assembly is provided with a resistance heater, a thermostat, a digital pressure
indicator, and a thermal cutoff switch. To maintain the pressure inside the pressure
tank, a pressure regulator is mounted in the hydraulic line. To maintain the
temperature of DI water inside the pressure tank, a thermostat is provided. And to
monitor the pressure of DI water inside the pressure tank, a pressure transmitter is
mounted. The digital pressure sensor mounting position is elevated from pressure
tank level to avoid water getting into the tube connected between digital pressure
sensor and pressure tank, leading to pressure error and/or failure of pressure
sensor.
11.8.2. Components of Pressure Tank Assembly

Component Function / Operation
Pressure Tank Stainless Steel fabricated pressure tank to contain hot DI water at
pressure
Digital Pressure Pressure sensor to monitor the pressure inside the pressure tank
Indicator
Heater Resistance heater, meant for heating the DI water inside the
pressure tank
Thermostat To control the power supplied to the heater
Thermal cutoff switch Safety switch meant for cutting off the power supply in case of
overheating (may in the case of thermostat failure!)
11-14
11.9. Level Sensing Platform Assembly

11.9.1. Function
The Bio-hazardous waste and Wastes generated in the machine are directed and
collected in 10 liter and 20 liter cans respectively. And the inputs to the system i.e.
DI water and cleaning solution are supplied to the instrument through 20 liter cans
and 10 liter can respectively. To help monitoring whether the cans are filled up and
need replacement (in case of waste containing cans) or emptied and need
replacement (in case of DI water and Cleaning solution), the levels of all these
cans are monitored indirectly through measuring the changes in weights of each of
the cans by means of load cells associated with each can. The level sensing
platform can either be placed behind the machine or by the side of the machine.
To facilitate easy removal of the tubing, quick couplings (non-drip type) are
provided at the rear of the instrument.
11.9.2. Components of Level Sensing Platform Assembly

Component Function / Operation
Load cells 4 numbers of load cells meant for DI water, Bio-hazardous waste,
Normal Waste and Cleaning solution are provided respectively.
Waste Cans 20 liter can is for waste and 10 liter can is for bio-hazardous waste.
Cleaning solution can 10 liter can meant for containing cleaning solution.
DI water can 20 liter can meant for containing DI water.
Trays 4 numbers of trays meant for receiving the cans of DI water, Bio-
hazardous waste, Normal Waste and Cleaning solution are
provided.
11-15
LOAD CELL PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
10 LT. CAN TRAY

20 LT. CAN TRAY
20 LT. CAN TRAY 10 LT. CAN TRAY
M6x20 CSK
SCREW (16 NOS.)
M4x12 PH. HD. SCREW

PW+NW (4 NOS.)
COVER FOR TRANSDUCER

TRANSDUCER BOTTOM
M3x8 PH. HD. SCREW

+PW+NYLON (2 NOS.)
RUBBER SEAL FOR
TRANSDUCER
COVER FOR
TRANSDUCER
PCB
GASKET FOR TRANSDUCER

PCB COVER
HEX NUT M3+PW (4 NOS.)
TRANSDUCER PCB COVER-TOP

LOAD CELL
TRANSDUCER PCB COVER-BOTTOM

TRANSDUCER PCB COVER MOUNTING
STUDS (4 NOS.)
For FLOAT SENSOR details (used in new XL-640 analyzers

instead of Level Sensing Platform Assembly), refer section
4.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous and Waste
page 47 to 49.
11-16
12. Hydraulic Description

12.1. Hydraulic Section
The hydraulic section is located on the right hand side of the Analyzer. The main
components are the DI Water Pump, Damper, Pressure tank, 5 numbers of AC
Valves (SMC), Dual Head Suction Pump, Debubbler unit, Detergent Pump and the
Bio-hazardous Pump. There are 3 adjustments points – Pressure Regulator Valve
(pressure in pressure tank), Detergent Flow Controller and Pinch Valve (for CRU
water flow – located on rear side), Drain valve which allows to drain pressure tank.
OR
12-1
Serial Component
Number
1 DEBUBBLER UNIT
2 PRESSURE TANK WITH HEATER
3 DAMPER
4 KNF PUMP
5 OVERFLOW SMC VALVE
6 WATER SMC VALVE
7 STIRRER SMC VALVE
8 R2PT, SPT SMC VALVE
9 R1PT SMC VALVE
12-2
10 PUMP VACUUM DOUBLE HEADED-

11 PUMP FOR DETERGENT
12 PUMP KNF TYPE FOR BIO-HAZARDOUS
WASTE DISPOSAL
13 DRAIN VALVE
12.2. Hydraulic System Operation

This section explains the hydraulic connection diagram and the cuvette-rinsing
unit. The hydraulic system consists of the valves, pumps, tubing, pressure tank,
regulators and the laundry system. Mentioned below are the functions of the
various valves and pumps.
12.2.1. Valve and Pump Functions

Serial
Valve Pump Function
Number
1 CRU WATER SMC valve Enables or disables the flow of de-ionized water
from the pressure tank to the cuvette rinsing unit
probes.
2 STIR SMC valve Enables or disables the flow of de-ionized water
from the pressure tank to the stirrer 1 and stirrer
2 troughs.
3 ARM SMC valve Enables or disables the flow of de-ionized water
from the pressure tank to the SPT, R1PT, and
R2PT arm troughs.
4 OVFL SMC valve After a water dispense cycle is completed by the
laundry dispense probes, the WATER SMC
valve is shut. The OVFL SMC valve is then
enabled for a moment, this action aspirates and
empties the remaining water contents from
within the laundry dispense probes, thereby
preventing water dripping from the dispense
probes.
5 SYRINGE BURKERT valve Enable or disables the flow of de-ionized water
from the pressure tank to the SPT, R1PT, and
R2PT syringe probes for internal cleaning.
6 Pressure reducer or regulator It is used to regulate and maintain a steady
water pressure in the pressure tank.
7 Main water pump It is used to pump the DI water from the DI
water can to the pressure tank.
8 Detergent pump It is used to pump the detergent solution to the
CRU probe
9 Bio-hazardous waste pump It is used to suck the bio-hazardous waste out
from the CRU probe 1.
10 Double head vacuum pump / It is used to suck the waste out from the 2, 3, 4,
Enomoto vacuum pump 5, 6, 7 and 8 laundry probes.
12-3
12.3. Cuvette Rinsing Unit

The CRU consists of an eight stage laundry. The first stage, consist of detergent
wash probe with 2 nozzles - one nozzle is used to aspirate the bio-hazardous
waste from the cuvette and the second nozzle dispenses detergent into the
cuvette. The next five stages have CRU Wash Probes, each having two nozzles -
one nozzle is used to aspirates the waste from cuvette, and the second probe
dispenses de-ionized water. The seventh probe only aspirates the water that was
dispensed in the sixth stage, and the eighth stage is for drying the bottom of the
cuvettes - bears a Porous Teflon Drier Chip. See figure below.
All probes are spring loaded, and they go right down and slightly
touch the cuvette bottom.
12-4
12.4. Hydraulic Diagram
12-5
FINIAL
LEVEL Sr.No. DESCRIPTION QTY
CODE
1 1.0 INLET and OUTLETS
Panel Mount Connector, 1/4-28 UNF to 200 series Barbs,
1 1.0.1 1.00 107881
1/8"(3mm) ID Tubing,; PMS230-1
1 1.0.2 NUT PANEL MOUNT 1/4-28 UNF WITH 7/16" HEX PMSN-X0 1.00 100884
1 1.0.3 RING COLOR CODED CCR5 1.00 100887
1 1.0.1 1.00 107881
1 1.0.1 1.00 107881
1 1.0.1 1.00 107881
1 1.0.1 1.00 107881
1 1.0.7 Ring Color Coded ; CCR1 (White) 1.00 201206
1 1.1 DI WATER CAN
1 1.2 ASP
1 1.3 RGT
1 1.4 WASTE CAN
1 1.5 BIO-HAZARDOUS WASTE CAN
1 1.6 DETERGENT CAN
2 2.0 CONTROL ELEMENTS_1
2 2.1 VALVE SHUT-OFF (HE-2-QS-6) FESTO MAKE 1.00 100574
3 3.0 PRIME MOVERS
CONNECTOR TEE WITH CLASSIC SERIES BARBS ; 5/32" (4
3 3.0.1 1.00 100873
MM) ID TUBING T40-1
Y Connector with 200 series Barbs 1/8” (3 mm) ID Tubing; Part
3 3.0.2 1.00 102644
No. Y230-1
3 3.1 PUMP KNF TYPE NF1 100 KPE 1.00 100831
3 3.1.1 ELBOW SWIVEL 1/8" BSPP FOR TUBE OD 6 MM PM090611E 1.00 100872
3 3.2 SPP SYRINGE
CLICK-N-SEAL NUT ; (PART NO. 008NC32-CS5B)/OMNI-LOK 112882/
3 3.2.1 1.00
INVERTED CONES; (PART NO. 008CZ19) 112884
3 3.2.2 1.00
3 3.3 R1PT SYRINGE
3 3.3.1 1.00
CLICK-N-SEAL NUT ; (PART NO. 008NC32-CS5R)/OMNI-LOK 112883/
3 3.3.2 1.00
3 3.4 R2PT SYRINGE
3 3.4.1 1.00
12-6
CLICK-N-SEAL NUT ; (PART NO. 008NC32-CS5R)/OMNI-LOK 112883/

3 3.4.2 1.00
PUMP KNF TYPE NF 30 KPDC FOR BIO-HAZARDOUS WASTE
3 3.5 1.00 100832
DISPOSAL
3 3.6 PUMP FOR DETERGENT TYPE - NF30 KP.27DC 24 DC 1.00 100895
3 3.7 PUMP VACUUM DOUBLE HEADED GD-6EA 1.00 100833
STRAIGHT ADAPTOR TUBE OD 5MM x 1/8" THREAD BSPT ; 114472
3 3.7.1 PART NO. PM010501E / STEM ELBOW TUBE OD 5MM x STEM 1.00 /
OD 5MM; PART NO. PM220505E 109790
OD 5MM; PART NO. PM220505E 109790
OD 5MM; PART NO. PM220505E 109790
OD 5MM; PART NO. PM220505E 109790
4 4.0 CONTROL ELEMENTS_2
4 4.0.1 1.00 100873
MM) ID TUBING T40-1
CONNECTOR STRAIGHT THRU REDUCTION WITH 500
4 4.0.10 SERIES BARBS 3/32"(2.25MM) AND 1/16"(1.5MM) ID TUBING ( 1.00 100874
PART NO :- N007/004-1)
CONNECTOR REDUCTION STRAIGHT THROUGH WITH 500
4 4.0.11 SERIES BARBS 1/8" (3 MM) and 1/16" (1.5 MM) ID TUBING 1.00 100865
N013/004-1
CONNECTOR STRAIGHT THRU REDUCTION WITH 500
4 4.0.12 SERIES BARBS 3/32"(2.25MM) AND 1/16"(1.5MM) ID TUBING ( 1.00 100874
PART NO :- N007/004-1)
CONNECTOR STRAIGHT THRU WITH BARBS 3MM ID TUBING
4 4.0.16 1.00 100368
( PART NO :- N430-1 )
4 4.0.17 CONNECTOR FOR DIGITAL PRESSURE SENSOR 1.00 114869
4 4.0.2 1.00 100873
MM) ID TUBING T40-1
CONNECTOR REDUCTION STRAIGHT THROUGH WITH
4 4.0.3 CLASSIC SERIES BARBS 5/32" (4 MM) and 1/16" (1.5 MM) ID 1.00 100866
TUBING 1040-1
CONNECTOR REDUCTION STRAIGHT THROUGH WITH
4 4.0.4 CLASSIC SERIES BARBS 5/32" (4 MM) and 1/16" (1.5 MM) ID 1.00 100866
TUBING 1040-1
CONNECTOR TEE REDUCTION WITH BARBS FOR 2.25MM
4 4.0.6 1.00 100876
AND 1.5MM ID TUBING ( PART NO :- T210/220-1 )
CONNECTOR TEE REDUCTION WITH BARBS FOR 2.25MM
4 4.0.7 1.00 100876
AND 1.5MM ID TUBING ( PART NO :- T210/220-1 )
4 4.0.8 Tee Connector with Classic Series Barbs, 1/8" (3 mm) ID Tubing 1.00 100868
4 4.0.9 Tee Connector with Classic Series Barbs, 1/8" (3 mm) ID Tubing 1.00 100868
4 4.1 DAMPER DIAPHRAGM PULSATION FPD1.1 1.00 100877
4 4.1.3 NOZZLE FOR PULSATION DAMPER WITH `O' RING 1.00 104800
4 4.1.4 NOZZLE FOR PULSATION DAMPER WITH `O' RING 1.00 104800
4 4.10 DIRECT OPERATED 2 PORT SOLENOID VALVE (VX212JBXB) 1.00 114001
12-7
4 4.10.1 MALE STUD ELBOW ( 3109 06 10-R 1/8 BSPT ) 1.00 100524
4 4.10.2 ELBOW FOR MALE STUD ( 3109 04 10-R 1/8 BSPT ) 1.00 100530

4 4.12 PRESSURE SENSOR AP-C33W DIGITAL DISPLAY 1.00 101978
1/16-27 NPT Thread with 5/16" Hex to 200 Series Barb, 1/8"(3
4 4.2.3 1.00 107621
mm) ID Tubing, Natural kynar PVDF; 16230-J1A
4 4.2.4 1.00 107621
Plug, 1/16-27 NPT threaded with 5/16" hex, natural kynar PVDF;
4 4.2.5 1.00 107622
1600 -J1A
4 4.2.6 1.00 107621
1/16-27 NPT Thread with 5/16" Hex to 200 Series Barb, 3/32"(2.25
4 4.2.7 1.00 108084
4 4.2.8 1.00 108084
4 4.2.9 1.00 108084
4 4.3 PRESSURE REGULATOR FDV30KPZ 1.00 100917
4 4.4 ROCKER SOLENOID VALVE 2/2 WAY-6126-A (139088) 1.00 108092
10-32 Special Tapered Thread with 1/4" Hex to 200 Series Barb
4 4.4.1 1.00 108103
1/16" (1.6mm) ID Tubing, Natural kynar PVDF; X210-J1A
10-32 Special Tapered Thread with 1/4” Hex to 200 Series Barb
4 4.4.2 1.00 107623
3/32” (2.25mm) ID Tubing, Natural kynar PVDF; X220-J1A
4 4.5.1 1.00 108103
4 4.5.2 1.00 107623
4 4.6.1 1.00 108103
4 4.6.2 1.00 107623
4 4.9.1 ELBOW FOR MALE STUD (3109 04 10-R 1/8 BSPT ) 1.00 100530
4 4.16 DEBUBBLER 1.00 112380
12-8
10-32 Special Tapered Thread with 1/4? Hex to 200 Series Barb
4 4.16.1 1.00 107623
3/32? (2.25mm) ID Tubing, Natural kynar PVDF; X220-J1A
4 4.16.2 1.00 107623
4 4.16.3 1.00 107623
5 5.0 END USE
5 5.2 LAMP ASSEMBLY
5 5.2.1 1.00 107623
5 5.2.2 1.00 107623
5 5.3 TROUGH UNITS
5 5.3.1 SPT TROUGH
5 5.3.1.1 1.00 107623
ELBOW THREAD 1/8-27 NPT with 7/16" HEX TO CLASSIC
5 5.3.1.2 1.00 100863
SERIES BARB 1/4" (6.25 mm) ID TUBING 1860-1
5 5.3.2 R2PT TROUGH
5 5.3.2.1 1.00 107623
1/8-27 NPT Thread with 7/16" Hex to Classic Series Barb, 1/4"
5 5.3.2.2 1.00 100863
(6.25 mm) ID Tubing
5 5.3.3 R1PT TROUGH
5 5.3.3.1 1.00 107623
5 5.3.3.2 1.00 100863
5 5.3.4 STIRRER 1 TROUGH
5 5.3.4.1 1.00 107623
5 5.3.4.2 1.00 100863
5 5.3.5 STIRRER 2 TROUGH
5 5.3.5.1 1.00 107623
5 5.3.5.2 1.00 100863
5 5.4 WASTE MANIFOLD
5 5.4.1 1.00 100863
ELBOW THREADED 3/8" NPT FOR 3/8" ID TUBING: ELDON
5 5.4.2 1.00 100869
JAMES L6-6 WN
5 5.4.3 1.00 100863
5 5.4.4 1.00 100863
5 5.4.5 1.00 100863
5 5.4.6 1.00 100863
1/8-27 NPT Thread Plug with 7/16" Hex, Natural Kynar PVDF;
5 5.4.7 1.00 109371
1800-J1A
12-9
ELBOW THREAD 1/8-27 NPT WITH 7/16" HEX TO 200 SERIES

5 5.4.8 1.00 100862
BARB 1/4" (6.25 mm) ID TUBING 18L260-1
5 5.5 CRU UNIT
5 5.5.1 CRU MANIFOLD_1
5 5.5.1.1 1.00 108103
CONNECTOR QUICK WITH SEALING RING "O-1/8" CK-1/8-PK-
5 5.5.1.2 1.00 100525
4-KU
5 5.5.1.3 1.00 108103
5 5.5.1.4 1.00 108103
5 5.5.1.5 1.00 108103
5 5.5.1.6 1.00 108103
5 5.5.2.1 1.00 108103
5 5.5.2.2 1.00 100525
4-KU
5 5.5.2.3 1.00 108103
5 5.5.2.4 1.00 108103
5 5.5.2.5 1.00 108103
5 5.5.2.6 1.00 108103
5 5.5.3.1 1.00 108103
5 5.5.3.2 1.00 100525
4-KU
5 5.5.3.3 1.00 108103
5 5.5.4 CRU DETERGENT PROBE ASSY.
5 5.5.5 CRU WASH PROBE ASSY.
5 5.5.9 CRU SUCTION PROBE ASSY
5 5.5.10 CRU DRIER PROBE ASSY
5 5.6 RCT CONTAINER
1/8-27 NPT Thread with 7/16" HEX TO CLASSIC SERIES BARB
5 5.6.1 1.00 100863
1/4" (6.25 mm) ID TUBING 1860-1
5 5.7 RGT CONTAINER
ELBOW THREAD 1/8-27 NPT WITH 7/16" HEX TO 200 SERIES
5 5.7.1 1.00 100862
BARB 1/4" (6.25 mm) ID TUBING 18L260-1
5 5.8 RGT CONTAINER
5 5.8.1 CONNECTOR MALE KQ2S06-U01 1.00 108704
12-10
13. Maintenance
It is recommended that the analyzer be maintained by the user with proper
instructions from the service personal to get the optimum output and to avoid any
possible damage to the analyzer.
Voltages present in the XL-640 can produce severe electrical
shocks. Place the analyzer and the computer in the OFF (0)
position and disconnect all line chords before attempting any
maintenance procedure.
Do not perform any maintenance procedure other than those

described in this manual.
Electrostatic sensitive components present on the PC boards in

the XL-640 require you to ground yourself even when the
Analyzer is in the OFF (0) position, otherwise damage to the
Analyzer electro-sensitive components and PC boards can occur.
13.1. Preventive Maintenance

13.1.1. Servicing at Customer Site
13.1.1.1. Verifying Proper Room Temperature
Measure the room temperature at different corners of the Laboratory, the
recommended temperature is 15 to 30 °C.
There should not be variations of more than 5 °C in the room temperature per
hour.
13.1.1.2. Proper Line Voltage

With the help of a voltmeter measure the following AC Voltages to the instrument.
Test Points Expected Voltage
Phase and Neutral 220 Volts or 110 Volts, 50/60Hz
Phase and Ground 220 Volts or 110 Volts, 50/60 Hz
Neutral and Ground Not more than 3 Volts
13-1
13.1.1.3. Verifying Proper Grounding

Place the Analyzer and the computer in the OFF (0) position and
disconnect all line chords. With the help of a Digital Multi-meter in
Resistance mode / Ohm meter measure the continuity between all
the ground points as mentioned below.
Place one end of the probe on the AC input ground terminal of the analyzer and
the other on the upper chassis of the instrument it should ideally be zero ohms,
repeat the same for the lower half of the instrument.
13.1.1.4. Verifying proper Ventilation

Make sure that there is at least 0.5 meters of space around the Analyzer on all
sides, to enable proper ventilation. There should not be any Stationary items or
objects in the vicinity that hinder proper access to the analyzer. There should not
be a direct air from the air conditioning system on to the analyzer.
13.1.1.5. Verifying External Interferences

Heavy-duty electrical devices like Air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens, centrifuges
etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines as the Analyzer or in the
close vicinity of the analyzer. The room should be free of any vibrations from
heavy-duty devices like Centrifuges and Compressors. The room should be free
from strong magnetic fields caused by other medical equipment, like CT Scans,
MRI etc. Mobiles phones should not be used very close to the analyzer.
13.1.1.6. Verifying proper Room Lighting

There should be sufficient room lighting to enable efficient operator use and clear
visible access to the internal components of the instrument during servicing.
13.1.1.7. Verifying proper Laboratory cleanliness (Practice)

The instrument and the surrounding area should be maintained clean and regularly
decontaminated to prevent contaminating yourself and others. There should be no
spillage of Serum, Reagents, Waste or de-ionized water. Make sure that no
Reagents or Samples are placed on top of the analyzer or trolley as they could
spill causing a permanent damage to the analyzer.
13.1.1.8. Verifying cleanliness of Interrupter plate (Practice)

The interrupter plate should be clean and free of dust/dirt. If necessary, the
interrupter plate of all assemblies should be cleaned with the help of brush
quarterly, to remove the dust/dirt.
13-2
13.1.1.9. Procedure to remove air bubbles from syringe
Bubble
present in
syringe
Kit for
removal of
bubbles
1. Fill the syringe supplied in kit with saline.
13-3
Before performing this task, use tissue papers to cover assemblies

located bellow syringe to avoid spillage of water.
2. Remove front connector (Inlet water port) of syringe.
3. Connect the connector of syringe filed with saline to the open port of syringe
from analyzer.
13-4
4. Inject saline water in the syringe with gentle pressure and check whether
the air bubble is being ejected out of syringe.
5. Aspirate water from syringe from analyzer and check for existence of air
bubble in syringe.
6. Repeat the injection & aspiration steps without removing the external
syringe port connection, until the air bubble is ejected out from syringe.
13-5
7. To eliminate very tiny bubbles, gently tap the syringe head while saline
injection is in process, so that the bubbles are released
8. Once the bubbles are removed then, follow the bellow process to re-
connect the front port inlet connector in place of external syringe connector.
9. Dismantle top connector of syringe.
10. Ensure that the thumb is placed on outlet port before dismantling external
syringe kit connector till the regular syringe front inlet connector is refitted
back to its position. This is required in order to avoid air getting trapped in
syringe
13-6
11. Dismantle external syringe connector.
12. Reconnect front port connector.
13. Reconnect the outlet connector back
13-7
14. Start the internal cleaning valve of probe & observe the clear view of syringe
head.
13.1.1.10. Maintaining an Error Log Book Service Technician

Maintain a log book at the customer site for every visit and error reported with the
date should be entered and make sure that this book is updated after performing
the maintenance.
13-8
13.2. Maintenance Intervals

13.2.1. Daily Maintenance
Start of the day procedure
Serial Number Description
1 Fill the de-ionized water can.
2 Fill the cleaning solution can.
3 Clean the probes tips and stirrer paddles with alcohol.
4 Switch on the machine and perform prime (minimum 2 minutes).
5 Perform the sample probe wash.
6 Perform the reagent probe wash.
7 Replace the printer paper if necessary.
8 Perform the cuvette rinse, and verify cuvette blanks (observe after 30
minutes warm-up).
9 Perform the photometer check and verify that the auto span check has
passed successfully. (Observe after 30 minutes warm-up).
10 Verify the reagent tray and reaction tray temperature.
11 Replenish or replace the reagents if necessary.
12 Check CAL A solution level and the replace bottle if necessary.
13 Perform the purge and calibrate operations for ISE.
End of the day Procedure

1 Remove and discard all sample / standard and controls cups or tubes
from the sample tray.
2 Perform the water save.
3 Take a backup of all patient reports.
4 Turn off the main switch located on the front of the (in case ISE and if
reagent cooling required, leave rear switch on) analyzer
5 Empty the waste and bio-hazardous waste cans.
6 Clean analyzer external surface, in contact with serum, reagents etc.
13.2.2. Weekly Maintenance

1 Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
2 Clean the cleaning solution can.
3 In case of ISE unit, ensure that there is enough CAL A and CAL B
solution, and replace if required.
4 Clean the stirrer paddles and laundry probes with alcohol.
5 Check the sample, reagent 1, and reagent 2 syringes and surrounding
tubes.
6 Clean the computer, trolley, monitor, keyboard and printer external
13-9
surface.
7 Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item.
(Maintain proper room cleanliness).
8 Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 probes.
9 Clean the stirrer paddles.
10 Clean the laundry probes.
11 Clean the sample tray.
12 Clean the reagent tray.
13 Perform an auto span check and note down the gain values for all the
wavelengths.
14 Perform a cuvette rinse and check cuvette blanks.
15 Perform a precision check and note down the %CV for an end point and
kinetic test.
16 Clean the window glass piece of RGT barcode section
13.2.3. Quarterly Maintenance

1 Clean the waste can.
2 Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
5 Clean the level sensing platform.
6 In case of ISE unit, ensure that there is enough CAL A and CAL B
solution, and replace if required.
7 Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
8 Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item
(maintain proper room cleanliness).
14 Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe.
15 Clean the fans.
16 Clean the bar code readers.
17 Clean the interrupter plate of all assemblies with the help of brush
18 Perform the auto span check and note down the gain values for all the
wavelengths.
19 Perform a cuvette rinse.
kinetic test.
21 Replace the lamp, 10 micron filter, drier chip.
22 Clean the internal surface free of dust.
13-10
wavelengths.
24 Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground,
ventilation, external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory
cleanliness practice. See section 5.3. Site Requirements for more details
25 Make a detailed entry in the error log book, of the maintenance carried
out and site verifications.
13.2.4. Annual Maintenance

1 Clean the waste can.
2 Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
5 Clean the level sensing platform.
6 In case of ISE unit, ensure enough CAL A and CAL B solution, and
replace if required.
7 Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
8 Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item
(maintain proper room cleanliness).
14 Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringe.
15 Clean the fans.
16 Clean the bar code readers.
17 Perform the auto span check and note down the gain values for all the
wavelengths.
18 Perform a cuvette rinse.
kinetic test.
20 Replace the lamp, 10 micron filter, drier chip.
21 Clean the internal surface free of dust.
wavelengths.
23 Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground,
ventilation, external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory
cleanliness practice. See section 5.3. Site Requirements for more details
24 Make a detailed entry in the error log book, of the maintenance carried
out and site verifications.
13-11
13.2.5. Service Technician Quarterly Maintenance Log

Name of the customer: Month from:__________ to ________
______________________________________ Model: XL-640______Serial no:_____
Name of the operator/service technician:
___________________________
First Second Third Quarter Fourth
Description
Quarter Quarter Quarter
Clean the waste can.
Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
Clean the cleaning solution can.
Clean the level sensing platform.
Check the levels of CAL A solution and
replace if required.
Clean the external surface.
Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard
and printer external surface.
Clean the area around the analyzer, and
discard any unwanted item (maintain
proper room cleanliness).
Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent
2 probes.
Clean the stirrer paddles.
Clean the laundry probes.
Clean the sample transport.
Clean the reagent transport.
Clean the sample, reagent 1 and reagent
2 syringe.
Clean the fans.
Clean the bar code reader.
Perform the auto span check and note
down the gain values for 340 wavelength.
Perform a cuvette rinse.
Perform a precision check and note down
the %CV for an end point and kinetic test.
Carry out site verification for temperature,
line voltage, electrical ground, ventilation,
external interferences, room lighting, and
laboratory cleanliness practice. See
section 13.1.1 Servicing at Customer Site.
Make a detailed entry in the error log
book, of the maintenance carried out and
site verifications.
13-12
13.2.6. Service Technician Annual Maintenance Log

Name of the customer: Month from:__________ to ________
______________________________________ Model: XL-640______Serial no:_____
Name of the operator/service technician:
___________________________
Annual Maintenance
Clean the waste can.
Clean the bio-hazardous waste can.
Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
Clean the cleaning solution can.
Clean the level sensing platform.
Replace the external tubing to the waste, bio hazardous waste, cleaning solution and de-
ionized water cans.
Check the levels of CAL A solution replace if required.
Clean the external surface.
Clean the computer, trolley, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
Clean the area around the, discard any unwanted item (Maintain proper room
cleanliness).
Check and replace the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 probes if necessary.
Check and replace the stirrer paddles if necessary.
Replace the laundry probes (if required).
Replace the laundry tubing (aspiration and dispensing).
Clean the sample transport
Clean the reagent transport.
Check and replace the sample, reagent 1 and reagent 2 syringes if necessary.
Clean the fans.
Clean the bar code reader.
Replace the lamp, 10 micron filter, drier chip
Replace the all ISE electrodes and perform the ISE clean and rinse cycle.
Replace the ISE pump cassettes.
Clean the internal surface free of dust
Perform an auto span check and note down the gain values for 340 wavelength.
Perform a cuvette rinse.
Perform a precision check and note down the %CV for an end point and kinetic test.
Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground, ventilation,
external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory cleanliness practice. See section
13.1.1 Servicing at Customer Site.
Make a detailed entry in the error log book, of the maintenance carried out and site
verifications.
13-13
13.2.7. Replacement Schedule for Spares and Consumable

(For Sapphire & ITO Syringe)
Serial Spares/Consumables 3 Months 6 Months 9 Months 12 Months
Number
1 Sample Probe * 
2 R1PT probe 
3 R2PT probe 
4 Stirrer paddles  
5 CRU drier chip    
6 Laundry dispense tubing 
7 Laundry aspiration tubing  
8 Laundry probe assembly 
9 Photometer lamp assembly    
10 Sample syringe plunger  
with Teflon tip (100 µl)
11 Sample syringe assembly 
(100 µl)
12 Reagent 1 and 2 syringe 
(500 µl) Teflon tip
13 DI water 10 micron filter    
13.3. Actions Taken in the Event of Trouble

When any abnormal conditions are found in the analyzer, the operator is requested
to check the following items:
1. Preparation and preservation methods of reagents.
2. Preparation and preservation methods of sample.
3. Operational procedures of the analyzer and maintenance work.
When such an abnormal condition is considered to be caused by an electrical or
mechanical failure, do not try to carry out the inspection of the analyzer by your
own and call for service at our customer service department.
13.3.1. Information Requested by Our Customer Service

Department
When any technical service will be called for at our customer service department,
the following information is requested to be prepared.
1. Trouble in assembly.
a. Serial number of analyzer in use.
b. Method code in question.
c. Explanation of encountered trouble.
13-14
d. Serial number and lot number of reagent, calibrator and QC sample in

use.
e. A few calibration results that were carried out recently.
f. A few measurement results of QC sample, that were carried out
recently.
g. Measurement results.
2. Trouble in analyzer.
a. Serial number of analyzer in use;
b. Software version numbers in use (PC, Mechanical and Sub-CPU).
c. Explanation of the relevant alarm and problem, and any other
information about the analyzer in use and maintenance.
13.3.2. Malfunction at the Time of Operation

If the analyzer cannot be activated, follow the procedures shown below:
1. Check that the main switch located on the back side of the analyzer is at
"ON" position.
2. Check that the main fuses are not burnt.
3. When the main fuses are checked, turn the main switch off without fail and
then pull out the plug of power supply cable from its receptacle on the
analyzer. Open up the fuse cover and pull the fuses out.
4. Check that the circuit breaker of the power supply system to which the
analyzer is connected is not cut off.
13.3.3. Anomalous Measurement Results

There may be two cases that the analytical errors are noticed, i.e., by error flag or
unexpected results. In the following cases, troubleshooting is requested.
1. Error flag is set to the calibration results.
2. Error flag is set to the measurement results of QC sample or normal
sample.
3. The measurement results of QC sample are out of range of judgment
criteria. Investigate which situation shown below is applicable to the error in
the measurement results of calibration, QC sample or normal sample.
Based on the investigation, further check may be requested.
4. The resultant values obtained from measurements of a specific method are
high for all samples.
5. The resultant values obtained from measurements of a specific method are
low for all samples.
13-15
6. Erroneous results are randomly derived from the measurement.

7. Two or more anomalous measurement results are observed:
a. From all methods,
b. Or randomly.
13.3.4. Check for Preparation of Reagent, Calibrator or QC

Sample
Perform the following checks in order to track down the cause for high, low or
random resultant measurement results. When a reagent, calibrator or QC sample
is prepared, read the respective statement of virtues carefully and follow its
instruction.
1. Preparation of reagent
a. Was there any change of the reagent?
b. Is the term of validity of the prepared reagent still valid?
c. Was the reagent prepared according to the correct procedures?
d. Was the reagent prepared using fresh, non-bacteria contaminated and
de- ionized water or appropriate diluent?
2. Preparation of QC sample.
a. Was the volume used for preparation correct?
b. Does the sample have been preserved as recommended?
c. Is the term of validity of the sample still valid?
d. Was the sample prepared using a pipette calibrated in terms of volume?
e. Is the term of validity of the sample lot still valid?
f. Was the sample prepared using appropriate diluent?
3. Preparation of calibrator.
a. Was there any change of the lot number?
b. Was the calibrator prepared using volume correctly?
c. Does the calibrator have been preserved as recommended?
d. Is the term of validity of the calibrator still valid?
e. Was the calibrator prepared using a pipette calibrated in terms of
volume?
f. Was the calibrator prepared using appropriate diluent?
The further checks are requested to track down the cause referring to the following
lists after the above checks have been completed.
13-16
13.3.5. High Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all

Samples
Serial Number Cause Corrective action
1 Incorrect calibration results.  Check the preparation of the
calibrator.
 Check that the calibration
settings are correct.
 The calibration is performed
again if necessary.
2 Too high inside temperature of RCT  Check the temperature shown
unit. in the Service Check >
Temperature > Read.
 Call for service at our
customer service department
when the indicated
temperature deviates from the
specified value of 37 ± 0.2ºC.
3 Improper preparation of reagent. Check the preparation of the
reagent.
4 Improper preparation of calibrator. Check the preparation of the
calibrator.
13.3.6. Low Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all

Samples
1 Expiration of the term of validity of  See the statement of virtues
reagent. that comes together with
 The reagent kit for its stability.
2 Improper preparation of reagent.  Check the preparation of the
reagent.
3 Improper preservation of reagent. See the statement of virtues that
comes together with the reagent
kit for its proper preservation
method.
4 Too low inside temperature of RCT  Check the temperature
unit. Service Check > Temperature
> Read.
 Call for service at our
customer service department
when the indicated
temperature deviates from the
specified value of 37 ± 0.2ºC.
5 Improper preparation of calibrator. Check the preparation of the
calibrator.
6 Excessive volume of reagent Check if there is any leakage or
dispensed. drip at junction of reagent
sampling system.
13-17
13.3.7. Randomly Derived Erroneous Measurement Results

1 Fibrin clots formed on specific sample Clean the SPT nozzle.
tube or sample cup.
2 Insufficient water or solution supply Check if the tip of water or
from respective external tank. solution tube is positioned below
the water or solution level. Call for
service at our customer service
department in case of trouble.
3 Insufficient stirring. Check if the stirrer rotates in the
center of cuvette and at the
correct speed.
13.3.8. Anomalous Resultant Values from all Methods for a

Sample
1 Improper preparation of reagent. Prepare newly the reagent
referring to the statement of
virtues that comes together with
the reagent kit.
2 Expiration of term of validity, Prepare newly the reagent
contamination or paleness of reagent. referring to the statement of
virtues that comes together with
the reagent kit.
13.3.9. Equipment Malfunction

It may be difficult for the user to deal with the problem, the troubleshooting of
which is beyond this limited extent. In such a case, call for service at our customer
service department.
13.3.9.1. Detection of mechanical problem

All the mechanical movements are controlled and monitored by the computer.
When a problem arises, the computer becomes aware of it and generates the
visual error message to call the operator's attention.
In the event of the problem that may affect the performance of the analyzer, the
sampling stop or emergency stop will be executed. In the case of sampling stop
mode, the analyzer carries on and completes the processing of the sample that is
not affected by the problem. In the case of problem that may affect the entire
measurements of sample, the emergency stop will be executed.
Error recovery is an ability of software or equipment in which the errors will be
automatically recovered without affecting the sample run. During run, when the
error is encountered, system will first identify whether the current error falls under
error recovery category or not. If yes, then the system will initiate the recovery for
that particular error, without run pause. The test affected due to this error shall be
moved to pending and auto rescheduled (if Auto Resch option is selected). In
case, if error is not recovered, then depending upon the severity of the error the
13-18
run will be stopped or paused. Possible errors which come under auto error
recovery category are listed in section 13.3.9.3 Error Log for more details.
The Report > Error Log screen can be used to view all the errors occurred on the
analyzer during the test run or service check. This data is generally useful for
servicing/diagnostic purposes.
Remedial actions for all error conditions are given below in section 13.3.9.2 Error
Messages for each unit.
When user clicks on Start Run button on Status Monitor, if any
error is detected during initialization of the instrument or during
run, then the error message will be displayed in the error grid on
the Screen. In such case, the instruments will stop. The user has
to take the corrective action.
Problem may arise, which is not monitored by the computer. Any alarm message
may not be indicated on the display for such a problem. Such a problem includes
abrasion of parts, leakage in the sampling system, etc. When this type of problem
occurs, decide whether the processing of sample is carried on or the measurement
is terminated, considering that such problem may result in damage to the analyzer
or erroneous outcome of measurements.
13-19
13.3.9.2. Error messages for each unit

ASSEMBLY ERROR FLAGS ERROR POSSIBLE FAILURES ACTION TO BE AUTO ERROR
CODE MESSAGE TAKEN RECOVERY
AND
RESCHEDULE
?
STIRRER 1 A1 @STR1 STIRRER1  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
UP/DOWN OPTO/ HOME THE
ERROR OPTO/ ANALYZER.
DURING DIRECTION MOVE THE
INITIALIZA OPTO STIRRER 1
TION UP AND
 MOTOR
DOWN
DRIVER CARD
MANUALLY
AND ITS
CONNECTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
 STEPPER NOTHING IS
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
 RCT NG THE
ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T, GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
A2 @STR1 STIRRER1  HOME OPTO/  SWITCH OFF NO
ROTATION DIRECTION THE
AL ERROR OPTO ANALYZER.
DURING MOVE THE
 MOTOR
INITIALIZA STIRRER 1
DRIVER CARD
TION IN
AND ITS
CONNECTOR ROTATIONA
L PATH
 STEPPER MANUALLY
MOTOR AND MAKE
(ROTATIONAL SURE THAT
) NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T, GO TO
SERVICE
13-20
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE ARM
ROTATION
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
A3 @STR1 STIRRER1  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
UP/DOWN OPTO THE
ERROR ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
DURING DRIVER CARD MOVE THE
RUN STIRRER 1
AND ITS
CONNECTOR UP AND
DOWN
MOTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE UP AND
DOWN
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
A4 @STR1 STIRRER1  HOME OPTO/  SWITCH OFF YES
DURING MOVE THE
 MOTOR
RUN STIRRER 1
DRIVER CARD
IN
AND ITS
13-21
CONNECTOR ROTATION
PATH
 STEPPER
MOTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
(ROTATIONAL
) SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE ARM
ROTATION
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
AF STIRRER 1  RCT  GIVE RCT NO
INTERLOC ALIGNMENT OFFSET
KED COMMAND
 RCT IS NOT
AT OFFSET AND TRY
THE SAME
CONDITION
ACTION
OR RCT
ALIGNMENT  IF THE
IS NOT PROBLEM
PROPER NOT
RESOLVED,
 STIRRER 1
UP/DOWN CALL
SERVICE
STEPPER
ENGINEER
MOTOR FAIL
CF CRU  RCT TABLE IS  CHECK FOR NO
INTERLOC NOT IN AN RCT_STOP_
KED EXACT OPTO
POSITION STATUS.
FOR CRU TO  RCT MAY
GO DOWN
HAVE BEEN
(DETECTED
MISALIGNED
BY DUE TO
RCT_STOP_O
SOME
PTO STATUS)
OTHER
ASSEMBLY
INTERLOCK
CAUSING
THIS
ERROR.
STIRRER 2 B1 @STR2 STIRRER2  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
INITIALIZA OPTO STIRRER 2
TION UP AND
 MOTOR
DOWN
13-22
DRIVER CARD MANUALLY

AND ITS AND MAKE
CONNECTOR SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
 STEPPER
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
 RCT MOVEMENT
ALIGNMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
B2 @STR2 STIRRER2  HOME OPTO/  SWITCH OFF NO
DURING  MOTOR MOVE THE
INITIALIZA STIRRER 2
DRIVER CARD
TION IN
AND ITS
CONNECTOR ROTATIONA
L PATH
MOTOR AND MAKE
) NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
ROTATIONA
L
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
ROTATION.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
B3 @STR2 STIRRER2  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
UP/DOWN OPTO THE
13-23
ERROR  MOTOR ANALYZER.

DURING DRIVER CARD MOVE THE
INITIALIZA AND ITS STIRRER 2
TION CONNECTOR UP AND
DOWN
MOTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE.
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS.
B4 @STR2 STIRRER2  HOME OPTO/  SWITCH OFF YES
MOVE THE
 MOTOR
STIRRER 2
DRIVER CARD
AND ITS IN
CONNECTOR ROTATION
PATH
MOTOR AND MAKE
) NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
STR2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
ROTATIONA
L
COMMANDS
13-24
TO CHECK
THE
ROTATION.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
BF STIRRER 2  RCT  GIVE RCT NO
INTERLOC ALIGNMENT OFFSET
KED COMMAND
 RCT IS NOT
AT OFFSET AND TRY
THE SAME
CONDITION
ACTION
OR RCT
ALIGNMENT  IF THE
IS NOT PROBLEM
PROPER NOT
RESOLVED,
 STIRRER 2
UP/DOWN CALL
SERVICE
STEPPER
ENGINEER
MOTOR FAIL
CRU C1 @CRU CRU  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
UP/DOWN OPTO THE
MOVEMEN ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
T ERROR MOVE THE
DRIVER CARD
DURING AND ITS CRU UP AND
INITIALIZA CONNECTOR DOWN
TION MANUALLY
 STEPPER AND MAKE
MOTOR SURE THAT
 CRU NOTHING IS
ALIGNMENT OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
C2 @CRU CRU  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
UP/DOWN OPTO THE
ERROR  MOTOR ANALYZER.
DURING MOVE THE
DRIVER CARD
RUN CRU UP AND
AND ITS
CONNECTOR DOWN
MANUALLY
MOTOR SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
13-25
 CRU OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
C5 CRU  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
INITIALIZE OPTO THE
ERROR ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
MOVE THE
DRIVER CARD
AND ITS CRU UP AND
CONNECTOR DOWN
MANUALLY
MOTOR SURE THAT
 CRU NOTHING IS
ALIGNMENT OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
13-26
RCT E1 @RCT RCT  STOP OPTO/  SWITCH OFF NO

ROTATION BASE OPTO THE
AL ERROR  MOTOR ANALYZER.
DURING ROTATE
DRIVER CARD
INITIALIZA RCT
AND ITS
TION CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
 STEPPER SURE THAT
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
ASSEMBLIES CHECK, IN
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
E2 @RCT RCT  STOP OPTO/  SWITCH OFF NO
AL ERROR ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
DURING DRIVER CARD ROTATE
RUN RCT
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
13-27
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
E3 RCT  STOP OPTO/  SWITCH OFF NO
INTERLOC ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
KED DUE ROTATE
DRIVER CARD
TO R2 AND ITS RCT
ARM MANUALLY
CONNECTOR
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
INTERLOC  MOTOR ANALYZER.
KED DUE ROTATE
DRIVER CARD
TO CRU RCT
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
13-28
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
INTERLOC ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
KED DUE ROTATE
DRIVER CARD
TO AND ITS RCT
SAMPLE CONNECTOR MANUALLY
ARM AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
INTERLOC  MOTOR ANALYZER.
KED DUE ROTATE
DRIVER CARD
TO R1 RCT
AND ITS
ARM CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
13-29
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
INTERLOC ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
KED DUE DRIVER CARD ROTATE
TO RCT
AND ITS
STIRRER 1 MANUALLY
CONNECTOR
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
INTERLOC ANALYZER.
 MOTOR
KED DUE ROTATE
DRIVER CARD
TO AND ITS RCT
STIRRER 2 MANUALLY
CONNECTOR
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
 RCT OBSTRUCTI
ALIGNMENT NG THE
MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK
EFFECT DUE  THEN
TO SWITCH ON
MALFUNCTIO THE
NING OF INSTRUMEN
OTHER T; GO TO
RELATED SERVICE
THE CRU
UNIT
13-30
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE
ROTATE
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE
FOR RCT.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
MISCELLAN F1 INSUFFICI  DI WATER  CHECK THE NO
EOUS ENT DI LEVEL DI WATER
WATER LEVEL
 SENSOR
OUTPUT OF  CHECK THE
LOAD LEVEL SENSOR
SENSING OUTPUT OF
PLATFORM LOAD LEVEL
SENSING
PLATFORM
H1 CHECK  MALFUNCTIO  CHECK THE NO
WATER NING OF PRESSURE
PRESSUR PRESSURE UNIT FOR
E UNIT ANY
LEAKAGE
 LEAKAGE/BLO
OR
CKAGE IN
PRESSURE BLOCKAGE
TUBING IN THE
TUBING
K1 RGT  REAGENT  CHECK THE NO
COVER COVER PLACEMENT
SWITCH PLACEMENT OF
CLOSED/O  THE LOGIC REAGENT
PEN COVER
LEVELS AT
THE  CHECK THE
BASEBOARD LOGIC
CONNECTOR LEVELS AT
S THE BASE
BOARD
 CONNECTOR
CONNECTION CONNECTO
S RS/CONNEC
TOR
CONNECTIO
NS AND
VERIFY FOR
PROPER
FUNCTIONA
LITY.
13-31
1B/1C -- R1PT  WHEN  NA IF SAME

BOTTLE VOLUME OF REAGENT IS
OVER AT THE R1 PRESENT IN
POS. REAGENT THE NEXT
REACHES AVAILABLE
NEAR DEAD POSITION,
VOLUME THEN THE
ASSOCIATED
TESTS GET
AUTO
RESCHEDULE
D ELSE IT
WILL MOVE
TO PENDING
LIST. IT CAN
RESCHEDULE
D USING
REFRESH
POSITION
BUTTON.
4B/4C -- R2PT  WHEN  NA NO
BOTTLE VOLUME OF
OVER AT THE R2
POS. REAGENT
REACHES
NEAR DEAD
VOLUME
LLD LIQUID  ACTUAL  PHYSICALLY YES

LEVEL LIQUID CHECK THE
FOUND LEVEL/VOLUM LIQUID IN
DIFFEREN E MAY BE THE
T AT POS. DIFFERENT REAGENT
FROM THE BOTTLE
PREVIOUS
LIQUID
LEVEL/VOLUM
E
C* CAL** RESULT  THE RESULT  NA NO
WITH UN- OF THE TEST
CALIBRAT IF
ED CALCULATED
REAGENT WITH THE
AVAILABLE
CALIBRATION,
SUCH
RESULTS
WILL BE
FLAGGED AS
CAL**
77 CD CLOT  SAMPLE  CHECK THE NO
DETECTED CONDITION IS CONDITION
AT POS. NOT OK OF THE
ACTUAL
 BLOCKAGE IN
PROBE DUE SAMPLE. IF
SAMPLE IS
TO OBSTACLE
FOUND OK
OR ACTUAL
SAMPLE THEN
CLOT. CHECK FOR
PROBE
BLOCKAGE.
IF PROBE IS
FOUND
BLOCKED,
THEN
CLEAN THE
PROBE.
 IF SAMPLE
FOUND NOT
13-32
OK, THEN
CHANGE
THE
SAMPLE.
R1 ARM 11 @R1 R1PT ARM  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
UP /DOWN OPTO/ HOME THE
INITIALIZA OPTO R1 ARM UP
TION AND DOWN
 MOTOR
MANUALLY
DRIVER CARD
AND ITS AND MAKE
CONNECTOR SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
 STEPPER OBSTRUCTI
MOTOR NG THE
(UP/DOWN) MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
. 12 @R1 R1PT ARM  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
ROTATION OPTO/HOME THE
AL ERROR OPTO/DIRECT ANALYZER.
DURING ION OPTO MOVE THE
INITIALIZA  MOTOR R1 ARM IN
TION ROTATION
DRIVER CARD
PATH
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
(ROTATIONAL OBSTRUCTI
) NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
13-33
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
THE R1
ROTATION
COMMANDS.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
13 @R1 R1PT ARM  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
RUN OPTO R1 ARM UP
AND DOWN
 MOTOR
AND MAKE
AND ITS
CONNECTOR SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
MOTOR NG THE
(UP/DOWN) MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
14 @R1 R1PT ARM  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
ROTATION OPTO/ HOME THE
AL ERROR OPTO/ ANALYZER.
RUN OPTO R1 ARM IN
ROTATION
 MOTOR
DRIVER CARD PATH
MANUALLY
AND ITS
CONNECTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
(ROTATIONAL NG THE
) MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
13-34
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
THE R1
ROTATION
COMMANDS.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
15 !R1 R1 ARM  THE  SWITCH OFF IF SAME
VOD CONNECTOR THE REAGENT IS
ERROR AT S ANALYZER. PRESENT IN
POS MOVE THE THE NEXT
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR R1 ARM UP AVAILABLE
AND DOWN POSITION,
 PLACEMENT MANUALLY THEN THE
OF REAGENT AND MAKE ASSOCIATED
BOTTLES SURE THAT TESTS GET
 REAGENT 1 NOTHING IS AUTO
ARM OBSTRUCTI RESCHEDULE
POSITION IN NG THE D ELSE IT
CUVETTE MOVEMENT WILL MOVE
TO PENDING
 REAGENT 1  THEN
LIST. IT
ARM SWITCH ON
CANRESCHE
POSITION IN THE
DULED USING
TROUGH INSTRUMEN
REFRESH
T; GO TO
POSITION
SERVICE
BUTTON.
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
15 !D VOD  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
ERROR AT CONNECTOR THE
DILUENT S ANALYZER.
POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
R1 ARM UP
13-35
SENSOR AND DOWN

MANUALLY
 PLACEMENT
OF REAGENT AND MAKE
BOTTLES SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
 REAGENT 1 OBSTRUCTI
ARM NG THE
POSITION IN MOVEMENT
CUVETTE
 THEN
 REAGENT 1 SWITCH ON
ARM THE
POSITION IN INSTRUMEN
TROUGH T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
16 D* DILUENT  NO DILUENT  SWITCH OFF NO
ABSENT BOTTLE IS THE
AT POS. PLACED IN ANALYZER.
REAGENT CHECK THE
TRAY REAGENT 1
LEVEL AND
 EMPTY
DILUENT ENSURE
BOTTLE THAT IT IS
ABOVE THE
 DILUENT SET DEAD
LEVEL IS VOLUME.
BELOW THE
SET DEAD
VOLUME
 LLS BOARD
PLACEMENT
OF DILUENT
BOTTLES
 REAGENT 1
ARM
POSITION IN
REAGENT
TRAY
16 R1* REAGENT  NO REAGENT  SWITCH OFF IF SAME
1 ABSENT 1 BOTTLE IS THE REAGENT IS
PRESENT IN
REAGENT CHECK THE THE NEXT
TRAY REAGENT 1
LEVEL AND AVAILABLE
 EMPTY POSITION,
ENSURE
13-36
REAGENT 1 THAT IT IS THEN THE

BOTTLE ABOVE THE ASSOCIATED
 REAGENT 1 SET DEAD
VOLUME. TESTS GET
LEVEL IS AUTO
BELOW THE
SET DEAD RESCHEDULE
VOLUME D ELSE IT
WILL MOVE
 LLS BOARD TO
PLACEMENT
OF REAGENT PENDING
BOTTLES LIST. IT CAN
 REAGENT 1 RESCHEDULE
ARM D USING
POSITION IN REFRESH
REAGENT POSITION
TRAY
BUTTON.
17 !R1 LLS AND  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
VOD CONNECTOR THE
ERROR AT S ANALYZER.
POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR R1 ARM UP
AND DOWN
 LLS BOARD MANUALLY
 PLACEMENT AND MAKE
OF REAGENT SURE THAT
BOTTLES NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
 REAGENT 1 NG THE
ARM MOVEMENT
POSITION IN
CUVETTE  THEN
SWITCH ON
 REAGENT 1 THE
ARM INSTRUMEN
POSITION IN T; GO TO
TROUGH SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
18 !R1 R1 ARM  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
VOD CONNECTOR THE
TROUGH MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR R1 ARM UP
AND DOWN
 PLACEMENT MANUALLY
OF REAGENT
13-37
BOTTLES AND MAKE

SURE THAT
 REAGENT 1
ARM NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
POSITION IN
CUVETTE NG THE
MOVEMENT
 REAGENT 1
ARM  THEN
SWITCH ON
POSITION IN
TROUGH THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
VOD CONNECTOR THE
RGT TRAY MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
POS. R1 ARM UP
SENSOR
AND DOWN
OF REAGENT AND MAKE
BOTTLES SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
13-38
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
19 !D VOD  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
ERROR AT CONNECTOR THE
DILUENT S ANALYZER.
POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR R1 ARM UP
AND DOWN
OF DILUENT AND MAKE
BOTTLES SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
1A !R1 R1 ARM  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
VOD CONNECTOR THE
RCT TRAY MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
(SAMPLIN SENSOR R1 ARM UP
G PAUSED AND DOWN
IF THREE  REAGENT 1 MANUALLY
CONSECU ARM AND MAKE
TIVE VOD POSITION IN SURE THAT
ERROR CUVETTE NOTHING IS
OCCURRE OBSTRUCTI
D) NG THE
13-39
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R1 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
R1 ARM 1B/1C -- R1PT-  LIQUID INSIDE  ADD NEW IF SAME
BOTTLE THE REAGENT REAGENT IS
OVER AT REAGENT BOTTLE, IF
POS. BOTTLE REQUIRED PRESENT IN
REACHED ITS NEXT
DEAD AVAILABLE
VOLUME
POSITION,
THEN
ASSOCIATED
TESTS WILL
GET
AUTO
RESCHEDULE
D
ELSE IT WILL
BE
MOVED TO
PENDING
LIST. IT
CAN BE
RESCHEDULE
D
USING
REFRESH
POSITION
BUTTON.
1F @R1 R1 ARM  R1PT POS1  INITIALIZE NO
INTERLOC OPTO RGT AND
KED SIGNALS RCT AND
 RGT/RCT TRY THE
SAME
TRAY IS
ACTION
13-40
ROTATING OR  SWITCH OFF

THEIR OPTOS AND
ARE GIVING SWITCH ON
FALSE THE
SIGNAL INSTRUMEN
 STEP TRAY T
AND STEP  IF STILL IT IS
ARM CARD GIVING
AND ITS ERROR,
CONNECTOR CALL
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
RGT 21 @RGT RGT  STOP  SWITCH OFF NO
ROTATION OPTO/BASE THE
DURING  MOTOR ROTATE
INITIALIZA RGT
DRIVER CARD
TION MANUALLY
AND ITS
CONNECTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
 RGT NG THE
ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT
 INTERLOCK  THEN
EFFECT DUE SWITCH ON
TO THE
MALFUNCTIO INSTRUMEN
NING OF T; GO TO
OTHER SERVICE
RELATED CHECK, IN
ASSEMBLIES THE
REAGENT
TRAY
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PRESS
ROTATE TO
CHECK THE
SEQUENCE
FOR
REAGENT
TRAY
COMMAND.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
22 @RGT RGT  STOP  SWITCH OFF NO
DURING  MOTOR ROTATE
RUN RGT
DRIVER CARD
MANUALLY
AND ITS
CONNECTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
 RGT NG THE
ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT
TO THE
13-41
NING OF T; GO TO
OTHER SERVICE
RELATED CHECK, IN
ASSEMBLIES THE
REAGENT
TRAY
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PRESS
ROTATE TO
CHECK THE
SEQUENCE
FOR
REAGENT
TRAY
COMMAND.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
R1 31 @R1 R1  R1 SYRINGE  SWITCH OFF YES
SYRINGE SYRINGE CONNECTOR THE
UP/DOWN S ANALYZER.
ERROR MOVE THE
 MOTOR
DURING R1 SYRINGE
DRIVER CARD
INITIALIZA AND ITS UP AND
TION DOWN
CONNECTOR
MANUALLY
 STEPPER AND
MOTOR ENSURE
 R1 SYRINGE THAT
OPTO NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT.
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE
SYRINGE
FRAME.
CLICK ON
R1PT AND
THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
CHECK THE
SEQUENCE.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
32 @R1 R1  R1 SYRINGE  SWITCH OFF YES
SYRINGE CONNECTOR THE
UP/DOWN S ANALYZER.
ERROR  MOTOR MOVE THE
DURING R1 SYRINGE
DRIVER CARD
13-42
RUN AND ITS UP AND

CONNECTOR DOWN
MOTOR AND
ENSURE
 R1 SYRINGE THAT
OPTO NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT.
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE
SYRINGE
FRAME.
CLICK ON
R1PT AND
THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
CHECK THE
SEQUENCE.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
R2 ARM 41 @R2 R2PT  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
INITIALIZA OPTO R2 ARM UP
TION AND DOWN
 MOTOR
MANUALLY
DRIVER CARD
AND MAKE
AND ITS
CONNECTOR SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
MOTOR NG THE
(UP/DOWN) MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
13-43
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
42 @R2 R2PT  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
INITIALIZA R2 ARM IN
 MOTOR
TION ROTATION
DRIVER CARD
PATH
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
) NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
THE R2
ROTATION
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE ARM
ROTATION.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
43 @R2 R2 ARM  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
DIRECTION MOVE THE
OPTO R2 ARM UP
AND DOWN
 MOTOR
AND MAKE
AND ITS
CONNECTOR SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
MOTOR NG THE
(UP/DOWN) MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
13-44
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
44 @R2 R2 ARM  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
ION OPTO MOVE THE
 MOTOR R2 ARM IN
ROTATION
DRIVER CARD
PATH
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
) NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
THE R2
ROTATION
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE ARM
ROTATION.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO THE NEXT
SENSOR R2 ARM UP
AVAILABLE
AND DOWN POSITION,
THEN THE
OF REAGENT AND MAKE ASSOCIATED
2 BOTTLES SURE THAT
NOTHING IS TESTS GET
 REAGENT 2
OBSTRUCTI AUTO
ARM
POSITION IN NG THE RESCHEDULE
CUVETTE MOVEMENT D ELSE IT
13-45
 REAGENT 2  THEN WILL MOVE

ARM SWITCH ON TO PENDING
POSITION IN THE LIST. IT CAN
TROUGH INSTRUMEN RESCHEDULE
T; GO TO D USING
SERVICE REFRESH
CHECK POSITION
SCREEN, BUTTON
SELECT THE
R1 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R2 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
46 R2* REAGENT  NO REAGENT  SWITCH OFF IF SAME
2 ABSENT 2 BOTTLE IS THE REAGENT IS
PRESENT IN
REAGENT CHECK THE
THE NEXT
TRAY REAGENT 2 AVAILABLE
LEVEL AND
 EMPTY POSITION,
ENSURE
REAGENT 2 THEN THE
BOTTLE THAT IT IS ASSOCIATED
ABOVE THE
 REAGENT 2 SET DEAD TESTS GET
LEVEL IS VOLUME. AUTO
BELOW THE RESCHEDULE
SET DEAD D ELSE IT
VOLUME WILL MOVE
TO PENDING
 LLS BOARD
LIST. IT CAN
PLACEMENT
OF REAGENT RESCHEDULE
BOTTLES D USING
REFRESH
 REAGENT 2
POSITION
ARM
BUTTON.
POSITION IN
REAGENT
TRAY
47 !R2 LLS AND  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
VOD CONNECTOR THE
POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR R2 ARM UP
AND DOWN
 LLS BOARD MANUALLY
 PLACEMENT AND MAKE
OF REAGENT SURE THAT
BOTTLES NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
 REAGENT 2 NG THE
ARM MOVEMENT
POSITION IN
CUVETTE  THEN
13-46
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R2 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R2 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
VOD CONNECTOR THE
TROUGH MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR R2 ARM UP
AND DOWN
OF REAGENT AND MAKE
BOTTLES SURE THAT
 REAGENT 2 NOTHING IS
ARM OBSTRUCTI
POSITION IN NG THE
CUVETTE MOVEMENT
 REAGENT 2  THEN
ARM SWITCH ON
POSITION IN THE
TROUGH INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R1 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R2 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
13-47
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
RGT POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO NEXT
SENSOR R2 ARM UP AVAILABLE
AND DOWN POSITION
OF REAGENT AND MAKE THEN
BOTTLES SURE THAT ASSOCIATED
NOTHING IS TESTS GET
OBSTRUCTI AUTO
NG THE
MOVEMENT RESCHEDULE
D ELSE IT
 THEN WILL MOVE
SWITCH ON TO PENDING
THE LIST. IT CAN
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO RESCHEDULE
SERVICE D USING
CHECK REFRESH
SCREEN, POSITION
SELECT THE BUTTON.
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R2 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R2 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
4A !R2 R2 ARM  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
VOD CONNECTOR THE
RCT(SAMP MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
LING SENSOR R2 ARM UP
PAUSED IF AND DOWN
THREE  REAGENT 2 MANUALLY
CONSECU ARM AND MAKE
TIVE VOD POSITION IN SURE THAT
ERROR CUVETTE NOTHING IS
OCCURRE OBSTRUCTI
D) NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
13-48
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
R2 ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
R2 PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND R2 ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
4B/4C -- R2PT-  LIQUID INSIDE  ADD NEW IF SAME
BOTTLE THE REAGENT REAGENT IS
OVER AT REAGENT BOTTLE, IF
POS BOTTLE REQUIRED. PRESENT IN
REACHED ITS NEXT
DEAD AVAILABLE
VOLUME
POSITION,
THEN
ASSOCIATED
TESTS WILL
GET
AUTO
RESCHEDULE
D
ELSE IT WILL
BE
MOVED TO
PENDING
LIST. IT
CAN BE
RESCHEDULE
D
USING
REFRESH
POSITION
BUTTON.
4F R2 ARM  R2PT POS1  INITIALIZE NO
INTERLOC OPTO RGT AND
KED SIGNALS RCT AND
TRY THE
 RGT/RCT
TRAY IS SAME
ACTION
ROTATING OR
THEIR OPTOS  SWITCH OFF
ARE GIVING AND
FALSE SWITCH ON
SIGNAL THE
INSTRUMEN
 STEP TRAY
T
AND STEP
13-49
ARM CARD  IF STILL IT IS

AND ITS GIVING
CONNECTOR ERROR,
S CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER
R2 61 @R2 R2  R2 SYRINGE  SWITCH OFF YES
SYRINGE SYRINGE CONNECTOR THE
UP/DOWN S ANALYZER.
ERROR MOVE THE
 MOTOR
DURING R2 SYRINGE
DRIVER CARD
INITIALIZA AND ITS UP AND
TION DOWN
CONNECTOR
MANUALLY
 STEPPER AND
MOTOR ENSURE
 R2 SYRINGE THAT
OPTO NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT.
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE
SYRINGE
FRAME.
CLICK ON
R2PT AND
THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE UP AND
DOWN
COMMAND
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
62 @R2 R2  SYRINGE  SWITCH OFF YES
SYRINGE CONNECTOR THE
UP/DOWN S ANALYZER.
ERROR MOVE THE
 MOTOR
DURING R2 SYRINGE
DRIVER CARD
RUN UP AND
AND ITS
CONNECTOR DOWN
MANUALLY
 STEPPER AND
MOTOR ENSURE
 R2 SYRINGE THAT
OPTO NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT.
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
13-50
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE
SYRINGE
FRAME.
CLICK ON
R2PT AND
THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
USE UP AND
DOWN
COMMAND
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
SAMPLE 71 @S SPT  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
ARM UP/DOWN OPTO/HOME THE
ERROR OPTO/DIRECT ANALYZER.
INITIALIZA SAMPLE
 MOTOR
TION ARM UP AND
DRIVER CARD
AND ITS DOWN
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
(UP/DOWN) OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
72 @S SPT  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF NO
ROTATION OPTO /HOME THE
DURING /DIRECTION MOVE THE
13-51
INITIALIZA OPTO SAMPLE

TION ARM IN
 MOTOR
DRIVER CARD ROTATION
PATH
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
) NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
THE
SAMPLE
ROTATION
COMMANDS.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
73 @S SPT  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
UP/DOWN OPTO/HOME THE
MOVEMEN OPTO/DIRECT ANALYZER.
T ERROR ION OPTO MOVE THE
DURING SAMPLE
 MOTOR
RUN ARM UP AND
DRIVER CARD
DOWN
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND MAKE
MOTOR NOTHING IS
(UP/DOWN) OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
UP AND
DOWN
COMMANDS
TO CHECK
THE
MOVEMENT.
.
13-52
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
74 @S SPT  UP/DOWN  SWITCH OFF YES
RUN SAMPLE
 MOTOR
ARM IN
DRIVER CARD
AND ITS ROTATION
CONNECTOR PATH
MANUALLY
MOTOR SURE THAT
(ROTATIONAL NOTHING IS
) OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
EXECUTE
THE
SAMPLE
ROTATION
COMMANDS.
 IF THE
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
75 !S SAMPLE  THE  SWITCH OFF WHEN THIS
ARM VOD CONNECTOR THE ERROR
ERROR AT S ANALYZER. OCCURS
POS. MOVE THE THEN THAT
 VOD OPTO
SAMPLE TEST WILL BE
SENSOR
ARM UP AND MOVED
 PLACEMENT DOWN
TO PENDING
OF SAMPLE MANUALLY LIST.
ON AND MAKE
SAMPLE/STAN SURE THAT IT CAN BE
DARD TRAY NOTHING IS RESCHEDULE
OBSTRUCTI D
 SAMPLE ARM
POSITION IN NG THE USING WORK
CUVETTE MOVEMENT LIST
 SAMPLE ARM  THEN BUTTON IN
POSITION IN SWITCH ON STATUS
TROUGH THE MONITOR
INSTRUMEN SCREEN.
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
13-53
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
SAMPLE
PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND
SAMPLE
ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
75 !DILN SAMPLE  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
ARM VOD CONNECTOR THE
ERROR S ANALYZER.
DURING MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
DILUTION SENSOR SAMPLE
AT POS. ARM UP AND
 PLACEMENT DOWN
OF SAMPLE MANUALLY
ON AND MAKE
SAMPLE/STAN SURE THAT
DARD TRAY NOTHING IS
 SAMPLE ARM OBSTRUCTI
POSITION IN NG THE
CUVETTE MOVEMENT
 SAMPLE ARM  THEN

POSITION IN SWITCH ON
TROUGH THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
SAMPLE
PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND
SAMPLE
ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
13-54
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
76 S* SAMPLE  NO SAMPLE  SWITCH OFF DURING RUN,
ABSENT IS PLACED IN THE WHEN
SAMPLE/STAN ANALYZER.
THIS ERROR
DARD TRAY CHECK THE OCCURS, ALL
LEVEL OF
 EMPTY TESTS
SAMPLE TUBE SAMPLE ASSOCIATED
AND
 SAMPLE IS ENSURE WITH THAT
BELOW THE THAT IT IS SAMPLE
SET DEAD ABOVE THE MOVED TO
VOLUME SET DEAD PENDING
 LLS BOARD VOLUME.
LIST. IT CAN
PLACEMENT
BE
OF SAMPLE RESCHEDULE
TUBES
D USING
 SAMPLE ARM
WORK LIST
POSITION IN BUTTON IN
SAMPLE/STAN
DARD TRAY STATUS
MONITOR
SCREEN.
76 DILN* SAMPLE  NO SAMPLE  SWITCH OFF NO
ABSENT IS PLACED IN THE
DURING SAMPLE/STAN ANALYZER.
DILUTION DARD TRAY CHECK THE
AT LEVEL OF
 EMPTY
POSITION. SAMPLE
SAMPLE TUBE
AND
 SAMPLE IS ENSURE
BELOW THE THAT IT IS
SET DEAD ABOVE THE
VOLUME SET DEAD
 LLS BOARD VOLUME.
PLACEMENT
OF SAMPLE
TUBES
 SAMPLE ARM
POSITION IN
SAMPLE/STAN
DARD TRAY
78 !S SAMPLE  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
TROUGH MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR SAMPLE
ARM UP AND
 SAMPLE ARM DOWN
POSITION IN MANUALLY
TROUGH AND MAKE
SURE THAT
NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
13-55
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
SAMPLE
PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND
SAMPLE
ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
79 !S SAMPLE  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
ASP POS. MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
SENSOR SAMPLE
ARM UP AND
 PLACEMENT DOWN
OF SAMPLE MANUALLY
ON AND MAKE
SAMPLE/STAN SURE THAT
DARD TRAY NOTHING IS
OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SPT ARM,
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
SAMPLE
PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND
SAMPLE
ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
13-56
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
7A !S SAMPLE  THE  SWITCH OFF NO
RCT(SAMP MOVE THE
 VOD OPTO
LING SENSOR SAMPLE
PAUSED IF ARM UP AND
THREE  SAMPLE ARM DOWN
CONSECU POSITION IN MANUALLY
TIVE VOD CUVETTE AND MAKE
ERROR SURE THAT
OCCURRE NOTHING IS
D) OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK
SCREEN,
SELECT THE
SAMPLE
ARM, AND
THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PUSH THE
SAMPLE
PROBE
GENTLY TO
CUT THE
VOD OPTO
SO THAT
VOD ERROR
WILL BE
GENERATED
AND
SAMPLE
ARM
INITIALIZES.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR VOD
GENERATIO
N FAILS,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
7B !S SPT ARM  SPT  CHECK THE WHEN THIS
VOD OBSTACLE SAMPLE ERROR
ERROR AT OPTO ARM OCCURS
ISE ALIGNMENT THEN THAT
 SPT PROBE
IN [SERVICE TEST WILL BE
ASSEMBLY
CHECK]. IF MOVED TO
AND ITS
IT IS PENDING
SPRING
HITTING AT LIST. IT CAN
ACTION OR
THE EDGE BE
BECAUSE OF
OF ISE ESCHEDULED
ANY
OBSTACLE PORT ALIGN USING WORK
THE PROBE LIST BUTTON
OR
USING THE IN STATUS
MISALIGNMEN
T CALIBRATE MONITOR
FACILITY SCREEN.
 ISE PORT
 REMOVE
13-57
MISALIGN THE COVER

OF THE
SAMPLE
ARM AND
CHECK AND
CLEAN
OBSTACLE
OPTO
 CHECK SPT
PROBE
SPRING AND
ITS TOTAL
ASSEMBLY
 IF THE
PROBLEM IS
NOT
RESOLVED,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER
7F SAMPLE  SPT POS1  SWITCH OFF NO
ARM OPTO AND THEN
INTERLOC SIGNALS SWITCH ON
KED THE
 ASP/RCT
INSTRUMEN
TRAY ARE
T
ROTATING OR
THEIR OPTOS  IF STILL IT IS
ARE GIVING GIVING
FALSE ERROR,
SIGNAL CALL
SERVICE
 STEP TRAY
ENGINEER
AND STEP
ARM CARD
AND ITS
CONNECTOR
ASP 81 @ASP ASP  STOP  SWITCH OFF NO
DURING ROTATE
 MOTOR
INITIALIZA DRIVER CARD ASP
TION MANUALLY
AND ITS
CONNECTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
 ASP NG THE
ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT
TO THE
NING OF T; GO TO
OTHER SERVICE
RELATED CHECK, IN
ASSEMBLIES THE
SAMPLE
TRAY
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PRESS
ROTATE TO
CHECK THE
SEQUENCE
FOR
REAGENT
TRAY
COMMAND.
 IF THE
13-58
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
82 @ASP ASP  STOP  SWITCH OFF NO
DURING ROTATE
 MOTOR
RUN ASP
DRIVER CARD
MANUALLY
AND ITS
CONNECTOR AND MAKE
SURE THAT
MOTOR OBSTRUCTI
 ASP NG THE
ALIGNMENT MOVEMENT.
TO THE
NING OF T; GO TO
OTHER SERVICE
RELATED CHECK, IN
ASSEMBLIES THE
SAMPLE
TRAY
FRAME,
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PRESS
ROTATE TO
CHECK THE
SEQUENCE
FOR
REAGENT
TRAY
COMMAND.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
ROTATION
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
SAMPLE 91 @S SPT  SAMPLE  SWITCH OFF YES
SYRINGE SYRINGE SYRINGE THE
UP/DOWN CONNECTOR ANALYZER.
ERROR S MOVE THE
DURING  MOTOR SAMPLE
INITIALIZA SYRINGE UP
DRIVER CARD
TION AND DOWN
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND
 STEPPER ENSURE
MOTOR THAT
 SYRINGE NOTHING IS
OPTO OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT.
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
13-59
THE
SYRINGE
FRAME.
CLICK ON
SAMPLE
SYRINGE
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PRESS UP
AND DOWN
COMMAND
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
92 @S SPT  SAMPLE  SWITCH OFF YES
SYRINGE SYRINGE THE
UP/DOWN CONNECTOR ANALYZER.
ERROR S MOVE THE
DURING  MOTOR SAMPLE
RUN SYRINGE UP
DRIVER CARD
AND DOWN
AND ITS
CONNECTOR MANUALLY
AND
 STEPPER ENSURE
MOTOR THAT
 SYRINGE NOTHING IS
OPTO OBSTRUCTI
NG THE
MOVEMENT.
 THEN
SWITCH ON
THE
INSTRUMEN
T; GO TO
SERVICE
CHECK, IN
THE
SYRINGE
FRAME.
CLICK ON
SAMPLE
SYRINGE
AND THEN
PRESS
INITIALIZE.
PRESS UP
AND DOWN
COMMAND
TO CHECK
THE
SEQUENCE.
 IF THE
INITIALIZATI
ON OR
UP/DOWN
MOVEMENT
FAILS, CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
INSTRUMEN NR ANALYZER  WRONG PC  MAKE SURE NO
T NOT COM PORT THAT A
13-60
RESPONDI SELECTION CORRECT

NG FOR PORT HAS
ANALYZER. BEEN
SELECTED
 PROBLEM IN
IN THE
COMMUNICAT
ION CABLE SERVICE
CHECK > PC
 RS 232 COMMUNICA
ISOLATOR TION.
BOARD
 MAKE SURE
 PROBLEM IN THE
RCT CONTINUITY
ROTATION OF THE RS
232
COMMUNICA
TION CABLE
BETWEEN
ANALYZER
AND PC
 CHANGE RS
232
ISOLATOR
PCB.
REACTION T9 @TMP RCT  ADC CN1/CN2  CONNECT NO
TRAY TEMPERA CONNECTOR THE ADC
TURE OUT IS NOT CN1/CN2
OF RANGE CONNECTED CONNECTO
R
 ADC CN1/CN2
PROPERLY.
IS LOSSELY
CONNECTED  IF PROBLEM
TO ADC PCB NOT
RESOLVED,
 PROBLEM
CALL
WITH RCT
ASSEMBLY SERVICE
ENGINEER
REAGENT TR -- REAGENT  RGT  GO TO NO
TRAY TEMPERA TEMPERATUR [SERVICE
TURE OUT E SENSOR CHECK: RGT
OF RANGE FAILURE TEMP]; GIVE
 RGT MODULE <READ>
COMMAND.
RGT
TEMPERATU
RE SHOULD
BE
DISPLAYED
 IF THE
TEMPERATU
RE IS NOT
COMING
WITHIN
RANGE,
CALL
SERVICE
ENGINEER.
1E R1** BUBBLE  BUBBLE  CHECK FOR IF SAME
DETECTED SENSED IN PHYSICAL REAGENT IS
AT R1 BOTTLE PRESENCE PRESENT IN
REAGENT1 DURING OF BUBBLE. THE NEXT
POS ASPIRATION WAIT FOR AVAILABLE
 LLS FAILURE BUBBLE TO POSITION,
SETTLE OR THEN THE
USE ASSOCIATED
ANOTHER TESTS GET
BOTTLE. AUTO
 IF BUBBLE RESCHEDULE
IS NOT D ELSE IT
WILL MOVE
ACTUALLY
PRESENT TO PENDING
13-61
THEN IT IS LIST. IT CAN

FALSE RESCHEDULE
SENSING OF USING
BUBBLE. REFRESH
SERVICE POSITION
ENGINEER BUTTON.
MUST BE
CONSULTED
1E D** BUBBLE  BUBBLE  CHECK FOR NO
DETECTED SENSED AT PHYSICAL
AT DILUENT PRESENCE
DILUENT BOTTLE OF BUBBLE.
POS DURING WAIT FOR
ASPIRATION BUBBLE TO
 LLS FAILURE SETTLE OR
USE
ANOTHER
BOTTLE.
 IF BUBBLE
IS NOT
ACTUALLY
PRESENT
THEN IT IS
FALSE
SENSING OF
BUBBLE.
SERVICE
ENGINEER
MUST BE
CONSULTED
.
7E S** BUBBLE  BUBBLE  CHECK FOR WHEN THIS
DETECTED SENSED AT PHYSICAL ERROR
AT SAMPLE TUBE PRESENCE OCCURS
SAMPLE DURING OF BUBBLE. THEN THAT
POS ASPIRATION WAIT FOR TEST WILL BE
BUBBLE TO MOVED TO
 LLS FAILURE
SETTLE OR PENDING
USE LIST. IT CAN
ANOTHER BE
BOTTLE. RESCHEDULE
D USING
 IF BUBBLE
WORK LIST
IS NOT
BUTTON IN
ACTUALLY
STATUS
PRESENT
MONITOR
THEN IT IS
SCREEN.
FALSE
SENSING OF
BUBBLE.
SERVICE
ENGINEER
MUST BE
CONSULTED
.
4E R2** BUBBLE  BUBBLE  CHECK FOR IF SAME
DETECTED SENSED AT PHYSICAL REAGENT IS
AT R2 BOTTLE PRESENCE PRESENT IN
REAGENT DURING OF BUBBLE. THE NEXT
2 POS. ASPIRATION WAIT FOR AVAILABLE
BUBBLE TO POSITION,
 LLS FAILURE
SETTLE OR THEN THE
USE ASSOCIATED
ANOTHER TESTS GET
BOTTLE. AUTO
 IF BUBBLE RESCHEDULE
D ELSE IT
IS NOT
ACTUALLY WILL MOVE
PRESENT TO PENDING
LIST. IT CAN
THEN IT IS
FALSE RESCHEDULE
13-62
SENSING OF D USING
BUBBLE. REFRESH
SERVICE POSITION
ENGINEER BUTTON.
MUST BE
CONSULTED
.
35 R1** AIR  LLS FAILURE  FALSE IF SAME
SENSED SENSING. REAGENT IS
AT SERVICE PRESENT IN
REAGENT1 ENGINEER THE NEXT
POS. MUST BE AVAILABLE
CONSULTED POSITION,
THEN THE
ASSOCIATED
TESTS GET
AUTO
RESCHEDULE
D ELSE IT
WILL MOVE
TO PENDING
LIST. IT CAN
RESCHEDULE
USING
REFRESH
POSITION
BUTTON.
35 D** AIR  LLS FAILURE  FALSE NO
SENSED SENSING.
AT SERVICE
DILUENT ENGINEER
POS MUST BE
CONSULTED
.
65 R2** AIR  LLS FAILURE  FALSE IF SAME
SENSED SENSING. REAGENT IS
AT SERVICE PRESENT IN
REAGENT2 ENGINEER THE NEXT
POS. MUST BE AVAILABLE
CONSULTED POSITION,
THEN THE
ASSOCIATED
TESTS GET
AUTO
RESCHEDULE
D ELSE IT
WILL MOVE
TO PENDING
LIST. IT CAN
RESCHEDULE
USING
REFRESH
POSITION
BUTTON.
95 S** AIR  LLS FAILURE  FALSE WHEN THIS
SENSED SENSING. ERROR
AT SERVICE OCCURS
SAMPLE ENGINEER THEN THAT
POS MUST BE TEST WILL BE
CONSULTED MOVED TO
PENDING
LIST. IT CAN
BE
RESCHEDULE
D USING
WORK LIST
BUTTON IN
STATUS
MONITOR
SCREEN.
13-63
34 @R1 R1 ARM  OPTO POWER  RESTART NO

UP/DOWN SUPPLY THE
POSITIONI FAILURE ANALYZER.
NG ERROR
 OPTO SIGNAL  IF PROBLEM
FLUCTUATION STILL
THERE,
 OPTO
CONNECTOR CALL
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
64 @R2 R2 ARM  OPTO POWER  RESTART NO
UP/DOWN SUPPLY THE
NG ERROR
FLUCTUATION STILL
 OPTO THERE,
CALL
CONNECTOR
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
94 @S SAMPLE  OPTO POWER  RESTART NO
ARM SUPPLY THE
UP/DOWN FAILURE ANALYZER.
POSITIONI
NG ERROR
FLUCTUATION STILL
THERE,
 OPTO
CONNECTOR CALL
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
A5 @STR1 STIRRER1  OPTO POWER  RESTART NO
UP/DOWN SUPPLY THE
NG ERROR
FLUCTUATION STILL
THERE,
 OPTO
CALL
CONNECTOR
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
C3 @CRU CRU  OPTO POWER  RESTART NO
POSITIONI SUPPLY THE
NG ERROR FAILURE ANALYZER.
FLUCTUATION STILL
THERE,
 OPTO
CONNECTOR CALL
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
B5 @STR2 STIRRER2  OPTO POWER  RESTART NO
UP/DOWN SUPPLY THE
NG ERROR
FLUCTUATION STILL
THERE,
 OPTO
CALL
CONNECTOR
S SERVICE
ENGINEER
1D @R1 R1 ARM  MOTOR  RESTART NO
NOT FAILURE THE
RECOVER ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
ED
SUPPLY  IF PROBLEM
FAILURE STILL
 OPTO SIGNAL THERE,
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
4D @R2 R2 ARM  MOTOR  RESTART NO
13-64
NOT FAILURE THE

RECOVER ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
ED
FAILURE STILL
THERE,
 OPTO SIGNAL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
7D @S SAMPLE  MOTOR  RESTART NO
ARM NOT FAILURE THE
RECOVER ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
ED
FAILURE STILL
THERE,
 OPTO SIGNAL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
AD @STR1 STIRRER1  MOTOR  RESTART NO
ARM NOT FAILURE THE
RECOVER ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
ED
FAILURE STILL
THERE,
 OPTO SIGNAL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
BD @STR2 STIRRER2  MOTOR  RESTART NO
ARM NOT FAILURE THE
RECOVER ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
ED
FAILURE STILL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
33 @R1 R1  MOTOR  RESTART NO
SYRINGE FAILURE THE
NOT ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
RECOVER
ED FAILURE STILL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
63 @R2 R2  MOTOR  RESTART NO
SYRINGE FAILURE THE
NOT ANALYZER.
 OPTO POWER
RECOVER SUPPLY  IF PROBLEM
ED
FAILURE STILL
THERE,
 OPTO SIGNAL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
93 @S SAMPLE  MOTOR  RESTART NO
SYRINGE FAILURE THE
NOT
13-65
RECOVER  OPTO POWER ANALYZER.

ED SUPPLY  IF PROBLEM
FAILURE STILL
FLUCTUATION CALL
SERVICE
 OPTO ENGINEER
CONNECTOR
S
On every instrument On/Off, there will be Open

System/Closed System information message is displayed
on the Error Message grid, indicating that system
configuration is Open or closed.
13-66
13.3.9.3. Error Log

The error log screen is used to display the list of errors that is occurred during
machine operation. The list of errors can be filtered according to the type of
operation by selecting option All, Run, Service, Maintenance, Host, and Auto-
Startup. This data is generally useful for service/diagnostic purposes.
To open, go to Reports > Error Log button. The following screen will be
displayed:
Figure 13-1. Error log screen

1. The user can select the date range by changing the From and To.
2. The user can select operation (Service, Maintenance, Host, Auto-Startup,
Run, and All operations) during which the errors occurred.
3. Once the above selection is done, user needs to click on Show button to
view all the errors.
4. The Error Code drop down list is used to filter the records according to the
required error code.
5. In the grid following are the different parameters present:
 Date - Date and Time of the occurrence of the error.
13-67
 Batch No - During run, if there was any error then in which batch it
occurred.
 Error Code – Displays the error code to identify the type of error
occurred.
 Description - Description of the error occurred.
 Action - Action taken on the error occurrence is displayed in this column.
6. To print the details of the error log, user can click on Print button.
7. Use EXPORT button to save the records in the excel sheet. On clicking, the
details will be automatically copied in the excel sheet and the file is saved in the
particular location. The location will be displayed in the Indication text box.
13.3.9.4. Measurement Result Error Flags

The measurement result flags printed out together with the measurement result
are shown in the following list.
Serial No. Flags Cause
1 # This flag is issued to indicate that the result is obtained from an
auto-rerun. This flag is issued for all rerun results.
2 F This flag is used to indicate that correlation correction has been
used to calculate and declare the final result. That is, this flag is
issued when in the equation Y = aX + b, a is not 1 and/or b is not
zero.
3 -1SD This flag is issued with control results when the result is below
1SD limit.
4 +1SD This flag is issued with control results when the result is above
1SD limit.
2SD limit.
2SD limit.
3SD limit.
3SD limit.
9 ?SD This flag is issued with control results when the target Mean and
SD values have not been defined for the control in Consumables
screen. Therefore, flags such as “±1SD”, “±2SD”, “±3SD” cannot
be given.
10 CALC! Calculated Item is not calculated for any of the following reasons.
1. Denominator is 0 (zero) in the process of calculation for
compensation.
2. Test result to be used for Calculated Item has not been
measured yet.
3. Any test to be used for Calculated Item has data/calibration
alarms, such as NOCAL.
4. Any test to be used for Calculated Item errors (S*, R1* etc)
13-68
11 NOCAL This flag is issued with patient or control result and indicates that
the calibration table is not available for result calculation. The
calibration table needs to be checked and corrected to calculate a
result (e.g. calibration is not present or number of standards
provided for calibration is less than required.
12 MONO This flag is issued with patient and control results when, for the
concerned test, the absorbance’s of the calibrators are not
changing monotonically with their respective concentration in the
calibration table.
13 V-D This flag is issued with patient results and indicates a Decreased
volume run.
14 V-I This flag is issued with patient results and indicates Increased
volume run.
15 PD This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that
the sample was pre-diluted.
16 P* This flag is issued with patient and control serum results to
indicate that prozone (antigen excess) has occurred.
17 TEC-H Upper technical limit violated. Measured value or absorbance
slope is higher than the set maximum technical limit. (Set
Maximum limit to zero to cancel the check for TEC-H flag.)
18 TEC-L Lower technical limit violated. Measured value or absorbance
slope is lower than the set minimum technical limit. (Set Minimum
limit to zero to cancel the check for TEC-L flag.)
19 RANGH 1. This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate
that the absorbance of the sample is higher than the absorbance
of the highest concentration calibrator in the calibration table for an
increasing reaction direction test.
2. This flag is also issued with patient and control results if the
absorbance of the sample is lower than the absorbance of the
highest concentration calibrator in the calibration table for a
decreasing reaction direction test.
20 RANGL 1. This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate
that the absorbance of the sample is lower than the absorbance of
the blank (or lowest concentration calibrator) in the calibration
table for an increasing reaction direction test.
2. This flag is also issued with patient and control results if the
absorbance of the sample is higher than the absorbance of the
blank (or lowest concentration calibrator) in the calibration table for
a decreasing reaction direction test.
21 EVH This flag is issued with the patient result when the result is higher
than the concentration of the highest calibrator and is calculated
by extra-polating the calibration curve on higher side.
Extrapolation % (maximum 20%) is set in system parameters.
22 EVL This flag is issued with the patient result when the result is lower
than the concentration of the lowest calibrator and is calculated by
extra-polating the calibration curve, up to zero.
Extrapolation % (maximum 20%) is set in system parameters.
23 H Measured value is larger than upper limit set for normal value
range for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
24 L Measured value is smaller than lower limit set for normal value
range for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
13-69
25 PANH High Panic value alarm. This flag is issued with a sample result to
indicate that the patient result is higher than the Upper Panic Limit
programmed in Test Parameter for the corresponding age, sample
type and category.
26 PANL Low Panic value alarm. This flag is issued with a sample result to
indicate that the patient result is lower than the Lower Panic Limit
programmed in Test Parameter for the corresponding age, sample
type and category.
27 LINxx Linearity abnormal (checked only for Rate A and Rate B assays).
When the reaction during measurement points M2S and M2E is
non-linear beyond the set limit for linearity of reaction, this flag is
given. The percent linearity of reaction is indicated by a two digit
number xx after “LIN”.
28 Lim0 This flag is applicable for Rate Chemistries, only during the
extension logic (Technical Limit is zero) and when Reaction
Absorbance Limit is present (non-zero). If there is no
measurement point available for result calculation, then this flag is
issued and result will be “NA”.
Absorbance Limit is present (non-zero). If there is only one
measurement point available for result calculation, then this flag is
issued and result will be “NA”.
Absorbance Limit is present (non-zero). If there are only 2
measurement points available for result calculation, then this flag
is issued.
31 ~ When Linearity Extension Logic method is used to reduce the
measurement range to match absorbance range setting, this flag
should be given. (Technical Limit is zero, Reaction Absorbance
Limit is non-zero. More than 2 measurement points are available
for result calculation)
32 AbsLim This flag is issued for End-Point chemistries and Rate chemistries
when the absorbance is beyond the Reaction Absorbance Limit
set in Test Parameter.
For Rate-chemistries, this flag will be issued when Technical limit
is set. In this case, Extension Logic will not be applied.
33 RgtAbsMin This flag indicates that the reagent 1 absorbance is lower than the
programmed Reagent Absorbance Minimum.
34 RgtAbsMax This flag indicates that the reagent 1 absorbance is greater than
the programmed Reagent Absorbance Maximum.
35 ??? This flag is issued when the denominator becomes zero during
calculation or an overflow error occurs in logarithmic or
exponential calculation.
36 CD This flag indicates that a clot has been detected during sampling
for that test. The result will be “NA” in such case.
37 @TMP This flag is issued to photometric results when the RCT
temperature was out of range while the measurement was in
process. Flag is not applicable to ISE results.
38 TO This flag indicates Time Out received from the analyzer, instead of
the result.
13-70
39 Cal* This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that
the results are being calibrated with previous calibration data.
40 CAL** This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that
the test is performed with Un-Calibrated Reagent. This flag is
issued only when Online Calibration option (to trace Reagent
Bottle change-over) is selected for a test from Test Parameter.
41 R1? /R2? This flag is issued with the results when test is performed with the
over-filled reagent volume during run. In this condition, the result
will be declared with NA.
42 COMM* This flag is issued with the results in the following cases:
 Absorbance of Reading Area (M1S-M1E, M2S-M2E) is lost
 Absorbance after Reagent 1 addition is lost
 Absorbance after Reagent 2 addition is lost for 2-Reagent
chemistry.
In this condition, the results will be declared with NA.
43 W* During carry over pair process, if the Detergent Wash/Reagent
Wash solution is not found on Reagent Tray, VOD error or any
other error is occurred (during wash operation), then this flag is
issued with the result.
44 RD This flag is issued with the results when test is performed from
discarded reagent bottles, during run. In this condition, the result
will be declared with NA.
45 N! This flag is issued to patient results having a negative value.
Negative results can be sent to host and also for a re-run based
on user selection. If "Print Negative Result" checkbox is
unchecked in System Parameters, then in this condition, negative
test result will be printed as zero in Patient Report and N! Flag will
be printed only if “Hide Flags” option is not selected during
printing.
13-71
13.3.10. Maintenance Menu

To open maintenance screen, go to main screen, and click on the Maintenance on
the left side of screen. The following screen will be displayed:
Figure 13-2. Maintenance screen

Using this screen, the routine maintenance of the analyzer is performed using the
following function:
 Span
 Manual Span
 Auto Span
 Wash
 Dead Volume Calibration
 ISE (available only if ISE is installed on the analyzer)
 Auto Maintenance
13-72
13.3.10.1. Auto Span

This screen is useful to view and adjust the photometer gains at different
wavelengths. The analyzer adjusts the photometer gains automatically if you
selects Auto Span option and clicks on START button.
If the gain obtained during auto span is within the factory set limits, it is indicated
by a green background. And if the gain is not within the limits, then it is indicated
by red background.
The photometer gains can also be adjusted manually, however it is not
recommended.
Before starting the Manual Span set, it is necessary to do one
Auto Span set so that a cuvette filled with DI water stands
between the lamp and the photometer.
If the absorbance of the DI Water placed inside the cuvette is not between 0.05-
0.085 Abs, then following corrective measures should be taken.
• Check the cuvette
• Perform cuvette rinse to ensure that the cuvettes are clean
• Check the particular wavelengths and the photometer lamp.
• Call the service engineer
Auto Span is recommended after change of Lamp, Lamp Voltage

and any other photometer related hardware.
13-73
13.3.10.2. Manual Span

This screen can be used to view the photometer stability. It displays the Voltage
and Absorbance at different wavelengths.
Following is the procedure:

1. Select a wavelength using which the absorbance and voltage needs to be
checked. The yellow color indicates that the wavelength is selected.
2. Click on START button. Continuous online update of voltage and
absorbance takes place and is displayed on the screen.
3. Click on STOP once the check is performed.
4. User can select another wavelength to check the voltage and the
absorbance at the other wavelength. Again user needs to click on START to
start the reading and STOP to stop the reading.
13.3.10.3. Wash Screen

The following screenshot shows the wash screen:
13.3.10.3.1. Cuvette Rinse

On selecting CUVETTE RINSE option, the user can perform a Cuvette Wash of all
72 cuvettes by clicking on the START button. This wash is done using DI Water. At
the end of cuvette rinse operation, the cell blanks are updated automatically and
can be viewed in the Maintenance > Cell Blank screen.
13-74
Figure 13-3. Cell blank screen

This menu enables the user to view the cuvette blank absorbance values (obtained
with DI water in the cuvette) at any particular wavelength.
The screen displays the cuvette blank for the requested wavelength. Wavelength
can be selected by the drop down list provided on the left side of the screen. The
and buttons can also be used to view the cuvette blanks for the
next and previous wavelength. There is also a GRAPH button available, through
which the cell blank reading for particular wavelength can be viewed in a graphical
format. The cuvette blank table consists of three sections.
13-75
Figure 13-4. Cell blank graph

Present abs: It is the absorbance of the cuvettes with de-ionized water measured
after the last run or Cuvette Rinse.
Previous abs: It is the absorbance of the cuvettes with de-ionized water measured
after the second last run or Cuvette Rinse.
Graph: On clicking GRAPH button, the user can view the absorbances in
graphical format for the required wavelength. To view the graph, you need to
select the required wavelength from the Select Wavelength drop-down list, and
then select the appropriate graph type from the Type option.
Three options are available to view the graph:
 Present: This option will displays the previous absorbance graph obtained
for the selected wavelengths.
 Previous: This option will displays the present absorbance graph obtained
for the selected wavelengths.
 Both: The comparison of both graphs (previous and present) can be viewed
using this option.
The maximum and minimum acceptable value of the cuvette blank absorbance
can be set in the Settings > System Parameter menu. If the absorbance of the
cuvette blank exceeds the set maximum blank absorbance, then that particular
13-76
cuvette absorbance is indicated by Red background. On the other hand, if the

absorbance of the cuvette blank is below the minimum acceptable absorbance,
then it is indicated by Blue background.
The values on the cuvette blank value table display should not exceed 0.1
normally. Cuvette Rinse and/or Auto Wash procedure from Maintenance menu
must be performed if the cuvette blanks are higher than the maximum limit. If the
Cuvette O.D.s exceeds 0.2 Absorbance, the cuvette should be replaced with a
new cuvette or should be cleaned externally using fresh water.
If the cuvette blank for some cuvettes are less than 0.03, the
cuvette with the lowest blank absorbance should be placed at
cuvette position 1 in the reaction tray.
This procedure should be done daily before starting the batch.
13.3.10.3.2. Water Save
This option enables the operator to wash the reaction tray cuvettes with some
cleaning solution and fill all cuvettes with DI water at the end of a day’s work or at
beginning of the day.
This operation can be performed any time using Water Save option.
To perform this, select WATER SAVE, and click START.
On clicking this button, the analyzer first washes all the 72 cuvettes with the
cleaning solution through laundry probes, and then using the Arm probe, the
analyzer fills DI water in all the 72 cuvettes. This water remains in the cuvettes
until the next run or cuvette wash/rinse.
Overnight filling of the cuvettes with DI water is helpful in loosening the dirt on the
cuvette walls.
Perform water save daily, at the end of the day’s work.
Poor quality DI water should not be used for Water Save
operation, as bacteria growth can take place inside the cuvettes.
13.3.10.3.3. Auto Wash

The cuvettes, arm probes, and stirrer can be cleaned with external detergents or
cleaning solution through Auto Wash option.
It is recommended to perform this procedure once a week or when needed. If one
is using latex based assays regularly, it is recommended to perform a Cuvette
Wash daily Detergent or cleaning solution with appropriate concentration can be
used for this operation. These solutions are not kept in the detergent Can but in
reagent bottles on the Reagent Tray and in sample tubes on the Sample Tray.
Use 0.1N HCL for AC (Acid) and 0.1N NaOH for AL( Alkali) to
perform Auto Wash.
13-77
1. Place 5.2 ml of Auto Wash AC (Acid) at position 1 and Auto Wash AL (Alkali
solutions at positions 3 on the sample tray.
2. Place 35 ml of Auto Wash AC (Acid) solution at position 1 and Auto Wash AL
(Alkali) solution at positions 3 on the reagent tray (in large bottles).
3. Click on START button.
On clicking, a message box will be displayed indicating the user for placing
cleaning solution.
4. Click OK to perform auto wash.

At the end of the procedure, the user can check the Updated Cuvette
Blanks by going to the Maintenance > Cell Blank screen. If the user wants
to stop the operation, click on the STOP button which will be active after the
START button is clicked.
13-78
It is recommended to perform the Auto Wash once a week or

when needed.
If the user has not performed auto wash for 7 days, then on the
next day, MultiXL reminds the user to perform Auto Wash by
displaying a pop-up message on the right-bottom corner of the
Status Monitor screen after first batch run of the day.
Reminder pop-up will stay on screen, till user click on (Close)
button. The pop-up message will remain on the screen, even
after clicking Close button, if the mouse-pointer is placed on the
pop-up.
This reminder will be displayed once in a day.
The following buttons will be displayed after performing the auto wash operation:
SHOW REPORT: This button will display the list of dates with time on which the
auto-wash was performed.
EXPORT: This option is used to download and save the auto-wash history in
excel (.XLS) file in location C:\MultiXLLOG
13.3.10.3.4. Sample Probe Wash
This option enables the operator to wash the Sample Probe with Auto Wash AC
(Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning solution at the end of a day’s work or at
beginning of the day. This operation can be performed any time using this option.
1. Place the cleaning solution at position ISE2 in the Sample Tray.
2. Select SAMPLE PROBE WASH, and then click START.
On clicking, the following message box will be displayed indicating the user
for placing cleaning solution.
13-79
3. Click OK button.
On clicking, the Probe picks up the cleaning solution and dispenses it into
the drain with internal and external cleaning.
4. The probe wash action is repeated 5 times.
5. After the action is completed the analyzer gets initialized.
Use Auto Wash AC (Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning
solution for sample probe wash.
13.3.10.3.5. R1/R2 Probe Wash

This option enables the operator to wash the Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Probe with
Auto Wash AC (Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning solution at the end of a
day’s work or at beginning of the day. This operation can be performed any time
using this option.
1. Place the cleaning solution at position 55 in the Reagent Tray
2. Select R1/R2 PROBE WASH, and then click START button.
On clicking the following message box will be displayed.
3. Click OK button.
On clicking, the Probe picks up the cleaning solution and dispenses it in the
drain with internal and external cleaning.
4. The probe wash action is repeated 5 times.
5. After the action is completed the analyzer gets initialized.
Use Auto Wash AC (Acid) or Auto Wash AL (Alkali) cleaning
solution for sample probe wash.
13.3.10.3.6. Prime Wash

This option is used at the beginning of the day before the Cuvette Rinse operation.
The SMC valve of the Probe is kept ON (time is 5 minutes) to remove the air
trapped inside the tubing. Also, the valves of the CRU tubing are kept open to
remove the air trapped in them. This operation can be performed any time using
this option.
The following operations will be performed:
13-80
1. Analyzer initializes.
2. CRU goes in DOWN position in the RCT.
3. The SMC Valves for CRU and Probe open sequentially.
4. The priming continues for 5 minutes.
5. After the priming operation is completed, the CRU initializes to home position.
13.3.10.4. Dead Volume Calibration

This screen enables the user to calibrate the Dead Volume for Sample Containers
and Reagent Bottles.
This procedure should be carried out after the software installation for the
analyzer.
The procedure to carry out the Dead Volume Calibration is given below:
13.3.10.4.1. For Reagent Bottle Calibration
The following steps should be done to carry out the Reagent bottle calibration:
1. Select the appropriate Reagent bottle type available from the CONTAINER
LIST – DEAD VOLUME. Available options are:
 RGT -1 TUBE (Inner) (Pos-01)
 RGT - 2 TUBE (Outer) (Pos-56)
 RGT - LARGE BOTTLE (Pos-01)
 RGT - SMALL BOTTLE (Pos-56)
2. Select the desired dead volume within the range displayed in the DEAD
VOLUME drop down list.
3. Pipette the exact amount specified for the dead volume in the Reagent
Bottle.
13-81
4. Place the Reagent bottle according to the bottle type on the position
specified in the list.
5. Click on CALIBRATE button.
Once the calibration process is completed, a message is displayed whether
the calibration is successful or failed.
If the calibration is successful then the values are automatically stored in the
software.
For RGT-1 and RGT-2 tube the default dead volume range is 500µl.
And for RGT large bottles the range is 2 ml and for RGT small bottles the range
is 1.5 ml.
13.3.10.4.2. For Sample Cup Calibration
The following steps should be done to carry out the Sample container calibration:
1. Select the appropriate sample cup from the CONTAINER LIST – DEAD
VOLUME. Available option are:
 CUP IN SAMPLE TRAY (Pos -02)
 CUP IN STANDARD TRAY (Pos-B1)
3. Pipette the exact amount specified for the Dead Volume in the Sample cup.
4. Place the sample cup on the Standard Tray or Sample Tray as per
selection.
Once the calibration process is completed, message is displayed whether
successful or failed.
software.
For Sample cup the dead volume range is 100µl.
13.3.10.4.3. For Sample Tube Calibration
The following steps should be done to carry out the Sample tube (5-7/10 ml)
calibration:
1. Select the sample tube from the CONTAINER LIST – DEAD VOLUME.
Available options are:
 SAMPLE TUBE (5-7/10 ml) (Pos -01)
13-82
3. Pipette the exact amount specified for the Dead Volume in the Sample
container.
4. Place the sample tube according to the Sample container type on the
position specified in the list.
Once the calibration process is completed, message is displayed whether
successful or failed.
software.
During calibration, if the assembly error is occurred then the
error message “Dead Volume Calibration Failed” will be
displayed on the error message grid.
13.3.10.5. ISE
This option is available only when Ion Selective Electrode unit is installed on the
analyzer to perform routine maintenance, purging, cleaning and calibration on the
ISE unit.
When the ISE ON button is clicked, the system will check for the volume of CAL
A and CAL B. Once it is done, the lot number and expiry date of the ISE reagent
pack will be displayed in the Lot No. and Expiry Date.
There are various ISE commands available for ISE maintenance. To start the
maintenance, click on the appropriate command and then click START.
The following are the explanation of each command:
 PURGE A
13-83
This is used to purge Calibrant A solution through the tubing from the
reagent module to the ISE Module. The ISE Module pumps Calibrant A from
the reagent module through the ISE Module to wash out the flow path.
On successful PURGE A cycle, it is indicated by green colored box, if it is
failed, then red colored box will be displayed on the right side of the ISE
maintenance screen.
 PURGE B
This is used to purge Calibrant B solution through the tubing from the
reagent module to the ISE Module. The ISE Module pumps Calibrant B
through the ISE Module to wash out the flow path.
On successful PURGE B cycle, it is indicated by green colored box, if it is
failed, then red colored box will be displayed on the right side of the ISE
maintenance screen.
 CALIBRATION
This cycle is used to calibrate the electrodes (Na, K, Cl, and Li) of ISE
Module. The ISE calibration range is as follows:
Na :52-64
K :52-64
Cl :40-55
Li :47-64
On successful calibration cycle, if the values are in range, it is indicated by
green colored box.
If the values are not in range, then coral (deep pink) colored box will be
displayed.
13-84
Also, if the difference of the calibration values of (Na, K, Cl,

Li) electrodes and calibration values of reference electrodes
(Ref_Na, Ref_K, Ref_Cl, Ref_Li) are more than
1.5mV/decade, then the values are displayed in Yellow
colored box and considered as Unsuccessful calibration.
On clicking SHOW REPORT, it will display the last 30 calibration values.
See figure as shown below.
The column Status displays the status of the electrodes after calibration.
Scroll the horizontal bar to view the complete report.
The appropriate status (Partial, Failed or Pass) will be displayed on the

basis of following conditions:
 Pass: If all electrodes are calibrated successfully.
 Partial: If at least any one of the electrodes is calibrated successfully.
13-85
Failed: All electrodes are unsuccessfully calibrated.

 CLEAN
This command is used to remove protein build-up from the ISE Module
electrodes. The Clean command should be performed once per 24-hour
period.
On successful operation, it is indicated by green colored box, if it is failed,
then Coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed.
 PUMP CALIBRATION
This cycle is used to calibrate the peristaltic pumps of the ISE Module.
 BUBBLE CALIBRATION
The bubble calibration command is used to allow the module to reestablish
a baseline for detecting air-liquid interfaces. It can also be used as a
diagnostic tool to see if the bubble detector is functioning properly.
 MAINTENANCE
This is used to clear fluid from the flow path of the ISE Module, and to
pause the Sip Cycle.
The Sip Cycle is used to refresh the Calibrant A in front of the electrodes.
Every 30 minutes after the last sample is run, the ISE Module will
automatically run a Sip Cycle. No command is required from the host
analyzer to initiate a Sip Cycle. The ISE Module automatically clears the
flow path, next the ISE Module dispenses 36 μL of Calibrant B into the
Sample Entry Port, and it pulls it past the electrodes using the waste pump.
13-86
The ISE Module then dispenses 95 μL of Calibrant A into the sample entry
port, and positions it in front of the electrodes.
then coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed.
 PRIME A
This command is used to prime Calibrant A solution from the reagent pack.
It is performed after installing the new ISE Reagent Pack.
 PRIME B
This command is used to prime Calibrant B solution from the reagent pack.
It is performed after installing the new ISE Reagent Pack.
 SHOW BUBBLE CALIBRATION
This command is used to display the bubble calibration values.
 SHOW LAST SLOPE CALCULATED
This command is used to display last calibration values for the Na, K, Cl,
and Li.
 SHOW ISE PUMP CALIBATION
This command is used to display the ISE pump calibration values.
 READ ISE VERSION
This command is used to display the ISE module software version.
On clicking ISE ON button, the system will check for the (calculated) volume of
Calibrant A and Calibrant B.
 In case, if the remaining (calculated) volume of any Calibrant is less than
10% of the total Volume then the message “ISE Reagent Pack Volume Low
(Less than 10% of Total Volume)” will be displayed in error grid and logged
in the database. This message is only for the user information.
 In case, if the remaining (calculated) volume of any Calibrant is below the
respective threshold level, then the alert message “ISE Reagent Pack
Volume Very Low (Less than 3 Days Sip)” will be displayed with RED
background in error grid.
13-87
Once the check is completed, the ISE reagent pack Lot Number and Expiry date
will be displayed in the Maintenance screen.
However, you can proceed with RUN and other maintenance activities.
13.3.10.5.1. Checking ISE Pack Details
The ISE pack details can be viewed by ISE Pack button, through the Status
Monitor screen.
These details are viewable only before starting the run as this option will be
disabled during the run.
On clicking this button, the ISE reagent pack information will be displayed which
contains:
 Lot Number, Installation Date and Expiry Date of current ISE Reagent Pack
 Details of all ISE Calibration values
 Remaining ISE Reagent Volume Indicator (approximate remaining volume
of Calibrant A and Calibrant B; whichever is lesser).
13-88
The system detects New / Change in ISE Reagent Pack only on

interacting with ISE module (by clicking ISE ON from the
Maintenance screen or on starting the ISE run) or during Auto
Maintenance operations. Hence, if the user clicks ISE Details
button just after (physically) installing the New ISE Reagent Pack,
system will displays the ISE Details of the earlier Reagent Pack.
13.3.10.6. Auto Maintenance

By default, the auto maintenance actions are performed automatically at the
beginning of the day when the application is started first time. This is an automatic
service action that does not require manual intervention.
This operation can be initiated any time from the AUTO MAINTENANCE option
from the Maintenance screen.
If any error occurred during the maintenance operation, it will

reattempt to perform auto maintenance for 3 times.
13-89
There are some series of actions performed during the auto maintenance startup
and shut down operation.
13.3.10.6.1. Operation performed during Auto Maintenance at Startup
Startup
1. ISE Pump Calibration (automatic step)
2. Prime Wash (automatic step)
3. Cuvette Rinse (automatic step)
13.3.10.6.2. Operation performed during Auto Maintenance at Shutdown

Shutdown
1. ISE Clean
3. Wash (Arm, Stirrer, Cuvette, Laundry unit)
(automatic step)
5. Water Save (automatic step)
13.3.10.6.3. Steps to initiate Auto Maintenance at Startup

The auto-maintenance at startup is initiated to perform
automatically when the analyzer and computer are turned on for
the first time each day. Refer section 6.4.6 Power-on of the
personal computer (PC).
Use the following steps:
1. Select START-UP.
2. Click START.
3. Click OK to continue with the maintenance.

This will start the auto maintenance operation.
13.3.10.6.4. Steps to initiate Auto Maintenance at Shutdown
Use the following steps:
13-90
1. Select SHUTDOWN.
2. Click START.
Put the required amount of cleaning solution on the mentioned reagent

and sample position, and then click OK.
This will start the maintenance operation and the instrument will be
shutdown once it is completed.
When the application is started from the sleep mode, if any
weekly auto startup activity is scheduled, then it will perform the
defined weekly activities. After completing the weekly auto
startup activity, the application performs the Auto Maintenance
Startup.
However, in case the option Auto-Maintenance is selected from
Weekly Auto Startup schedule and already performed for the day
then it will not be repeated again.
13.3.11. Auto Startup

To maintain the efficiency of the analyzer, you must clean and deproteinize the
probes and cuvettes regularly to prevent the buildup of contaminants.
Using Auto Startup screen, you can schedule the maintenance activities for the
analyzer, which will be initiated on the schedule time and scheduled day of the
week.
At the end of the day, if the required activities are scheduled and you switch
MultiXL into the Sleep Mode, the MultiXL will automatically comes out from sleep
mode and perform all the pre-selected actions as per scheduled time. Once the
Auto maintenance is performed for that day, then this activity will not initiated even
if the MultiXL is closed and starts again.
. See section 13.3.10.6.1 Operation performed during Auto maintenance at Startup
for more details.
13-91
To open, click Maintenance > Auto-Startup.
The above screen shows the list of activities that can be scheduled for the seven
days of a week. Following are the different parameters present on the screen:
 Activate
This option is to be ticked for the days for which the auto startup feature is
required to be executed. Once this option is ticked, further activities can be
selected and scheduled for the day.
 Set Time
This option is used to set the auto-startup time for the day. On the set time,
the machine will switch on automatically and perform the tasks.
 Warm-up Time
This option is used to set the Warm-up time required between the switching
ON of the machine and start performing scheduled tasks. Check the option
to enable the feature and enter the time in minutes in the box near.
 Prime
Check this option to enable Prime operation for the selected day. Time in
minutes can also be entered in the box.
13-92
This operation will take 5 minutes. It can be performed fixed number of

times as per requirement by entering value in the box near.
For example: If you enter value 2, then prime will be executed twice that is 5
minutes + 5 min.
 Sample Probe Wash
Check this option to enable Sample Probe Wash operation for the selected
day. This operation requires Wash solution at position ISE 2 in the standard
sample tray.
 R1/R2 Probe Wash
Check this option to enable Reagent 1 and Reagent 2 Probe Wash
operation for the selected day. This operation requires Wash solution at
position 55 in the reagent tray.
 Auto Span
Check this option to enable Auto Span operation for the selected day.
 Cuvette Rinse
Check this option to enable Cuvette Rinse operation for the selected day.
 ISE Purge A
Check this option to enable ISE Purge A operation for the selected day.
Number of times this operation is to be performed can be entered in the
box.
 ISE Purge B
Check this option to enable ISE Purge B operation for the selected day.
Number of times this operation is to be performed can be entered in the
box.
 ISE Clean
Check this option to enable ISE Clean operation for the selected day.
 ISE Calib (Calibration)
Check this option to enable ISE Calibration operation for the selected day.
 ISE Purge A
Check this option to enable ISE Purge A operation again after the ISE
Clean and Calibration operation are done for the selected day. Number of
times this operation is to be performed can be entered in the box.
 Auto Maintenance
This option is used to perform the auto maintenance activity.
Following are the buttons available on the screen:
13-93
SAVE - Click on this button to save the changes.

CLEAR – Click on this button to clear the changes made before click on save
button.
EDIT – Click on this button to edit / schedule the weekly auto startup functionality.
13.3.12. Maintenance Log

Maintenance Log screen is used to review the maintenance operations performed
on the analyzer within specific period.
Screen shows the list of maintenance activities performed during the selected
period with details such as its status, source from which the activity was initiated.
The system records details like which activity is performed on what date, what was
its source, and what was the status.
Maintenance logs are extremely useful for troubleshooting purpose, as they
provide a record of all activity performed on the system and may shed light on
hard-to-spot symptoms.
System keeps records of maintenance performed on the analyzer. To view the list,
Select date range From and To.
List can be further filtered out according to Source, Activity and Status.
Source indicates the domain from where the maintenance activity is initiated.
Sources can be Maintenance screen, Shutdown screen, Application Start (start of
application), Auto Startup screen.
Activity indicates the type of maintenance operation performed.
Status indicates the status of activity, such as successful, unsuccessful, and
performed.
13-94
A : Select the date range.

B : Select the source from which the maintenance activity is initiated.
C : Select the type of maintenance activity.
D : Select the maintenance activity status.
E : Use Show for displaying records and Print to print maintenance report.
F : Click on the icon to view the list of error encountered during the
operation.
13-95
13.4. Backup
To open this screen, click on Utility from the main menu and then select Backup.
Figure 13-5. Backup screen

Method to backup data:
13.4.1.1. Backup Operations

Backup Mode: The display changes according to the selection and provides
necessary guidance to perform the operation.
Two options are available. Full Backup and Selective Backup. Only Full backup is
restorable. Selective backup is used to extract partial data for reference and
cannot be restored back.
Backup Format: This drop down list is used to select the Mode of Backup.
Available options are Text, XML, XLS, and CSV. These options are available if
the Selective Backup option is selected.
 XML: This mode of backup stores the Backup Parameters in XML
format.
 Text: This mode of backup stores the Backup Parameters in Text format.
13-96
 XLS: This mode of backup stores the Backup Parameters in Excel

format.
 CSV: This mode of backup stores the Backup Parameters in Excel
format.
The option Database will be displayed if Full Backup option is selected. Using
this option, a complete database file is created in .BKP format along with .ARH
file (.ARH file is a backup of Archive data).
Backup Path: Click on the Browse button to select the path or directory where
the Parameters will be backed up. It is not recommended to take the backup on
the desktop.
Database: This mode of backup copies the entire database and stores it on the
hard disk at the path selected by user using Browse button.
Backup Option: A list of parameters is available for Backup if the user selects
the Selective Backup mode. The user can either check all the parameters using
Backup Option/All checkbox or make a selection individually using the checkbox
placed against each parameter.
After the above operations have been done, click on Backup button to take a
backup of selected parameters.
Important: Take Full Backup periodically, to avoid loss of
data in case of PC crash.
Store the backup file .BKP, created through Full Backup;
in an external media like CD/DVD.
13.4.1.2. Copy Data to USB

By default, the USB storage device is blocked on Windows Embedded 7 as
Operating System. Log in as Administrator (windows user login) and run MultiXL.
The option is provided to copy database backup, log files and exported report files
on USB storage device,
Procedure to copy data on USB storage device is as follows.
1. Login as Administrator on the analyzer PC and start MultiXL software.
2. Insert the USB device.
3. Go to Utility > Backup screen.
4. Following options are available to copy data on USB storage device. Select
any one, as appropriate:
 Only Database: Database Backup,.bkp file will be copied to USB.
 Only Log Files: Copy log files from the location C:\MultiXLLOG into
USB device.
13-97
 Both Log Files and Database: Both, Log files as well as Database, will
be copied to the USB device.
 Folder To External Drive: The folder (along with its contents) selected
from the analyzer PC will be copied to the USB device.
 Exported Reports: System will copy all exported reports like Result
Reprint, Test Statistics etc. to USB device.
5. User can select any one of the above options and select the Destination
Location i.e. the USB device.
6. Click the Copy Analysis Data button to copy data based on user selection.
On completion of data copy, message will be displayed as “Analysis data copied to
the destination location successfully” in the indication panel.
13-98
14. Introduction to ISE Module

ISE (Electrolyte Measurement System) is placed on extreme left side of the
chemistry analyzer, and it measures the concentration of Na, K, Cl and Li of
serum, plasma or diluted urine with the ion electrodes.
The ISE unit consists of ISE module, ion electrode and three pumps, two for
supply and other for waste.
ISE module This module consists of electrodes (Na, K, Cl, Li and Reference)
and pumps. Measurement of concentration is done at electrodes
and rinses/calibrates after every measurement
Communication to the analyzer is carried out through RS232C.
Ion electrode This unit consists of Na, K, Cl, Li and Reference electrodes.
Cal A pump This pump supplies Calibrant-A into ISE module.
Cal B pump This pump supplies Calibrant-B into ISE module.
Waste pump This pump drains liquid from ISE module.
All waste liquid are discharged into the external tank for high concentration waste
liquid.
The Module is completely self-contained. All sample and Calibrant positioning
within the module is controlled by an integral microprocessor, which assures
reliable electrode operation and maximum lifetime. The electrolyte measurement
system’s microprocessor applies proprietary mathematical algorithms to electrode
output voltages, converting them to clinical units of mmol/L.
14-1
14.1. Four Channel ISE Module Mechanical
Figure 14-1. Front View
Figure 14-2 Rear View
14-2
14-3 Transasia ISE Module
14-3
Figure 14-4 ISE Module
14-4
Figure 14-5 Interconnection tubing diagram
14-5
14.2. Three Channel ISE Module Mechanical
14-6
Peristaltic
pump
Cal A
14-7
14.3. ISE Technical Specification

14.3.1. Four Channel ISE
Sample type Serum, Plasma or Urine (Urine requires dilution)
Sample size 70 µl serum

140 µl diluted urine
Analysis time Serum – 35 seconds, including one point calibration

Urine – 40 seconds, including one point calibration
Throughput Serum – 100 samples per hour

Urine – 90 samples per hour
Power 24V DC, 1.0A (SMPS, four channel ISE)
Module Size 161 mm high x 65.5 mm wide x 98.6 mm deep
Reagent Pack Calibrant A, Calibrant B

includes
Other Reagents Cleaning Solution, Urine Diluent
Operating Ambient 15°C - 32°C

Temperature
14.3.2. Three Channel ISE

Serial Item Specifications
Number
1 Sample Serum or Urine ( urine requires dilution)
2 Sample size 75 µl serum, 160 µl diluted urine
3 Reproducibility Maximum precision Typical carryover, %
(Within run) (Serum)
SD < 1.6 (100-136 < 0.5 %
mmol/L) )
CV < 1% (136 – 146
a Na
mmol/L)
CV < 1.5% (146 – 160
mmol/L)
SD < 0.06 (2-3.5 < 1.5 %
mmol/L)
CV < 2% (3.5 – 5.1
b K
mmol/L)
CV < 2.5% (5.1 – 6
mmol/L)
SD < 2.5 (80-98 < 1.0 %
mmol/L)
c Cl
CV < 1.8% (98 – 106
mmol/L)
14-8
CV < 2% (106 – 120

mmol/L)
4 Analysis Time Serum – 35 seconds, including one point
calibration
Urine – 40, including one point calibration
5 Throughput Serum – 100 samples per hour
Urine – 90 samples per hour
6 Power 24V 1.0A (SMPS, four channel ISE)
7 Module Size Height 100 mm X 102 mm width, 91 mm depth
8 Reagents Calibrant A
Calibrant B
Cleaning Solution
Urine Diluent
9 Maximum Environmental 15 - 32 °C
Temperature
14-9
14.4. ISE Measurement Theory

The electrolyte measurement system measures Sodium, Potassium and Chloride
ions in biological fluids using ion selective electrode technology. A diagram of the
electrode measurement system.
Figure 14-6. Schematic diagram for electrolyte measurement system

The flow-through electrodes use selective membrane tubing, specially formulated
to be sensitive to the respective ions. The potential of each electrode is measured
relative to a fixed, stable voltage established by the double junction Silver/Silver-
chloride reference electrode. An ion-selective electrode develops a voltage that
varies with the concentration of the ion to which it responds. The relationship
between the voltage developed and the concentration of the sensed ion is
logarithmic, as expressed by the Nernst equation:
RT log(C )
E  Eo 
nf
Where:
14-10
E = the potential of the electrode in sample solution

Eo = the potential developed under standard conditions
RT/nF = A temperature dependent “constant”, termed the slope
log = Base ten logarithm function
α = Activity coefficient of the measured ion in the solution
C = Concentration of the measured ion in the solution
14.5. Electrodes and Reagents Used

Electrodes used in the ISE module.
The electrodes are maintenance-free and are warranted on a prorated basis for up
to 10,000 samples or 6 months, whichever occurs first, Cleaning Solution aspirated
from an operator designated sample cup, is used at least once a day at the end of
the day in order to minimize protein buildup in the fluid lines. A two-point calibration
of the ISE module is also done at least once a day at the beginning of the first
sample run. If the user is running more than 50 samples a day, cleaning and
calibration must be performed after completion of 50 samples.
The entire double-junction reference electrode is disposable. The reference
electrode is filled with sufficient KCl so that no filling solution must be added
during the lifetime of the electrode. The lifetime of the reference electrode is 6
months or 10,000 samples. No addition of internal filling solution is required for this
electrode.
Electrodes require Calibrant A sampling at 30-minute intervals for reliable
operation, but this is completely controlled by the electrolyte measurement system
without any need for operator intervention.
The electrodes require a 10 times sample dilution for measurement of urine so
user has to keep 10 times diluted (urine sample to urine diluent ratio 1:9) urine
sample for the analysis of electrolytes in urine samples.
It is not necessary to regulate the electrode housing temperature if its
environmental temperature does not exceed 32 ºC.
Reagents used in the ISE Module:
The sample is aspirated from a sample cup and dispensed into the sample port at
the top of the ISE module by the sample probe. The sample is then positioned in
front of the sensors using the double detector and the waste pump.
Four reagents are needed to operate the ISE module:
Calibrant A: Used as wash solution and single-point calibrator. Calibrant A is
pumped into the sample port by the Calibrant A pump and then positioned in front
of the sensors. A volume of 180 µl is sufficient for each serum sample run and 100
µl is sufficient for each urine sample run.
14-11
Calibrant B: Used as the second point in two-point calibration. Calibrant B is

pumped into the sample port by the Calibrant B pump and then positioned in front
of the sensors. A volume of 180 µl is sufficient for each urine sample run.
Cleaning Solution: Should be run once a day to prevent protein buildup or at 8
hour intervals if the ISE module performs more than 50 samples per day. Cleaning
Solution may be aspirated from a sample cup. 500 µl is sufficient for one day's
requirements.
Urine Diluent: This is required for urine samples. Urine samples must be diluted
by a factor of 10 (urine sample to urine diluent ratio of 1:9) to perform urine
measurement. The operator must keep the urine diluent on the Reagent Tray.
14.6. Urine ISE Dilution Rerun

Urine ISE sample should be Re-run with different Dilution ratio (increase /
decrease Sample volume), based on the Result flags in the order of K, Na then Cl.
The ISE Urine sample is performed with 10X dilution during its first run. During
ISE-rerun, the 3X and 15X dilutions may be performed, depending upon the flag
attached to the result (based on increased or decreased sample volume).
On receiving the result, the test will go for rerun on the following conditions:
 If the sample result is attached with PANH flag, then sample will go for
rerun with normal dilution that is 1:9 (10X). If the sample result is
attached with RANGH flag, then the sample will go for rerun with
decreased sample volume that is 1:14 (15X) dilution.
 After receiving the result for the sample replicates, if both the replicates
are attached with different flag that is RANGH (requiring decrease rerun)
and RANGL (requiring increase rerun). But the priority of RANGH is
higher so this sample will go for a Re-run with decrease sample volume.
The number of replicates sent to Rerun will be the same as number of
replicates sent during the 1st (original) determination.
The software will display re-run result (after applying the
volume correction) for only those tests having flags that
required re-run. The Attach Rerun Flag (“#”) and Volume
Increase/ Volume Decrease Flag (“V-I”/ “V-D”) will be
displayed after correcting the results. Flags H, L, PANH,
PANL , RANGH and RANGL will be applicable to ISE results
14-12
14.7. Storage and Usage of the Reagents

1. Store all solutions in a dark and cool place at room temperature.
2. Don't preserve the reagents such as or cleaning solution once they are
dispensed to sample cup.
3. Don't use the expired solution.
4. When opening new bottle for a solution, don't mix remaining solution from
the previous bottle.
5. Reagent Pack has one month of on board stability.
14.8. Turning Off the Power

As Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B is automatically dispensed into ISE unit every 30
minutes to prevent electrodes from drying out; it is not recommended to turn off the
main power supply of the analyzer. Switch off only the analyzer at the end of the
day. This will keep the above function activated.
When the Calibrant remains in fluid path for over two hours without flowing, the Na
ion from reference electrode can reach Na electrode and saturate the membrane
resulting in effected Na measurement.
When the power to the analyzer needs to be turned off for a reason such as
maintenance, follow the procedure below to purge Calibrant-A solution in the path.
Also refer to the procedure when turning off the power for more than several hours,
as it requires storage of the electrodes.
14.9. Shutdown Procedure

14.9.1. Preparing the ISE Module for Storage
If the laboratory plans to store the ISE module for a period greater than one week,
during which the analyzer will not be connected to power, the following steps
should be performed:
Before removing the electrodes, they should be cleaned using the cleaning
solution and then running 3 Purge A cycles from the Maintenance > ISE.
14.9.2. Reference, Na+ and Cl- Electrodes

 Depress the compression plate and remove all electrodes, including the
reference electrode from the ISE Module.
 Place the Na+ and Cl- electrodes into individual sealed bags.
 Reinsert the Reference Electrode flow path line with yellow flag, if available,
and then put into individual sealed bags.
14-13
14.9.3. K+ and Li+ Electrode

 Aspirate a small volume of Calibrant A from the top port of the reagent pack
into a syringe fitted with a blunt needle.
 Inject sufficient Calibrant A into the lumen of the K+ and Li+ electrodes until
fluid fills the lumen.
 Cover both ends of the lumen (both sides of the K+ and Li+ electrodes) with
tape to hold the Calibrant A in place.
 Insert the K+ and Li+ electrodes into a sealed bag.
14.9.4. Reagent Pack

Remove the Reagent pack from the analyzer and discard it.
14.9.5. Analyzer Tubing

Remove all the fluidic tubing and thoroughly rinse with DI water.
14.9.6. Analyzer Re-activation

 Remove all electrodes from the sealed bags.
 Remove tape from K+ and Li+ electrode.
 If necessary, soak the reference electrode in warm water until the lumen of
the electrode has been cleared of salt build-up.
 Install electrodes into the ISE Module.
 Connect new reagent pack to the ISE Module.
 Use Prime Cycles to prime the Calibrants.
 Calibrate analyzer.
14.10. ISE Calibration

It is mandatory to perform calibration (two points) before ISE measurement. It is
recommended to make it a routine operation to run calibration before running first
sample of the day.
One point calibration is automatically performed at each sample processing by
Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B is used for two-point calibration.
The calibration is required at the following cases:
IMPORTANT:
 The power switch of analyzer is turned off.
 Eight hours have passed since the last ISE calibration.
14-14
 Environmental temperature has changed more than 4 °C since the last ISE
calibration.
 More than 50 samples are processed after ISE Calibration in the morning.
14.10.1. Procedure for ISE Calibration

Before starting analysis of sample for electrolytes, user should first clean and
calibrate the ISE module.
The following sequence should be used for ISE unit calibration:
1. Install the Reagent Pack and connect it to the ISE module. If the Reagent
Pack is already in place, shake it gently.
2. Pour the Cleaning solution into the sample cup and place on the ISE2
position of the standard sample tray.
3. Go to the Maintenance from the main menu screen.
4. Click ISE ON button.
5. Select PURGE A and click START.
On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant A from the reagent
pack and dispenses it into the sample entry port to wash out the electrode
flow path. Repeat the procedure if required.
6. Select PURGE B and click START.
On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant B from the reagent
7. Select PURGE A and click START.
8. On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant A from the reagent
9. After completion of purge cycles, select CLEAN, and then click START. On
clicking, the analyzer dispenses 100 μl of cleaning solution and 180 μl of
Calibrant A in the sample entry port during the cleaning process.
10. After cleaning cycle is over, perform 6 to 8 PURGE A cycles. Now the
system is ready for calibration.
11. Select CALIBRATION and click START.
This command is used to calibrate the electrodes of the ISE Module. The
ISE Module then cycles Calibrant B and Calibrant A solutions in front of the
electrodes and measures the mill volt output of the electrodes for each of
the respective solutions.
14-15
These millivolt readings are then used to set up a relationship between

sample concentration and electrode millivolt output. The change in millivolts
per change in concentration is the slope of the electrode. The slope of the
electrodes is reported in mv/dec (millivolts per decade change in
concentration), and should be within the following limits:
Li+ 47-64 mV/dec
Na+ 52-64 mV/dec
K+ 52-64 mV/dec
Cl- 40-55 mV/dec
After the calibration process is completed, electrode calibration slopes are
displayed on the right side of screen. If any error occurs during the
calibration process, the error code is also displayed in the error message
grid. If the slopes are within range then a box with green color is displayed.
If slopes are out of range then a box with coral (deep pink) color is
displayed. The previous calibration details with date and time along with the
slope values can be viewed. To view them select CALIBRATION, and then
click SHOW REPORT.
If the electrode calibration slopes are in the acceptable range, the
electrolyte measurement system is ready for the sample analysis.
For Serum samples 70 μl and for Urine 140 μl (10 times diluted with urine
diluent) of sample is required for the Electrolyte measurement.
The slope is defined as:
Where CA = Calibrant A concentration in mmol/L

CB = Calibrant B concentration in mmol/L
EA = ISE Potential developed in Calibrant A solution in mV
EB = ISE Potential developed in Calibrant B solution in mV
12. To perform Pump Calibration, select PUMP CALIBRATION and click on
START.
175 μl of Calibrant A solution and 375 μl of Calibrant B solution are
dispensed in the sample port. Once the process is completed successfully,
values for all the 3 pumps CAL A, CAL B and Waste are displayed. If the
values are between 1500 and 3000, calibration is displayed OK with green
colored box else it is displayed NOK with red colored box.
13. To perform Bubble Calibration, select the option BUBBLE CALIBRATION and
click on START button. 75 μl of Calibrant A solution is dispensed in the
sample port. Bubble calibration allows the module to reestablish a baseline for
14-16
detecting air-liquid interface. It can be used as a diagnostic tool to see if the

bubble detector is functioning properly. If the process is successful without
any error it s displayed OK with green colored box else it is displayed NOK
with red colored box.
14.11. Maintenance Schedule

The Electrolyte Measurement System has been designed to require very little
operator maintenance. The only daily maintenance required is to run the Cleaning
Solution after the last sample of the day. All other parts and expendables are
replacement items (see schedule below).
Recommended Maintenance/Replacement Schedule (low volume user).
Pump Cassette : 9 months
Na+ Electrode : 6 months
K+ Electrode : 6 months
Cl- Electrode : 6 months
Li+ Electrode : 6 months
Reference Electrode : 6 months
Reagent : Refill reagent as required by testing needs
Recommended Maintenance/Replacement Schedule (greater than 100

samples/day
Pump Cassette : 6 months
Na+ Electrode : 10,000 samples
K+ Electrode : 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode : 10,000 samples
Li+ Electrodes : 10,000 samples
Reference Electrode : 10,000 samples
Reagent : Refill reagent as required by testing needs
14.12. Acceptable Calibration Ranges

The following are the acceptable calibration values displayed at the bottom of the
screen after completion of an ISE calibration.
Na+ :Slope 52 to 64 millivolt / Decade
K+ :Slope 52 to 64 millivolt / Decade
Cl- :Slope 40 to 55 millivolt / Decade
14-17
Li+ :Slope 47 to 64 millivolt / Decade
14.13. Troubleshooting
Symptom Cause Corrective actions
System does 1. No power

not respond
2. Communication failure Turn off power, reapply power.
3. RS232 cable is disconnected or Reconnect or replace cable.

damaged
4. ISE Module connector has been Replace board.

damaged
5. Component failure on board Replace board.
Low Slope Na+ 1. Misalignment of electrodes Remove electrodes. Inspect o-rings.

or K+ <52 Reassemble properly.
mV/decade Cl-
< 0mV/decade, 2. Calibrator solutions Replace Reagent pack
Li+ <47mV
mV/decade or 3. Electrode (low slope) Replace electrodes.
High Slope
Na+, 4. Air bubble on reference electrode Remove electrode, tap to dislodge
+ + membrane bubble, replace, and recalibrate
K , or Li >64
mV/decade 5. Reference electrode Replace reference electrode and retest
Cl- >55
mV/decade 6. ISE Module or Fluid temperatures Change ISE Module location if ambient
exceed 320 C (high slope) temperature is too great.
Noise Error 1. Electrode. Replace problem electrode and

Flag Single recalibrate
electrode
2.Electrical noise spike from a) Find source of spike and eliminate.
environmental source b) Check grounding of ISE module.
3. Component failure on ISE Module Replace Board.

board
Noise Error 1. Reference Electrode Replace reference electrode and

Flag recalibrate
Multiple
electrodes 2. Electrical noise spike from a) Check for electrical noise coincident
environmental source with activation.
b) Check grounding of ISE Module
3. Component failure on ISE Module Replace board.

board.
14-18
Drift Error Flag 1. May occur when new electrode Purge Purge the Cal A and recalibrate the
Single the Calibrant A is installed. If the module.
Electrode electrode is new it may initially drift as it
rehydrates over the course of 15 minutes
2. Electrode Replace the electrode and recalibrate.
Drift Error Flag 1. May occur when new electrode or Purge the Calibrant A and recalibrate
Multiple reagent pack is installed on system. the ISE Module
Electrode
2. Reference electrode Replace reference electrode and
recalibrate
3. Electrical spikes from environmental a) Find source of spike and eliminate

source b) Check the grounding of ISE Module.
4. Component failure on ISE Module Replace the board

board
Air in Sample 1. Insufficient sample pipette into the ISE Host instrument must deliver 70µl.
Module sample entry port. Increase dispensed sample volume.
2. Fluid leaks. Determine source of leak and resolve
3. Sample not positioned properly. a) Electrode not seated properly.

Remove electrode. Inspect o-rings and
reassemble.
b) Replace pump tubing.
4. Pump tubing obstructed. Replace pump tubing.
5. Bubble in sample. Host must deliver sample free of

bubbles.
Air in Sample 1. Cal B and Cal A are segmented with a) Electrodes are not properly seated
and Cal A air or compressed. Check compression
plate, spring and seal. Remove and
reassemble electrodes.
2. Fibrin or salt is plugging the electrode a) Use Cleaning procedure for module.
flow path. b) Remove electrode and clean or
replace electrode with plugged flow
path. Reinstall electrodes and
recalibrate.
3. Bubble detector is malfunctioning Replace bubble detector.
4. Waste pump is malfunctioning Replace Waste Pump.
5. Dirty sample cup Clean with cotton swab and DI water.
14-19
Air in Cal B and 1. Cal B and Cal A are segmented with a) Electrodes are properly seated.
Air in Cal A air Check compression plate, spring and
seal.
b) Ensure that all electrodes and o-
rings are properly installed.
c) Ensure tubing between reagent pack
and sample entry port is connected
properly.
d) Replace tubing between reagents
pack and sample entry port.
e) Reagent low or out.
f) Use Cleaning procedure for module.
2. Fibrin or salt is plugging the electrode a) Use Cleaning procedure for module.
flow path. b) Remove electrodes and clean or
replace electrode with plugged flow
path. Reinstall electrodes and
recalibrate.
3. Bubble detector is malfunctioning Replace bubble detector.
4. Waste pump is malfunctioning Replace waste pump
5. Bubble detector malfunction Replace bubble detector
Air in Cal A 1. Calibrant A Replace reagent pack with new one,

prime and recalibrate
2. Tubing from reagent module is Reconnect or replace tubing.

disconnected, plugged or crimped
3. Calibrant A pump is not working a) Check electrical connections.

properly b) Replace pump tubing
c) Replace motor
d) Replace pump.
14.14. Procedure for Installing New Reagent Pack

Follow this procedure for installing the new reagent pack:
1. Connect the new Reagent Pack on the analyzer.
2. Click on ISE ON button in Maintenance screen. The software will detect the
new pack and perform priming automatically. Once it is done, the lot number
and expiry date of the new reagent pack will be displayed on the Lot No. and
Expiry Date fields.
3. Perform calibration with the new pack and check the values.
The MultiXL application automatically detects the newly installed ISE reagent pack
if it is replaced or installed. For detection of new ISE reagent pack, follow the pre-
requisites.
14-20
 MultiXL software having ISE Reagent Pack Inventory feature with the New
ISE Reagent Pack. For existing partially utilized pack, the inventory will not
be correct.
Software is using a counter to calculate ISE inventory. Any
manipulation, like releasing and attaching the reagent pack
connector, will falsify the inventory.
 ISE Reagent Pack from one analyzer should not be interchanged with Pack
on other analyzer. In such event, the inventory will not be correct.
 ISE Module should be always ON (for periodic sip cycles).
14.14.2. Procedure
Follow this procedure for installing the new reagent pack:
1. Connect the new Reagent Pack on the analyzer.
2. Click on ISE ON button in the Maintenance screen. The software will detect
the new pack and perform priming (Prime A and Prime B) operation
automatically till ISE module sends OK status (air removed), maximum up to
10 times.
During this operation, the following error message may be
displayed on the error grid:
» Air in Calibrant A. ISE tubing may be bent, closed or not
attached
OR
» Air in Calibrant B. ISE tubing may be bent, closed or not
attached.
This will help the user in detection of bended or closed tubing. In this case,
correct the closed or bent tubing and again perform the Prime A and Prime
B commands manually through the ISE MAINTENANCE COMMANDS. See
figure below.
14-21
3. Once the auto priming operation performed correctly, the lot number and expiry
date of the new reagent pack will be displayed on the Lot No. and Expiry Date
fields along with the following information:
 ISE Pack Installation Date
 Lot Number
 Expiry Date
 Distributor code (This information is stored in the reagent pack’s Dallas
chip and not visible to user.)
 Volume of Cal A and Cal B in full Pack.
The above information can be checked through ISE Pack button available
on the Status Monitor screen.
4. Perform Calibration with the new reagent pack and check the values.
14.15. Error Codes

If the ISE module detects an error during any cycle, an error code will be shown
immediately after the result or slope string.
Error codes transmitted are only relevant to the cycle which generated the error.
14-22
Subsequent cycles will not be affected by previous error codes, and the ISE
module will always report results.
Error codes are transmitted as a consequence of two separate events. In the first
instance, an error code appears embedded in the result string of every calibration
and sample analysis. The errors (or lack of errors) identified by this error code are
related to measurement limits exceeded in the just completed cycle. In the second
instance, an error code is transmitted independent of a result string and relates
directly to a failure to complete an assigned task. The errors identified by this error
code are related to fluid positioning and device operation. The two error types are
mutually exclusive within a cycle. Receiving an independent error code precludes
receiving a result string. Receiving a result string means no device errors occurred
within the cycle.
14.16. Error Message for ISE Unit

The following error codes with description will be displayed on the Maintenance
error grid, if any error occurred during the ISE operation.
Assembly Error Code Description Possible Corrective Actions
Failure
ISE ID ISE Pack - Reagent pack Change ISE Pack
Installation Date expired or
Mismatch. invalid
Inventory may not
be Correct
ISE IE ISE Pack - Expired -- Change ISE Pack
ISE IL ISE Reagent Pack Required Change ISE Pack
Volume Low (Less volume
than 10% of Total insufficient
Volume)
ISE IN ISE Pack - No Dallas chip Ensure reagent
Dallas Chip absent connector properly
connected on Dallas
chip
ISE IR ISE Pack - Dallas Dallas chip Change ISE Pack
Read Error absent
ISE IT ISE Pack - Time Dallas chip 1. Check ISE module
Out Occurred absent connection
2. Ensure reagent
connector properly
connected on Dallas
chip
ISE IU ISE Pack - -- Change ISE Pack
Unknown
Distributor
ISE IV ISE Reagent Pack Required Change ISE Pack
Volume Very Low volume
(Less than 3 Days insufficient
Sip)
ISE IW ISE Pack - Dallas No Dallas Ensure reagent
14-23
Write Error chip, date connector properly

already written connected on Dallas
chip
ISE ISES* Air in Sample / 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
Urine volume 2. Ensure proper tubing
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEA* Air in Calibrant A 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
volume 2. Ensure proper tubing
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEB* Air in Calibrant B 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEC* Air in Cleaner 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEM* Air in Segment 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
2. Tubing
leakage
ISE ISEP* Pump Cal 1. Required 1. Change ISE Pack
insufficient
3. Check motor wiring
2. Tubing
leakage 4. Change motor
3. Motor
problem
ISE ISEF* No Flow 1. Motor 1. Check motor wiring
problem 2. Change motor
2. Tube 3. Replace Tubing
choked/bent
ISE ISED* Bubble Detector 1. Bubble Change ISE Module
Detector
module
problem
ISE ISER* Dallas Read 1. Dallas chip Change ISE Pack

absent
2. Dallas chip
connection
improper
ISE ISEW* Dallas Write No Dallas Ensure reagent
14-24
chip, date connector properly

already written connected on Dallas
chip
ISE ISET* Time Out Dallas chip 1. Check ISE module
absent connection
2. Ensure reagent
connector properly
connected on Dallas
chip
14-25
15. Accessories, Spares, and Consumables

This chapter provides the list of various electronic, mechanical and consumables
components used in the instrument.
A shortlist of spares and consumables that need to be stocked at distributor
location is also mentioned.
Sl. No. Part name Quantity
1 RGT ASSEMBLY 1
2 RGT BASE ASSEMBLY 1
3 RGT CONTAINER ASSEMBLY. 1
4 COATED SCREW FOR RGT CONTAINER 4
5 RGT HUB 1
6 RGT MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
7 RGT BELT 1
8 HEATER ASSEMBLY. FOR RGT WINDOW 1
9 RGT INTERRUPTER PLATE 1
10 RGT HOT and COLD PLATE ASSEMBLY 1
11 IMPELLER FAN and DUCT ASSEMBLY 1
12 IMPELLER DUCT 1
13 COLD PLATE FAN ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY 2
14 COLD PLATE O RING 2
15 RGT THERMAL SENSOR ASSEMBLY. 1
16 RGT COVER SENSOR ASSEMBLY. 1
17 ASP ASSEMBLY 1
18 ASP BASE ASSEMBLY 1
19 ASP MOTOR ASSEMBLY. 1
20 ASP BELT 1
21 ASP INTERRUPTOR PLATE 1
22 ASP CONTAINER 1
23 SAMPLE TRAY MOUNTING DISC 1
24 RCT ASSEMBLY (WITHOUT CUVETTES) 1
25 RCT BASE ASSEMBLY 1
26 RCT MOTOR ASSEMBLY. 1
27 CUVETTE RING SET ASSEMBLY (WITHOUT CUVETTES) 1
28 RCT BELT 1
29 RCT INTERRUPTOR PLATE 1
30 RCT JACKET ASSEMBLY. 1
31 RCT SLIP RING ASSEMBLY. 1
32 RCT CUVETTE NUMBER PLATE ASSEMBLY 1
33 KNURLED NUT FOR CUVET NUMBER PLATE (SET OF 2) 2
15-1
34 PVC PLATE FOR RCT TABLE 1

35 RCT CUVETTE LOCKING SPRING (SET OF 8) 16
36 RCT CUVETTE HOLDING SEGMENT (SET OF 8) 8
37 TRAY HOME INTERRUPTOR 3
38 TRAY OPTO ASSEMBLY. 3
39 PHOTOMETER ASSEMBLY 1
40 PHOTOMETER (WITHOUT LAMP MOUNT and CABLE) 1
41 LAMP MOUNT ASSEMBLY 1
42 M5 X 0.8 THREAD WITH 1/4" HEX TO 200 SERIES BARB, 3/ 32" 2
(2.25 MM) ID TUBING – M5220-1
43 COLIMATING LENS ASSEMBLY (12.5MM) 1
44 LENS ASSEMBLY (9MM) 1
45 PHOTOMETER CABLE 1
46 LAMP CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 1
47 LAMP THUMB SCREW (SET OF 2) 2
48 PHOTOMETER DELRIN SPACER SET (SET OF 3) 3
49 CRU ASSEMBLY (COMPLETE) 1
50 CRU BASE ASSEMBLY 1
51 CRU MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
52 CRU BELT 1
53 CRU INTERRUPTOR 1
54 CRU OPTO ASSEMBLY 1
55 LAUNDRY UNIT 1
56 DETERGENT PROBE 1
57 WASH PROBE 5
58 SUCTION PROBE 1
59 DRIER CHIP PROBE 1
60 CRU MANIFOLD and BRACKET ASSEMBLY 1
61 DISPENSING MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1
62 SUCTION MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1
63 DRIER MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1
64 PINCH VALVE and PLATE ASSEMBLY 1
65 R1PT ARM ASSEMBLY 1
66 TUBING - SYRINGE TO R1PT PROBE 1
67 TROUGH - R1 ARM 1
70 R1 / R2 PROBE ASSEMBLY. 2
71 R1 / R2 PROBE HOLDER ASSEMBLY. WITH DELRIN HOUSING 2
72 R1 / R2 LLS PCB ASSEMBLY. 2
73 SPT ARM ASSEMBLY. 1
74 SPT PROBE ASSEMBLY. 1
15-2
75 SPT PROBE HOLDER ASSEMBLY WITH DELRIN HOUSING 1

76 TUBING - SYRINGE TO SAMPLE PROBE 1
77 SPT LLS PCB ASSEMBLY 1
78 SPT TROUGH MOUNTING SUPPORT BRACKET 1
79 TROUGH - S and R2 ARM 2
80 ARM OPTO ASSEMBLY 3
81 ARM VERTICAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 3
82 ARM ROTATIONAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 3
83 ARM BASE PVC PLATE 3
84 STANDS OFF STUD (SET OF 6) 6
85 ARM BELT ROTATIONAL 3
86 ARM BELT VERTICAL 3
87 PROBE ARM BASE 3
88 ARM COVER 3
89 LLS PCB MOUNTING STUDS (SET OF 6) 6
90 15MM TUBE (SET OF 12) 3
91 STIRRER 1 ASSEMBLY 1
93 STIRRER VERTICAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2
94 STIRRER ROTATIONAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2
95 STIRRER OPTO ASSEMBLY 2
96 STIRRER ARM BASE 2
97 STIRRER DC MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2
98 STIRRER VERTICAL INTERRUPTOR 2
99 STIRRER ROTATIONAL BELT 2
100 STIRRER VERTICAL BELT 2
101 TROUGH - STIRRER 2
102 WASTE MANIFOLD 1
103 R1PP SYRINGE ASSEMBLY 1
105 R1 / R2 SYRINGE ASSEMBLY. 2
106 SPP SYRINGE ASSEMBLY 1
107 SPP SYRINGE ASSEMBLY. 1
108 SYRINGE MOTOR ASSEMBLY 3
109 SYRINGE OPTO ASSEMBLY 3
110 SYRINGE BURKERT VALVE ASSEMBLY. 3
111 SYRINGE BELT 3
112 SYRINGE OPTO INTERRUPTOR 3
113 HEX PIN (SET OF 3) 3
114 SPHERICAL BEARING ASSEMBLY. 3
115 SYRINGE PLUNGER SPACER (SET OF 3) 3
15-3
116 SYRINGE PLUNGER O-RING (SET OF 10) 3

117 SYRINGE O-RING (SET OF 10) 6
118 SYRINGE THUMB SCREW (SET OF 3) 3
119 WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
120 SUCTION PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
121 DETERGENT PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
122 BIO-HAZARD WASTE PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
123 R1PT SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
124 SPT/R2PT SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
125 STIRRER SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
126 WATER SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
127 OVERFLOW SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
128 DAMPER ASSEMBLY 1
129 PRESSURE REGULATOR 1
130 DIGITAL PRESSURE GAUGE 1
131 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ASSEMBLY 1
132 PRESSURE TANK ASSEMBLY 1
133 PRESSURE TANK WITH HEATER ASSEMBLY 1
134 DELRIN THUMB SCREW 1
135 BESTO SHUT OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
136 ISOLATION PCB 1
137 INTERFACE PCB 1
138 BASE BOARD 1 PCB 1
139 BASE BOARD 2 PCB 1
140 BACK PLANE 1 PCB 1
141 BACK PLANE 2 PCB 1
142 MOTOR DRIVE PCB (EXCEPT R1PT) 4
143 R1PT, RGT MOTOR DRIVE PCB 1
144 STIRRER PCB 1
145 D.C. DRIVE PCB 1
146 A.C. DRIVE PCB 1
147 LMPS PCB /SMPS 12V/ 5A 1
148 LMPS FAN SUPPLY PCB / VENTILATION FAN ASSY. 1
149 RCT CONTROLLER PCB 1
150 REGULATOR PCB (+/- 5V ) 1
REGULATOR PCB ( +/-15V) 1
151 RGT CONTROLLER 1
152 WGPT PCB ASSEMBLY / FLOAT SENSOR PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
153 12 V SMPS 1
154 24 V SMPS 1
155 36 V SMPS 1
15-4
156 5 V SMPS 1
157 SAMPLE BARCODE READER 1
158 REAGENT BARCODE READER 1
159 SAMPLE BARCODE MOUNTING BRACKET 1
160 REAGENT BARCODE MOUNTING BRACKET 1
161 LMPS FAN ASSEMBLY 1
162 TRANSFORMER TX1 1
165 REAR PANEL SWITCH and LINE FILTER ASSEMBLY 1
166 FRONT PANEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY 1
167 VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH 1
168 GREEN LAMP ASSEMBLY 1
169 RED LAMP ASSEMBLY 1
170 TERMINAL BLOCK 1 1
173 10 FUSE ASSEMBLY TERMINAL 1
174 EARTHING TERMINAL BLOCK 1
175 WASTE MOUNTING BRACKET ASSEMBLY 1
176 4 MM NOZZLE 4
177 11 MM NOZZLE ASSEMBLY 1
178 LOAD CELL D TYPE CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 1
179 LOAD CELL (DI WATER) ASSEMBLY 1
180 LOAD CELL (CLEANING SOLUTION) ASSEMBLY 1
181 LOAD CELL (BH.WASTE) ASSEMBLY 1
182 LOAD CELL (WASTE) ASSEMBLY 1
183 WGPT PCB COVER ASSEMBLY ( 2 PIECE) 1
184 LOAD CELL PLATFORM ASSEMBLY 1
185 DI CAN ASSEMBLY 1
186 DI CAN CAP and SPIGOT ASSEMBLY (WITH SS and PU TUBE) 1
187 CLEANING SOLUTION CAN ASSEMBLY 1
188 CLEANING SOL. CAN CAP and SPIGOT ASSEMBLY 1
189 BIO-HAZARD CAN ASSEMBLY 1
190 BIOHAZARD CAN CAP and SPIGOT ASSEMBLY 1
191 WASTE CAN ASSEMBLY 1
192 WASTE CAN ELBOW SPIGOT and CAP ASSEMBLY (WITH 1
SILICON TUBE)
193 WASTE CAN STRAIGHT NOZZLE SPIGOT AND CAP ASSEMBLY 1
(WITH TYGON TUBE)
194 5 PIECE TOP COVER 1
195 GAS SPRING (SET OF 2) 2
15-5
196 XL-640 DOME ACRYLIC 1

197 XL-640 DOME ACRYLIC CLIPS (SET OF 16) 16
198 VACUUM FORMED OVERFLOW TRAY 1
199 VACUUM FORMED OVERFLOW TRAY BRACKET (SET OF 4) 4
200 VACUUM FORMED OVERFLOW PIPE 1
201 VACUUM FORMED OVERFLOW EXIT NOZZLE 1
202 NUT FOR NOZZLE
203 INTERFACE PCB PROTECTION COVER ASSEMBLY 1
204 TRANSFORMER ACRYLIC COVER 1
205 SPACER FOR PANEL (SET OF 20) 34
206 TUBE - PINCH VALVE 1
207 TUBE SET - VALVE TO CRU MANIFOLD 1
208 TUBE SET - SMALL PUMPS TO CRU 1
209 TUBE SET - TROUGH SUPPLY 1
210 TUBE SET - TROUGH and TRAY DRAIN 1
211 TUBE SET - LAMP COOLING 1
212 TUBE SET - PRESSURE TANK TO SYRINGE 1
213 O-RING CRU MANIFOLD - 14 / 2 MM (SET OF 3) 3
215 POWER CABLE 1
216 CPU TO ANALYZER CABLE 1
217 CALIBRATION PLATE 1
218 PRINTER - EPSON LX300+
219 DI WATER PLANT (S015)
220 FLOAT SENSOR ASSY 4
221 SLEEP MODE PCB ASSY. 1
222 ARM INTERFACE PCB ASSY. 1
223 AUTO START-UP PCB ASSY. 1
224 CANMAX PCB ASSY. 1
225 FRONT PANEL INDICATOR PCB ASSY 1
Accessories and Consumables
1 SAMPLE CUP (PACK OF 1000)
2 SAMPLE TUBE ADAPTER (PACK OF 100) 100
3 RGT TRAY 1
4 RGT COVER 1
5 SAMPLE TRAY (1-50) 1
7 STANDARD TRAY ASSEMBLY 1
8 EMERGENCY TRAY ASSEMBLY 1
9 RCT COVER 1
10 CUVETTE 4C:0609 72
15-6
11 PHOTOMETER LAMP 1
12 CRU ASPIRATION TUBE (SET FOR LAUNDRY) 1
13 CRU DISPENSE TUBE (SET FOR LAUNDRY) 1
14 DRIER CHIP 1
15 50 MICRON FILTER 1
16 TIP ASSEMBLY FOR 100UL SYRINGE 1
18 ANNUAL MAINTENANCE KIT 1
19 CMX COMPLETE TUBING SET 1
20 CMX REAR PANEL TUBING SET 1
21 SET OF FUSES 1
22 SET OF FERRULES 1
23 SET OF CAN STICKERS 1
24 SET OF STICKERS FOR LOAD CELL PLATFORM 1
25 REFERENCE ELECTRODE 1
26 NA ELECTRODE 1
27 K ELECTRODE 1
28 CL ELECTRODE 1
29 LI ELECTRODE - REF 5205 1
30 SPACER ELECTRODE FOR ISE 1
31 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE CLEANING SOLUTION KIT CAT. NO. 1
5421
32 ISE REAGENT PACK (5423-0030 - NO WASTE) 1
33 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE URINE DILUENT 125ML CAT NO 5412 1
34 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE URINE DILUENT 500ML CAT NO.5408 1
15.1. Spares Recommended for Distributor Stocking

Sl. No. Part Name Quantity
1 RGT BASE ASSEMBLY 1
2 RGT HUB 1
3 HEATER ASSEMBLY. FOR RGT WINDOW 1
4 RGT INTERRUPTER PLATE 1
5 RGT HOT and COLD PLATE ASSEMBLY 1
6 IMPELLER FAN and DUCT ASSEMBLY 1
7 ASP BASE ASSEMBLY 1
8 ASP INTERRUPTOR PLATE 1
9 RCT BASE ASSEMBLY 1
10 RCT INTERRUPTOR PLATE 1
11 RCT SLIP RING ASSEMBLY. 1
12 RCT CUVETTE LOCKING SPRING (SET OF 8) 16
13 TRAY HOME INTERRUPTOR 3
14 PHOTOMETER (WITHOUT LAMP MOUNT and CABLE) 1
15-7
15 COLIMATING LENS ASSEMBLY (12.5MM) 1

16 LENS ASSEMBLY (9MM) 1
17 LAMP CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 1
18 CRU BASE ASSEMBLY 1
19 CRU INTERRUPTOR 1
20 LAUNDRY UNIT 1
21 PINCH VALVE and PLATE ASSEMBLY 1
24 SPT ARM ASSEMBLY. 1
25 ARM VERTICAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 3
26 ARM ROTATIONAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 3
27 PROBE ARM BASE 3
30 STIRRER ARM BASE 2
31 STIRRER VERTICAL INTERRUPTOR 2
32 WASTE MANIFOLD 1
35 SPP SYRINGE ASSEMBLY 1
36 SYRINGE OPTO INTERRUPTOR 3
37 WATER PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
38 SUCTION PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
39 PRESSURE REGULATOR 1
40 BESTO SHUT OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
41 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE Cat. No. 5008 1
42 SAMPLE CUP ASSEMBLY 1
43 EXIT TUBE ASSEMBLY 1
44 BOTTOM SEAL KIT 1
45 MAIN PCB COMPLETE WITH PROM 1
46 BACK PLANE 1 PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
47 BACK PLANE 2 PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
48 SAMPLE BARCODE READER 1
49 REAGENT BARCODE READER 1
53 REAR PANEL SWITCH and LINE FILTER ASSEMBLY 1
54 10 FUSE ASSEMBLY TERMINAL 1
55 LOAD CELL D TYPE CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 1
15-8
56 LOAD CELL (DI WATER) ASSEMBLY 1

57 LOAD CELL (CLEANING SOLUTION) ASSEMBLY 1
58 LOAD CELL (BH.WASTE) ASSEMBLY 1
59 LOAD CELL (WASTE) ASSEMBLY 1
60 WGPT PCB COVER ASSEMBLY ( 2 PIECE) 1
61 DI CAN ASSEMBLY 1
62 WASTE CAN ELBOW SPIGOT and CAP ASSEMBLY (WITH 1
SILICON TUBE)
63 WASTE CAN STRAIGHT NOZZLE SPIGOT and CAP ASSEMBLY 1
(WITH TYGON TUBE)
64 XL-640 DOME ACRYLIC 1
65 XL-640 DOME ACRYLIC CLIPS (SET OF 16) 16
66 VACUUM FORMED OVERFLOW PIPE 1
67 INTERFACE PCB PROTECTION COVER ASSEMBLY 1
68 TRANSFORMER ACRYLIC COVER 1
69 TUBE SET - TROUGH and TRAY DRAIN 1
70 CALIBRATION PLATE 1
71 COATED SCREW FOR RGT CONTAINER 4
72 RGT MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
73 RGT BELT 1
74 THERMAL INSULATION BRACKET FOR RGT WINDOW HEATER 1
75 COLD PLATE FAN ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY 2
76 COLD PLATE O RING 2
78 RGT COVER SENSOR ASSEMBLY. 1
79 ASP MOTOR ASSEMBLY. 1
80 ASP BELT 1
81 RCT MOTOR ASSEMBLY. 1
82 CUVETTE RING SET ASSEMBLY (WITHOUT CUVETTES) 1
83 RCT BELT 1
84 RCT CUVETTE HOLDING SEGMENT (SET OF 8) 8
86 LAMP MOUNT ASSEMBLY 1
87 M5 X 0.8 THREAD WITH 1/4" HEX TO 200 SERIES BARB, 3/ 32" 2
(2.25 MM) ID TUBING – M5220-1
88 PHOTOMETER CABLE 1
89 LAMP THUMB SCREW (SET OF 2) 2
91 CRU MOTOR ASSEMBLY 1
92 CRU BELT 1
93 CRU OPTO ASSEMBLY 1
94 DETERGENT PROBE 1
15-9
95 WASH PROBE 5
96 SUCTION PROBE 1
98 CRU MANIFOLD and BRACKET ASSEMBLY 1
99 DISPENSING MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1
100 SUCTION MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1
101 DRIER MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1
103 TROUGH - R1 ARM 1
112 TROUGH - S and R2 ARM 2
114 STANDS OFF STUD (SET OF 6) 6
115 ARM BELT VERTICAL 3
116 ARM COVER 3
117 LLS PCB MOUNTING STUDS (SET OF 6) 6
118 15MM TUBE (SET OF 12) 3
119 STIRRER VERTICAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2
120 STIRRER ROTATIONAL MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2
122 STIRRER DC MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2
123 STIRRER ROTATIONAL BELT 2
124 STIRRER VERTICAL BELT 2
125 TROUGH - STIRRER 2
126 R1 / R2 SYRINGE ASSEMBLY. 2
127 SPP SYRINGE ASSEMBLY. 1
128 SYRINGE MOTOR ASSEMBLY 3
131 SYRINGE BELT 3
132 HEX PIN (SET OF 3) 3
133 SPHERICAL BEARING ASSEMBLY. 3
15-10

137 DETERGENT PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
138 BIO-HAZARD WASTE PUMP ASSEMBLY 1
139 R1PT SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
140 SPT/R2PT SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
141 STIRRER SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
142 WATER SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
143 OVERFLOW SMC VALVE ASSEMBLY 1
144 DAMPER ASSEMBLY 1
145 DIGITAL PRESSURE GAUGE 1
149 CAL A PUMP WITH BRACKET 1
150 CAL B PUMP WITH BRACKET 1
151 ISPS PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
152 ISOLATION PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
153 INTERFACE PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
154 BASE BOARD 1 PCB ASSEMBLY 1
155 BASE BOARD 2 PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
156 MOTOR DRIVE PCB ASSEMBLY. (EXCEPT R1PT) 4
157 R1PT, RGT MOTOR DRIVE PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
158 STIRRER PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
159 D.C. DRIVE PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
160 A.C. DRIVE PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
161 LMPS PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
162 LMPS FAN SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
163 RCT CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
164 ± 15 V REGULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
165 RGT CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY. 1
166 ± 5 V REGULATOR PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
167 WGPT PCB ASSEMBLY 1
168 5 V / 5A SMPS 1
169 12 V / 5A SMPS 1
170 12 V / 20A SMPS 1
171 24 V / 6.3A SMPS 1
172 36 V / 2.8A SMPS 1
173 LMPS FAN ASSEMBLY 1
174 FRONT PANEL SWITCH ASSEMBLY 1
175 GREEN LAMP ASSEMBLY 1
176 RED LAMP ASSEMBLY 1
15-11
177 DI CAN CAP and SPIGOT ASSEMBLY (WITH SS and PU TUBE) 1

178 CLEANING SOL. CAN CAP and SPIGOT ASSEMBLY 1
179 BIOHAZARD CAN CAP and SPIGOT ASSEMBLY 1
180 GAS SPRING (SET OF 2) 2
181 SPACER FOR PANEL (SET OF 20) 34
186 TUBE SET - LAMP COOLING 1
188 TUBE SET - SYRINGE TO VALVE 1
189 TUBE SET - REAR PANEL TO CONTAINERS 1
193 CPU TO ANALYZER CABLE 1
194 USB PCB Assy. 1
195 FLOAT LEVEL SENSOR PCB 1
196 FLOAT SENSOR ASSY. FOR DI WATER 1
197 FLOAT SENSOR ASSY. FOR WASTE 1
198 FLOAT SENSOR ASSY. FOR CLEANING SOLUTION 1
199 FLOAT SENSOR ASSY. FOR BIO HAZARD WASTE 1
1 SAMPLE CUP (PACK OF 1000) User
defined
2 PHOTOMETER LAMP 1
5 DRIER CHIP 1
11 Na ELECTRODE 1
12 K ELECTRODE 1
13 Cl ELECTRODE 1
16 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE CLEANING SOLUTION KIT Cat. No. 1
5421
15-12
18 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE URINE DILUENT 125ml Cat. No. 5412

19 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE URINE DILUENT 500ml Cat. No. 5408 2
20 CUVETTE 4C:0609 72
22 SAMPLE TUBE ADAPTER (PACK OF 100) 100
23 RGT TRAY 1
24 RGT COVER 1
27 STANDARD TRAY ASSEMBLY 1
28 EMERGENCY TRAY ASSEMBLY 1
29 RCT COVER 1
30 SET OF FUSES 1
31 SET OF FERRULES 1
32 SET OF CAN STICKERS 1
15.2. Spares Recommended for Customer Stocking

Sl. No. Part Name Quantity
4 DETERGENT PROBE 1
5 WASH PROBE 5
6 SUCTION PROBE 1
15-13

27 ISOLATION PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
28 INTERFACE PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
29 MOTOR DRIVE PCB ASSEMBLY. (EXCEPT R1PT) 4
30 R1PT, RGT MOTOR DRIVE PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
31 STIRRER PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
32 LMPS PCB ASSEMBLY. 1
38 TUBE SET - SYRINGE TO VALVE 1
39 TUBE SET - REAR PANEL TO CONTAINERS 1
1 SAMPLE CUP (PACK OF 1000) User
defined
2 PHOTOMETER LAMP 1
5 DRIER CHIP 1
11 Na ELECTRODE 1
12 K ELECTRODE 1
13 CL ELECTRODE 1
16 4 CHANNEL ISE MODULE CLEANING SOLUTION KIT Cat. No. 1
5421
20 CUVETTE 4C:0609 72
15-14
16. Adjustment and Verification Procedure

16.1. Verifying Proper Mechanical Function
16.1.1. Verify Light Beam Alignment
Action Observations and Remarks
Turn on the analyzer and Initialize RCT assembly
through the Service Check menu.
1. Remove the CRU unit thumbscrew, lift up the In the initialized or reset position the
laundry unit and gently remove the cuvette, following are the positions of the cuvettes.
which is the path of the light beam. Probe1 - cuvette position 72
2. Insert the light beam, centering gauge (Part No. Probe2 - cuvette position 71
FSPS2723 that is supplied in the accessories
box) in place of the cuvette, making sure it Probe3 - cuvette position 70
touches the wall of the cuvette housing on all Probe4 - cuvette position 69
sides. Probe5 - cuvette position 68
Probe6 - cuvette position 67
Light path - cuvette position 66
Suction probe - cuvette position 65
Drier probe - cuvette position 64
1. Loosen the 3 Allen screws located at the centre Light beam should fall on the centre of the
of the RCT cuvette table; adjust its position such mark on the calibration plate
that the light beam falls on the centre black NOTE: Take care that the centering is not
colored mark on the calibration plate. disturbed while tightening the RCT
2. Tighten the mounting screws. cuvette table mounting screws.
3. Gently put back the cuvette in its position, and fit
the laundry back in place.
16.1.2. Verify Proper Laundry Alignment

Initialize the system, through the Service Check In the initialized or reset position the
menu. following are the positions of the cuvettes.
Light path - cuvette position 66
Suction probe - cuvette position 65
Drier probe - cuvette position 64
4. Disconnect the CRU up/down motor connector. Verify that all laundry probes are in the
5. Gently slide the Laundry vertical shaft/pillar, centre of their respective cuvettes, and
16-1
downwards into the cuvettes. that the cuvette drier (Teflon) is in the
6. To centre the laundry assembly, loosen the four centre of the cuvette.
Allen mounting screws on which the laundry
vertical shaft/pillar is mounted.
7. If required you can also center the laundry
assembly, by adjusting the position by the four
Allen screws on which the entire laundry
assembly is mounted on the analyzer casting.
8. To adjust the circular angle of the laundry
assembly, locate the small Allen screw that is
embedded inside the laundry vertical shaft/pillar
top end
9. To center the individual laundry probes in their
respective cuvettes, loosen the white delrin
screw caps located at the top of the probes.
10. Verify that the cuvette drier and suction probes  Verify that after the cuvette drier and
touch the bottom of the cuvette. suction probe goes down into the
11. In the Service check, go to CRU Unit, and cuvette, the spring loaded probe,
press Initialize > Down. moves up by about 2mm.
12. To adjust the vertical distance traveled by the  NOTE: This is very important
laundry, loosen and adjust the CRU-DOWN  Verify that the remaining five laundry
(lower Opto) sensor. probes also touch the bottom of the
cuvette slightly
 NOTE: This is not very important.
16.1.3. Verify Sample Arm Alignment

The sample arm is aligned with the RCT in the reset position.
The sample arm alignment is done with respect to the sample

cuvette only, and only verification is done at the other positions.

1. Initialize the system, through the Service Check
menu.
2. With the help of a pipette or syringe, pipette 300
to 500 µl of tap water (As tap water has ions for
conduction, Do not use de-ionized or distilled
water) into cuvette number 56 and 62.
3. Place a sample cup filled with tap water in
positions number 1, S1, and B1on the sample
tray.
4. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from the Sample probe mean distance between the
list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough dispense needle and sensor needle to be
To Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT at the centre of the respective cuvette
Arm Down > Execute. NOTE: Take care that the centering is not
16-2
5. The sample probes moves down until it senses disturbed while tightening the Allen screw.
the present of liquid in the cuvette and then
stops.
6. Verify that the hollow dispense needle is in the
centre of the cuvette.
7. Adjust the sample probe as follows.
a) Lift and remove the probe plastic cover and
locate the Allen screw, on the top end of the
arm shaft.
b) Slightly loosen this Allen screw, and rotate
the top plate of the arm, so as to position the
mean distance between the dispense needle
and sensor needle, to be in the centre of the
cuvette. When doing this, make sure that, only
the horizontal top plate rotates and the main
vertical shaft is stationary
c) Tighten the Allen screw.
d) Verify proper centering by repeating steps 1
to 2.
8. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from the Verify that the dispense needle is at the
list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough centre of the sample (Outer), cup number
To Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT 1.
Arm Down > Execute.
The Sample probes moves down until it senses
the present of liquid in cup number 1, and then
stops.
9. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from the Verify that the dispense needle is at the
list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough centre of the standard (outer) cup number
To Std Outer (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT Arm S1.
Down > Execute.
10. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from Verify that the dispense needle is at the
the list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – centre of the standard (inner) cup number
Trough To Std Inner (Cuvette) > Execute > B1.
SPT Arm Down > Execute.
the list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – centre of the SPT drain.
Trough To Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute
> SPT Arm – Sample Outer To Cuvette >
Execute.
12. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from Verify that the mean distance between the
the list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – dispense needle and sensor needle is at
Trough To Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute the centre of the SPT trough.
> SPT Arm – Sample Outer To Cuvette >
Execute > SPT Arm – Cuvette To Trough >
Execute.
the list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – centre of the ISE sample port.
Trough To Sample Outer (ISE) > Execute > To align the probe to the ISE sample port,
SPT Arm – Sample Outer to ISE. loosen the four Allen screws of the ISE
assembly and move the entire ISE
assembly in the direction required, once
properly positioned, tighten the four Allen
16-3
screws.
14. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from Verify that the dispense probe is at the
the list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – centre of the dilution. Cuvette number 56.
Trough To Dilution Cuvette (Cuvette) >
Execute.
15. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from Verify that the probe is at the centre of the
the list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – cuvette number 62.
Trough To Dilution Cuvette (Cuvette) >
Execute > SPT Arm – Dilution Cuvette To
Cuvette > Execute.
16.1.4. Verify Proper Sample Arm Function

Initialize the system, through the service check screen. Go to Service Check,
select Links from the list, and then choose SPT Arm Link > Execute.
The sample arm will move over Sample cup number 1, go down till it senses the
liquid. The syringe plunger moves down, aspirating sample from the cup, the arm
then moves to the appropriate dispense cuvette position, goes down into the
cuvette till it senses liquid stops and then move to the drain position, where the
contents of the probe is discarded.
The analyzer does this multiple times till the STOP button is clicked, the sample
cup is empty, or an error has occurred.
16.1.5. Verify Reagent 1 Arm Alignment

NOTE: The Reagent 1 arm is aligned with the RCT in the offset position.
NOTE: The Reagent 1 arm alignment is done with respect to cuvette number 64
only, and only verification is done at the other positions.
Action Observation and Remark
menu.
2. In the Service check, go to RCT Tray frame, and
choose Initialize > Offset.
3. Place a large 50 ml reagent bottle filled with tap
water in position number 1 on the reagent tray (use
only tap water as it has ions for conduction, Do not
use de-ionized or distilled water)
4. Now, go to Service Check, select R1 Arm from the Verify that the Reagent probe dispense
list and choose Initialize > R1 Arm – To Reagent needle, is at the centre of cuvette
Outer > Execute > R1 Arm – Reagent Outer To number 64.
Cuvette. The Reagent1 probes moves over to NOTE: Take care that the centering is
cuvette number 64. not disturbed while tightening the Allen
NOTE: The probe has two needles (1.Dispense needle screw.
that is hollow and 2. Sensor needle). Verify that the
hollow dispense needle is in the centre of the cuvette.
5. Adjust the Reagent 1 probe as follows.
a) Lift and remove the probe plastic cover and
locate the Allen screw, on the top end of the arm
16-4
shaft.
b) Slightly loosen this Allen screw, and rotate the
top plate of the arm, so as to position the dispense
needle in the centre of the cuvette. When doing
this, make sure that, only the horizontal top plate
rotates and the main vertical shaft is stationary.
d) Verify proper centering by repeating steps 1 to 2.
6. Go to Service Check, select R1 Arm from the list Verify that the probe is at the centre of
and choose Initialize > R1 Arm – To Reagent the reagent bottle at position number 1
Inner > Execute > R1 Arm Down > Execute. for inner and 56 for the outer on the
7. Go to Service Check, select R1 Arm from the list reagent tray.
and choose Initialize > R1 Arm – To Reagent
Outer > Execute > R1 Arm Down > Execute.
and choose Initialize > R1 Arm – To Reagent the cuvette
Inner > Execute > R1 Arm – Reagent Inner To
Cuvette > Execute.
and choose Initialize > R1 Arm – To Reagent the R1PT trough.
Cuvette > Execute > R1 Arm Cuvette To Trough
> Execute.
16.1.6. Verify Proper Reagent 1 Arm Function

Initialize the system, trough the service Check menu.
To rotate the RCT tray to the offset position, in the Service Check, go to RCT
Tray frame, and choose Initialize > Offset.
Now go to Service Check, select Links from the list, and then choose R1 Arm
Link > Execute.
The Reagent arm will move over Reagent bottle number 1, go down till it senses
the liquid. The syringe plunger moves down, aspirating reagent from the bottle, the
arm then moves to the appropriate dispense cuvette position , pauses and then
moves to the drain position, where the contents of the probe is discarded. The
analyzer does this multiple times till the STOP button is clicked, the reagent bottle
is empty, or an error has occurred.
16.1.7. Verify Reagent 2 Arm Alignment

NOTE: The Reagent 2 arm is aligned with the RCT in the reset position.
NOTE: The Reagent 2 arm alignment is done with respect to cuvette No 38 only,
and only verification is done at the other positions.
menu.
2. To rotate the RCT tray to the offset position, In the
16-5
Service check, go to RCT Tray frame, and choose

Initialize > Offset.
3. Place a large 50 ml reagent bottle filled with tap
water in position number 1, and a small 20 ml
reagent bottle, filled with tap water in position
number 4, on the reagent tray (use only tap water
as it has ions for conduction; Do not use de-
ionized or distilled water).
4. Now, go to Service Check, select R2 Arm from the Verify that the Reagent probe dispense
list and choose Initialize > R2 Arm – To Reagent needle, is at the centre of cuvette (R2)
Inner > Execute > R2 Arm – Reagent Inner To number 38.
Cuvette NOTE: Take care that the centering is
5. Adjust the Reagent 2 probe as follows. not disturbed while tightening the Allen
a) Lift and remove the probe plastic cover and screw.
locate the Allen screw, on the top end of the arm
shaft.
top plate of the arm, so as to position the dispense
needle in the centre of the cuvette. When doing this,
make sure that, only the horizontal top plate rotates
and the main vertical shaft is stationary
d) Verify proper centering by repeating steps 1 to 2.
6. Go to Service Check, select R2 Arm from the list NOTE: The Reagent 2 arm verification
and choose Initialize > R2 Arm – To Reagent on the reagent tray is done only for
Inner > Execute > R2 Arm Down > Execute. Reagent inner at position number 51.
The Reagent 2 probe will move down into the Verify that the probe is at the centre of
reagent bottle number 51, until it senses liquid. the reagent bottle at position number
51 on the reagent tray.
and choose Initialize > R2 Arm – To Reagent the cuvette on RCT
Cuvette > Execute.
and choose Initialize > R2 Arm – To Reagent the R2PT trough.
Cuvette > Execute > R2 Arm –Cuvette To Trough
> Execute.
16.1.8. Verify Proper Reagent 2 Arm Function

Initialize the system, trough the Service Check menu.
To rotate the RCT tray to the reset position, go to Service Check screen, go to
RCT Tray frame, and press Initialize
Now go to Service Check, select Links from the list, and then choose R2 Arm
Link > Execute.
The Reagent arm 2 will move over Reagent bottle number 56, go down till it
senses the liquid. The syringe plunger moves down, aspirating reagent from the
16-6
bottle, the arm then moves to the appropriate dispense cuvette position, pauses
and then moves to the drain position, where the contents of the probe is discarded.
The analyzer does this multiple times till the Emergency Stop is clicked, the
reagent bottle is empty, or an error has occurred.
16.1.9. Verify Stirrer Arm Alignment

The Stirrer arm is aligned with the RCT in the offset position.
The Stirrer arm alignment is done with respect to cuvette number

62 for stirrer paddle number 1 and cuvette Number 38 for stirrer
paddle number 2 and with the paddles rotating; only verification is
done at the other positions.
Action Observation and Remarks

menu.
2. To rotate the RCT tray to the offset position, go to
Service check screen, go to RCT Tray frame,
and press Initialize > Offset.
3. For stirrer 1, go to Service Check, select STR1 Verify that Stirrer 1 is at the centre of the
from the list, and choose Initialize > STR1 – cuvette No 62 and Stirrer 2 is at centre of
Rotate To Cuvette > Execute. spare hole on 5 piece top.
4. For stirrer 2, go to Service Check, select STR2
from the list, and choose Initialize > STR2 –
Rotate To Cuvette > Execute.
5. In the Service Check, select STR1 from the list, Verify that the stirrer 1 is at the centre of
and choose Initialize > STR1 – Rotate To cuvette No 62 and Stirrer2 is at the
Cuvette > Execute > STR 1 Down. centre of cuvette No 38.
6. Select the STR1 On to start the Stirrer paddle NOTE: Make sure that the stirrer paddles
motors. do not touch the walls and the bottom of
7. Adjust the Stirrer paddles as follows. the cuvette.
a) Lift and remove the Stirrer arm plastic cover NOTE: Take care that the centering is
and locate the Allen screw, on the top end of the not disturbed while tightening the Allen
arm shaft. screw.
top plate of the arm, so as to position the paddle
No 1 in the centre of cuvette no 62 and paddle No
2 in the centre of No 38., When doing this, make
sure that, only the horizontal top plate rotates and
16-7
the main vertical shaft is stationary

d) Verify proper centering by repeating steps 1 to
2.
16.1.10. Verify Sample Tray Alignment

The X – axis is aligned using the Sample arm alignment procedure.
The Y – axis is aligned using the Sample Tray alignment procedure.
Action Observation and Remarks

1. Go to Service Check, select SPT Arm from the
list, and choose Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough
To Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute.
2. Place a sample cup filled with tap water in sample

positions number 1 on the sample tray and
positions S1, and B1 on the standard tray. (As tap
water has ions for conduction, do not use de-
ionized or distilled water).
3. Now select SPT Arm from the list, and choose Verify that the sample probe dispense
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To Sample Outer needle, is at the centre of sample cup No
(Cuvette) > Execute > SPT Arm Down > 1.
Execute > SPT Arm Down > Execute.
The Sample probes moves down until it senses
the present of liquid in the Cup No 1 and then
stops.
4. In the Service Check, go to Sample Tray frame, NOTE: Take care that the centering is
and press Initialize. not disturbed while tightening the Phillips
5. Adjust the sample tray as follows. screws.
a) Lift and remove the sample tray, locate the 3
Phillips screw, on the centre shaft.
b) Slightly loosen the three Phillips screws, and
slowly rotate the top plate of the shaft, in the
direction in which the correction is required, when
doing this, make sure that, only the horizontal top
plate rotates and the main vertical shaft is
stationary.
c) Tighten the Phillips screw.
d) Place the sample tray back in position.
16-8
16.1.11. Verify Reagent Tray Alignment

The Reagent tray is aligned with reference to Reagent bottle
number1 and Reagent 1 arm probe only.
The Y – axis is aligned using the Reagent 1 arm alignment procedure.

The X – axis is aligned using the Reagent Tray alignment procedure.

menu.
2. Place a Large 50 ml Reagent bottle filled with
tap water in Positions number 1 on the reagent
tray (As tap water has ions for conduction, Do
not use de-ionized or distilled water).
3. Now go to Service Check, select R1 Arm from Verify that the dispense needle is in the
the list, and choose Initialize > R1 Arm – To centre of the Reagent bottle.
Reagent Inner > Execute > R1 Arm Down >
Execute. The reagent probes moves down
until it senses the present of liquid in the
BOTTLE number 1 and then stops.
4. In the Service Check, go to Reagent Tray NOTE: Take care that the centering is not
frame, and press Initialize. disturbed while tightening the Allen screws.
5. Adjust the Reagent tray as follows.
a) Lift and remove the Reagent tray, locate the
3 Allen screws, on the centre shaft as shown in
figure 9.1.
b) Slightly loosen the three Allen screws, and
slowly rotate the top plate of the shaft, in the
direction in which the correction is required,
when doing this, make sure that, only the
horizontal top end rotates and the main vertical
shaft is stationary.
d) Place the Reagent tray back in position.
16-9
16.2. Load cell Verification Procedure

Action Observation and Result
Place the 20 liters Can with only 2 liters of water The buzzer should turn ON and the LED
in it on the “DI water” tray. marked “Water” should blink.
Apply slight pressure on the can. The buzzer should turn OFF and the LED
marked “Water” should go OFF.
Place a 10 liters Can with only 1.5 liters of water The buzzer should turn ON and the LED
in it, on the “Cleaning solution” tray. marked “DET” should blink.
Apply slight pressure on the Can. The buzzer should turn OFF and the LED
marked “Det” should go OFF.
Place the 10 liters Can with only 7.5 liters of The buzzer should turn ON and the LED
water in it on the “Hazard. Waste” tray. marked “Haz Waste” should blink.
Remove about 0.5 liters of water from the can. The buzzer should turn OFF and LED marked
“Haz. Waste” should go OFF.
Place the 20 liters Can with only 17.5 liters of The buzzer should turn ON and the LED
water in it on the “Waste” tray. marked “Waste” should blink.
Remove about 1 liter of water from the Can. The buzzer should turn OFF and the LED
marked “Waste” should go OFF.
16.3. Pressure Tank Verification Procedure

To adjust the pressure, locate the pressure Pressure gauge should be between 1.0 and
regulator, located just above the pressure tank, 1.1 bar.
with the help of a spanner, unlock the locking
nut with the help of an Allen key, rotate and
16-10
adjust the pressure regulator.
In the Service Check, go to Valve And Pump Observe a small fountain of water in the
frame, and press On for the following: following.
 SPT-R2PT Trough Valve  SPT and R2PT trough
 R1PT Trough Valve  R1PT trough
 Stirrer Trough Valve  Stirrer trough
Switch ON all the switches together and keep Verify that the water flow should be smooth
the hydraulic assembly ON for some time, till and there should be no leakages and that the
the entire water line is primed and free of pressure gauge does not fluctuate.
trapped air bubbles.
16.4. Laundry Flow Adjustment Procedure

16.4.1. Detergent or Cleaning Solution Flow Adjustment
Procedure
Action Observations
Go to Maintenance from the main screen, Monitor the flow of cleaning solution from the
go to Wash frame, select CUVETTE cleaning solution can, through the DET pump and
RINSE, and then press START. the tube to the first laundry (Detergent Wash)
probe, and into the first cuvette of washing cycle,.
To regulate the detergent flow, remove the right
side panel and adjust the flow regulator on the top
of the Detergent pump - First loosen the Lock nut.
Clockwise increases the flow. Turning
anticlockwise decreases the flow of cleaning
solution.
Adjust the flow such that Detergent in the first
cuvette fills to about 2/3rd of the Cuvette volume.
Verify that there is no spillage of detergent from
any of the cuvettes.
Observe this carefully for multiple rinse cycles.
16.4.2. CRU Water Flow Adjustment Procedure

Go to Maintenance from the main screen, Monitor the flow of cleaning solution from the
go to Wash frame, select CUVETTE cleaning solution can to the DET pump, trough the
RINSE, and then press START. tubing to the first laundry probe, and into the first
cuvette.
To regulate the detergent flow, remove the right
side panel and locate the black colored, flow
regulator on the top of the detergent pump.
Adjust it in order to enable the detergent flow into
the first cuvette, to fill up to 3/4 of the total volume
of the cuvette.
Verify that there is no spillage of detergent from
any of the cuvette.
Observe this carefully for multiple rinse cycles.
16-11
16.5. Temperature Verification Procedure

16.5.1. Reagent Temperature Verification Procedure
1. Fill a 20 ml reagent bottle, place it on the reagent tray, cover the reagent
tray with the reagent tray cover, wait for about an hour, till the temperature
has stabilized.
2. Insert a sensitive thermal measuring device, into the reagent bottle and
measure the temperature,
3. From the Service Check screen, go to Temperature frame, and press
Read. The current temperature of the reagent tray will be displayed. Verify
the temperature of the reagent tray. The temperature displayed should be
approximately 12 to 15 °C lower than the ambient room temperature.
4. The measured temperature and the displayed temperatures should
approximately match.
16.5.2. Reaction Temperature Verification Procedure

Reaction tray temperature should be measured only after the
analyzer has reached thermal stability by having completed a warm
up time of at least 30 minutes.
After having reached thermal stability, introduce a thermistor into a cuvette no 34
filled with 180 µl of cold (7°C) DI water, make sure that the measuring device is
completely inserted into the liquid wait for about 5 minutes and note down the
reading; it should be 37 ± 0.2 °C.
From the Service Check screen, go to Temperature frame, and press Read. The
current temperature of the reagent tray will be displayed. Verify the temperature of
the reagent tray. The temperature displayed should match the value read using
thermistor.
16.6. Probe Dispense Verification (R1, R2, and Sample)

16.6.1. Sample
From the Service Check screen, select SPT Arm, and choose Initialize > Trough
To Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT Arm Down > Execute > SPT Arm
Up > Execute > SPT Arm – Sample Outer to Cuvette > Execute > SPT Arm
Down > Execute > SPT Arm Up > Execute > SPT Arm – Cuvette To Trough >
Execute.
Now go to Valve and Pump frame, and press SPT Clean Valve to On.
Check and confirm that a clear uninterrupted straight jet of water emerges from the
probe that is free of any trapped air bubbles. Do these till the entire tubing and
probe is completely primed and free of air bubbles.
16-12
16.6.2. Reagent 1
From the Service Check screen, select R1 Arm, and choose Initialize > R1 Arm
–To Reagent Outer > Execute > R1 Arm Down > Execute > R1 Arm Up >
Execute > R1 Arm – reagent Outer to Cuvette > Execute > R1 Arm Down >
Execute > R1 Arm Up > Execute > R1 Arm – Cuvette To Trough > Execute..
Now go to Valve and Pump frame, and press R1PT Clean Valve to On.
probe that is free of any trapped air bubbles. Do this till the entire tubing and probe
is completely primed and free of air bubbles
16.6.3. Reagent 2
From the Service Check screen, select R2 Arm, and choose Initialize > R2 Arm
– To Reagent Outer > Execute > R2 Arm Down > Execute > R2 Arm Up >
Execute > R2 Arm – Reagent Outer to Cuvette > Execute > R2 Arm Down >
Execute > R2 Arm Up > Execute > R2 Arm – Cuvette To Trough > Execute.
Now go to Valve and Pump frame, and press R2PT Clean Valve to On.
probe that is free of any trapped air bubbles. Do this till the entire tubing and probe
is completely primed and free of air bubbles
16.7. Photometer Verification Procedure

Photometer check procedure should be carried out only after the
analyzer and the lamp has reached thermal stability after having
completed a warm up time of at least 30 minutes.
1. In the Service Check screen, click on AUTO SPAN, and then press
START. The analyzer will automatically start a cuvette rinse and prepare a
fresh clean cuvette, fill it with de-ionized water and place it in the light path,
and will automatically check the transmitted light from this from this cuvette,
and adjust the gain of each wavelength of the photometer, to obtain an
acceptable signal level for processing of individual wavelengths.
2. The gain values will be displayed in the Gain(s) field with its corresponding
wavelengths. The wavelength for the 340 nm should be between, 70 to 125.
3. Now click on STOP, click on the MANUAL SPAN, and click on the START.
Select the individual detector wavelengths by clicking on them and note
down the gain values.
4. The displayed gain values in the Gain(s) for 505 to 660 nm Wavelength
should be in between 70 to 240.
5. Go to Maintenance screen, and perform the CUVETTE RINSE.
Check and verify proper cuvette blank readings for all wavelengths.
16-13
16.8. Clot Detector Circuit Tuning Procedure

Go to the Service Check screen, click on Sample Arm syringe valve. Sample arm
probe will be filling up with water
After one minute click OFF the Sample Arm Syringe

Refer the fig of Clot Detector pcb assembly ELS32015R4 for test point details &
tune the pcb as given below
16-14
Connect the multimeter probe at TP1 (Offset voltage) & TP2 (Gnd) on clot PCB
assy.
OFFSET NULL: Check the voltage on the multimeter. Set the voltage to 0.0 volts
by tuning POT P3 on PCB assy.
Vacuum: Connect the multimeter probe at TP4 (Vacuum Test) w.r.t TP2 (Gnd) set
the voltage at -1.20 V by tuning the POT P2 on PCB assy.
Pressure: Connect the multimeter probe at TP3 (Pressure Test) w.r.t TP2 (Gnd)
set the voltage at +2.5V by tuning the POT P1 on PCB assy.
16-15
17. Programming Procedures

17.1. Programming ST10 Micro Controller
The ST10 flasher software should be installed on the computer.
17.1.2. Programming Procedure

1. Connect the one end of the serial cable to the analyzer’s programming port
and other end to the computer’s COM1 or COM2 port.
The ST10 microcontroller is programmed through the
regular communication port of the analyzer and the JTAG
interface connected to the analyzer program port serves the
purpose of switching the ST10 to program mode.
2. Connect the JTAG interface cable (Connector P2, 9 pin D type female
connector) to the analyzer (9 pin D type male connector P1).
3. Turn on the analyzer.
4. Open ST10 Flasher 2.02 software.
If all cables are connected properly then following screen appears.
17-1
5. Click Set Port, and configure the following details as shown in the Serial
port screen.
6. Click Apply to confirm the settings.

7. Click Reload Monitor.
Ignore steps 5 to 7 if these settings are already applied.
8. On the main screen, click to open the required hex file.
17-2
9. Select the appropriate hex file (in .h86 format), and then click OK.
The selected hex file automatically loads into the on-chip flash memory.
10. Click Program and Verify to trigger the programming operation.
Now the loaded hex file is transferred to the ST10 and programmed into the
embedded flash memory. Once it is done, the confirmation message
“Program flash memory = OK” will be displayed on the main screen.
The error message will be displayed on the software main screen
only if the analyzer is not turned on and serial cable is
disconnected between the computer and the analyzer.
The messages are:
InitMonitor failed.
Monitor: BSL: No acknowledge Received.
Reset your application and reload the monitor.
Com: Receive: Timeout or Lost of data
RESET your application and click on the RELOAD button.
The default settings for comport will be com1. If you want to
change the different com port for communication then Refer steps
5 to 8 of section 17.1.2. Programming Procedures.
17.2. FPGA
The Xilinx ISE 7.1 software should be installed on the computer.
17.2.2. Programming Procedure

1. Connect the one end of the JTAG interface cable (Connector P2, 9 pin D
type female connector) to the analyzer’s port (9 pin D type male connector
P1) and connect the other end (D-type 25 pin male connector) to the
computer’s parallel port.
2. Once the cable is connected, turn on the analyzer.
3. Open the Xilinx ISE 7.1 software.
4. To open, choose Start > All Programs > Xilinx ISE 7.1 > Accessories >
iMPACT from the windows XP desktop.
17-3
5. On the Boundary Scan tab, place the pointer on the white surface area,
right click and choose Initialize Chain.
The system will automatically detect the device in the boundary-scan chain
and displays a message with a dialog box.
6. Once the device is detected, the image on the Boundary Scan tab turns into
green color.
7. Right click on the image, and choose Assign New Configuration File.
8. Select the .mcs file from the appropriate location and click Open.
9. In the Boundary Scan tab, right click on the image and choose Program.
17-4
10. On clicking Program, the Program Options dialog box appears. Click Ok.
This will start executing the command and operation status will be displayed
on the screen. Once it is finished, the “Programming Succeeded” message
will be displayed on the screen. If the “Programming Failed” is displayed,
then re-checks the connections and redo the same process again.
11. Restart the analyzer.
17.2.3. Cable Drawings

 Connection details of JTAG interface cable between PC parallel port and
JTAG interface module.
17-5
 Connection details of JTAG interface cable between analyzer

communication port (CON2) and JTAG interface module.
 Connection details of programming cable assembly between interface PCB

connectors and on rear panel of the analyzer
17-6
 JTAG interface connection scheme
 Interface PCB to rear panel CON2 programming cable assembly

(RELCW000876NLCN /101404).
17-7
Whenever the programming kit for XL-640 is requested by services,

then the following kit is dispatched.
 CABLE ASSEMBLY INTERFACE PCB J9 TO REAR PANEL CON2

PROGRAMMING CWS5135 R5 (/ 101404).JTAG INTERFACE
PROGRAMMING CABLE ASSEMBLY – (RELCW000888NLBN)
 CABLE ASSEMBLY JTAG INTERFACE PROGRAMMING CWS5136 R2– (/
101405).
 CABLE ASSEMBLY TAG INTERFACE TO PC PROGRAMMING CWS5137
R3 – (/ 101406).
 ASSEMBLED JTAG INTERFACE PCB ASSEMBLY CONFORMING TO
CODE (/ 105020) ALONG WITH JTAG TOOL BOX CONFORMING TO
CODE (/ 105382).
 A CD comprising of
 Application software: ST10 flasher version 2.2, for down loading
program files into ST10.
 Application software: Xilinx ISE 7.1, for down loading program files into
FPGA’s.
17.3. Auto-startup PCB for downloading H86 or .mcs

Files
Before downloading the files, make sure that the auto startup PCB
is installed in the analyzer.
17-8
The function of this board is to start up the analyzer automatically as per operator’s
scheduled time and to perform the shutdown and maintenance operation
automatically.
The auto startup PCB assembly is located next to AC Drive card inside the
analyzer.
Once the auto startup board is installed, when the analyzer is turned on, the
interface board will not receive power supply because it is routed through auto
startup board. So in order to load H86 or MCS file into the interface board it is
necessary to initially start the analyzer through auto startup board.
Follow these steps to load the file (H8 or .mcs) through auto startup PCB.
1. Install Instrument On/Off program on your computer. This program is
provided in the application installation CD.
2. To install, double-click on the Instrument_On_Off.exe, and click Run.
3. Select the appropriate COM port list on which the analyzer is connected.
4. After selecting the com port, select ON option, and click Send to turn on the
analyzer.
5. Now you can download ST10 using ST10Flasher or mcs file using Impact,
provided the programming tool is already connected between the PC and
analyzer before turning on the analyzer.
6. Once the H86 or mcs file downloading is finished, turn off the analyzer. This
can be directly from the machine or by selecting OFF option from the
Instrument On/OFF tool.
17-9
17-10
18. Digital Pressure Indicator

18.1. Digital Pressure Indicator (APC33-W)
18.2. Access for different Settings
18-1
18.3. HI/LO Pressure Setting Procedure
1. Connect the digital pressure module connector on the Base Board 2 PCB
“PRE SENSOR”. Connector > Insert tubing > Turn on machine.
2. Press increase push button more than 3 to 4 seconds.

3. Set pressure upper level P1 = 1.20 (Use up/DN key for increase or
decrease pressure) Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter
P2.
4. Set pressure level lower P2 = 0.80 (Use up/DN key for increase or decrease
pressure) after 4 to 5 seconds the display will come in normal mode.
18-2
18.4. Mode Configuration
Set the basic pressure switch settings as mentioned below

1. Press MODE KEY for 3 sec.
2. Digital pressure indicator in the configuration mode select
a. Pressure unit. = bar.
18-3
Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter.

b. Detection mode (General purpose) = F-1.
c. Operating mode (Standard) = std.
d. Control output = noo.
e. Zero shift input = in.
f. Chatter prevention, set response time. = 5 (msec).
g. Display color (When pressure within limit Green and when out of limit
red.) = rGr.
h. Power mode (Standard) = nor.
i. After above setting press Mode key Module will display the present
pressure.
To Lock key pad to avoid changes in Parameter Setting > Press and hold either
UP or DN key at least 3 seconds while pressing Mode key will lock the key pad
and wait till LOC display to flash. The same key combination will deactivate the
Key lock feature.
18.5. Error Check during Run

1. Adjust the pressure with help of pinch valve.> Increase pressure above
1.20 bar. Color of reading on pressure display turns from Green to Red
above 1.20 bar.
2. Adjust pressure at 1 bar. Color of pressure display changes from Red to
Green below 1.15 bar pressure. (Green color from .60 to 1.20bar).
3. During run decrease pressure from .9 bar to .5 bar. When pressure goes
below 0.80 bars on application screen error appeared “Check pressure
level” and sampling get paused.
4. Increase pressure from 0.50 to 0.90 bars. When pressure goes above 0.85
bar Error message get disappeared from application screen and sampling
get start for remaining schedule.
18-4
5. During run increase the pressure from 0.90 bars to 1.25. When pressure
goes up above the 1.20 bar, the pressure error displayed on application
screen and pressure indicator color change from green to red.
6. When pressure decreases below 1.15 bar indicator color change from red to
green and error message get disappeared from application screen and start
sampling again for pending schedule paused.
18.6. Operating Procedure for Pressure Sensor

Panasonic – DP102
18-5
18-6
18-7
18-8
18-9
18-10
18-11
It is recommended to set the Lower Pressure level of DP-102

pressure sensor to 0.6 bar
18.7. Error Check during Run

Adjust the pressure with help of pinch valve.> Increase pressure above 1.20
bar. Error LED displayed at top side of Pressure sensor.
Adjust pressure at 1 bar. Error LED will be turned OFF.
During run decrease pressure from .9 bar to .5 bar. When pressure goes below
0.60 bar , Display color changed to RED & on application screen error
appeared “Check pressure level” and sampling get paused.
Increase pressure from 0.50 to 0.90 bars. When pressure goes above 0.85 bar
Error message get disappeared from application screen and sampling get start
for remaining schedule , Error LED turned OFF & display colour recovered.
During run increase the pressure from 0.90 bars to 1.25. When pressure goes
up above the 1.20 bar, the pressure error displayed on application screen and
Error LED turned ON.
When pressure decreases below 1.15 bar , Error LED turned OFF and error
message get disappeared from application screen and start sampling again for
pending schedule paused.
18-12
19. Replacement, Alignment, and Calibration

Procedures
19.1. Replacement Procedure
19.1.1. Lamp Replacement
The photometer lamp replacement should be done by well-trained
authorized person only.
1. Turn off the analyzer. Allow the lamp to cool down.

2. Remove the RCT cover.
3. Remove cuvette the retaining plate by unscrewing the nuts.
19-1
4. Rotate the RCT table window to view proper lamp terminals.
Lamp
terminals
5. Loosen the lamp terminals by rotating them anticlockwise.
6. Loosen the lamp fixing grub screw using Allen key.
Allen Key
Grub screw
19-2
7. Take new lamp and clean it properly to avoid any finger impression. Place
the new halogen lamp gently and tighten the grub screw.
8. Fix the lamp connection and tighten the backlit lamp terminals.
9. Fix the cuvette retaining plate.
10. Ensure the alignment of RCT and laundry unit, before switching on the
machine
11. Perform cuvette rinse and check manual span result.
19.1.2. Probe Replacement

1. Turn off the analyzer. Remove the arm cover.
19-3
2. Remove the 2 pin connector and ensure probe wire and wire plug removed
properly.
3. Loosen the screws of the tube guide plate of antis puttering kit clamp using
a screw driver.
4. Remove screw from one side and rotate the tube guide plate of antis
puttering kit clamp.
19-4
5. Remove Teflon tube (syringe to probe) gently; ensure water does not spill
over the level sensing PCB.
6. Remove the probe from probe holder by rotating it in clockwise direction.

Gently lift the probe upwards to remove it.
7. Insert the new probe and Teflon tube correctly.

The Teflon tube must fit tightly onto the probe, if not, cut off
the flared end of the Teflon tube and refit it firmly.
8. Ensure proper connection of 2 pin connector on level sensing PCB. Kindly

ensure probe sense wire connection should be at pin 1 of connector 5264-
02.
19-5
9. Mount the tube guide plate of antis puttering kit clamp properly.
10. Check the physical alignment, and ensure probe height.
11. Turn on the analyzer, and initialize all the assemblies.
12. Check the internal probe cleaning, ensure no leakage.
13. Confirm respective arm alignment before starting the bio-chemistry run.
19.1.3. Syringe Replacement

Two types of syringes are available:
 Sapphire syringe
 ITO syringe
Before replacing the syringe, make sure the type of syringe used in
the analyzer, and follow the appropriate procedure.
19.1.3.1. Sapphire Syringe Replacement Procedure

1. Switch off the analyzer. Wait for some time so that the pressure in pressure
tank drops to zero.
2. Locate the three syringes by removing front panel of the instrument.
3. Choose the appropriate syringe to be removed.

4. Loosen the Diba connector located at the top of the syringe to remove the
Teflon tube by rotating it in anticlockwise direction.
19-6
5. Grip and disconnect the silicon tube from the inlet of the Burkert valve which
is located on the left side of the syringe.
6. With the help of Allen screw, loosen the screw located on the top of the
syringe assembly.
7. Gently pull the syringe assembly towards you and away from the syringe
assembly resting plate.
19-7
8. Replace with the new syringe assembly and place all the tubing back in
place.
19.1.3.2. ITO Syringe Replacement Procedure

1. Locate the three syringes by removing the front panel of the instrument.
Sample syringe 100 μl
Reagent 1 Syringe 500 μl
Reagent 2 Syringe 500 μl
2. Grip the Teflon tube located on the top of the dilutor syringe and slide it out.
NOTE: Make sure the tubing should not get pinch.
NOTE: Absorb the water droplets that may drip with the help of a tissue
paper.
19-8
3. Grip the silicon tube located in the front of the dilutor syringe and slide it out.
4. With the help of a spanner loosen the bolt at the bottom of the plunger.
NOTE: There is a red O ring located against the face of the bolt and a
metallic cylindrical spacer that may fall off on opening the bolt, take the
necessary precautions to ensure that they do not get lost.
5. With the help of an Allen key loosen the two Allen screws located at the top
of the dilutor syringe.
6. Gently pull the syringe towards you and away from the dilutor assembly.
Install the new dilutor syringe in place. Loosely fit the two Allen screws
located on the top of the dilutor. With the help of a spanner fit the bolt at the
bottom of the plunger.
NOTE: Make sure that the black rubber washer is placed between the face
of the bolt and the plunger; also make sure that the metallic cylindrical
spacer is placed between the plunger inner side and the driving shaft.
19-9
7. Follow the same procedure which you followed at the time of uninstalling
the syringe.
8. Un pack the new syringe, pull the plunger half way down make sure that the
Teflon tip does not get damaged. Slide the new syringe into place and
loosely fit with the Allen screws.
9. With the help of a spanner tight the bolt at the bottom of the plunger.
NOTE: There is a red O ring located against the face of the bolt and a
metallic cylindrical spacer that may fall off on opening the bolt, take the
necessary precautions to ensure that they do not get lost.
10. Place all the tubing back in place.
19.2. Alignment Procedures

19.2.1. Probe Alignment
19.2.1.1. Pre-requisite
 Jig for probe height alignment (CM, D5).
Middle step of go / no-go
gauge to be used for
probe height setting
GO / NO-GO gauge
Reference base
19.2.1.2. Procedure
1. Initialize the arm assembly.
2. Initialize the RCT assembly for Sample and R2 Probe alignment.
3. Place the RCT in offset mode for R1 probe and Stirrers height setting.
19-10
4. Remove the cuvette holding segment nearer to cuvette which is come under
the probe when move the probe towards RCT in service check.
5. Insert the reference base into the cuvette which is come under the probe
when move the probe towards RCT in service check.
6. Rotate the arm toward cuvette using necessary service check commands.
7. Place plain GO / NO-GO gauge plain face on reference base and slide it
toward the probe, with thinner section moved in first. See figure below.
8. Check the gap or interference between probe tip and GO / NO-GO gauge
middle step. Probe tip should touch to middle step to get the require probe
height.
9. If required, adjust the probe height by adjusting the up-down / vertical Opto
sensor to get the above condition (serial number 8).
Make sure that the jigs are clean before using it for calibration.
After height setting process is completed, you must check the
respective cuvette at particular location where the jig is inserted
for any particle’s left out in cuvette.
19-11
19.3. Calibration Procedures

19.3.1. RCT Temperature Calibration
1. Connect the one end of the external communication cable to the PC Com
port which is available.
2. Now, disconnect the three pin (M) connector from the (J12) from the RCT
heater PCB from the analyzer.
J12 Connector
Three - Pin Connector
3. Connect the other end of the external communication cable to J12

connector on RCT heater PCB assembly.
Other end of the

external cable
Three - Pin Connector
19-12
4. Once the connection is done, turn on the analyzer.

5. Install the Terminal.exe software from the supplied installation CD.
6. After installing the software, follow the instructions for setting the RCT
temperature.
a. Restart the computer.
b. Open Terminal.exe software, and go to Software > Setting >
Communication >.
c. Enter the details for the following.
Baud rate : 9600
Data bits :8
Stop bit :1
Parity : None
Connector : Select the appropriate com port
d. Go to Setting > Terminal Preferences > Terminal modes > Set local
echo > OK.
e. Remove the laundry unit from the CRU shaft.
f. Pour 300µl of DI water in cuvette number 24, 48, and 72.
g. Insert the temperature indicator probes. The diameter of the temperature
sensor should be 3.5 mm which insert easily in cuvettes.
h. In the terminal software screen, enter the command *S1424#, and then
*H1#.
PC will send the actual temperature count as well as set temperature
count. For example 415 424#. The *S1- - -# is command for set count
and *H1# is command for actual as well as set temperature count
display.
i. Note down first reading after 30 minute and then 2 reading at 10 minutes
interval.
19-13
Time Interval Temperature in Temperature in Temperature in

Cuvette Number Cuvette number 48 Cuvette
24 Number 72
10 min
20 min
30 min
40min
50min
60min
j. If actual temperature is out of 37± 0.2°C then increase the set count to
increase the temperature or decrease the set count to decrease
temperature.
k. After setting count for the temperature, note down the reading at 10
minute interval.
l. Turn off the machine, remove temperature indicator probe from
respective cuvette, and then mount the CRU on the CRU shaft.
7. Once the RCT temperature calibration is completed, turn off the analyzer
and disconnect the external communication cable and re-establish its initial
connections to the RCT heater PCB.
19.3.2. RGT Temperature Calibration

Two types of RGT controllers are available:
 Single Channel (Selectron make)
 Dual Channel (Dual make)
Before calibrating the RGT controller, make sure the type of
controller used in the analyzer, and follow the procedure as
appropriate.
19.3.2.1. Dual Channel RGT Controller Calibration Procedure
The following parameters can be controlled by the RGT unit:

 Set point of the controller for compressor 1 and compressor 2
 Heating or cooling function.
 Maximum high temperature limit and alarm.
19-14
 Minimum low temperature limit and alarm.

 Differential (Hysteresis)
 Probe calibration.
 Time delay (relay restart after cutoff)
 Keypad lock.
 Relay status on probe failure.
 Restore factory defaults.
 End Programming and keypad functions.
Follow these instructions to set the parameters for compressor 1 and compressor
2:
2. To change the set point of compressor 1, press SET key for two seconds
and then release.
3. Display will show C1 (channel 1) and flashes.
4. Press SET key again, and set the appropriate temperature using up and
down key.
5. Press SET key to save the temperature in the memory.
6. Once the temperature is set, you will see “—“which confirms that the
temperature has stored in the memory.
7. To change the set point of compressor 2, press SET key for two seconds
and then release.
8. Display will show C1 (channel 1) and flashes. Use up and down key to
change C1 to C2 (channel 2).
9. Press SET key again, and set the appropriate temperature using up and
down key.
10. Press SET key to save the temperature in the memory.
11. To end the temperature setting mode, press SET key.
12. Once the set key is pressed, the controller goes to the normal mode and
displays the temperature. The set points will be recorded in the memory.
13. Refer the following instructions for more details.
Serial Parameter Function Method Observation
Number
1 Set point To set the cut out Press and hold Display will show
point of the set key for 2 c1 and flash To go
controller. seconds and to other
release parameters, use
19-15
up / down keys.
2 C1 To set the set point CH1 - For R1 and CH1 will
1 of compressor 1 Cooling. With flash along with
the help of respective
Arrow key, Set setpoint1 for
"SET" compressor 1. The
temperature to set point range
10 °C. as Set can now be
Point for control changed by using
action and to the UP/DOWN
save in to keys. After setting
memory press the desired range,
"SET Key". press the set key
Display will and you will see “-
show “---" as an --” which confirms
indication of that the set point
parameter has been stored in
saving in to memory.
memory.
3 C2 To set the set point CH2 - For R2 and CH2 will
2 for compressor 2. Heating. With flash along with
the help of respective
Arrow key, Set setpoint2 for
"SET" temp. To compressor 2. The
37 °C.as a Set set point range
Point for control can now be
action and to changed by using
save in to the UP/DOWN
memory, Press keys. After
"SET key" to achieving the
save. Display desired range,
will show "--- "as press the set key
an indication of and you will see “-
parameter --” which confirms
saving in to that the set point
memory. has been stored in
memory.
Follow these instructions to set the other parameters.
1. Press PRG key for two seconds and then release.
2. Display will show P1 and flashes.
3. Use up and down key to change the appropriate parameter, and press SET
key to confirm.
4. Again use up and down key to change the appropriate channel (C1 or C2),
and press SET key to set the range.
5. Set the appropriate range, and the press SET to save the settings.
6. Refer the following instructions for more details.
a. To set the cooling and heating for P1.
i) P1 for Channel1 = 0 (For cooling)
19-16
ii) P1 for Channel2 = 1 (For heating)

b. To set the maximum allowable high temperature limit for P2.
i) P2 for Channel1 = 12
ii) P2 for Channel2 = 40
c. To set the minimum allowable low temperature limit for P3.
i) P3 for Channel1 = 4
ii) P3 for Channel2 = 34
d. To set differential of set point 1 and set point 2 for P4.
i) P4 for Channel1 = 1 to restart control action on 12 °C with respect to
set temperature 12 °C.
ii) P4 for Channel2 = 1 to restart control action on 36 °C with respect to
set temperature 37 °C.
e. To set the probe calibration for P5.
i) P5 for Channel1 = between -9 to +10 °C
ii) P5 for Channel2 = between -9 to +10 °C
f. To set the time delay between relay restart time for P6.
i) P6 for Channel1 = 1 minute
ii) P6 for Channel2 = 1 minute
g. To lock key pad.
i) Select the LP parameter.
ii) Set 1 for keypad lock.
iii) Set 2 for key pad unlock.
h. To set the default settings of the controller.
i) Select the FS parameter.
ii) Set 1 for restore the factory settings.
i. To end the programming
i) Select the EP parameter, and press SET key.
ii) Once the SET key is pressed, the controller goes into the normal
mode and displays the temperature and all settings are recorded.
j. To end the controller in the Auto Mode or Manual Mode.
i) Press and hold AUTO key for 2 seconds and then release.
ii) Respective channel will display temperature in scanning mode
19-17

Number
1 P1 To set Press and Once in this mode, R1 and
controller hold PRG key CH1 will flash, along with the
for heating for 2 seconds P1 value for the channel 1.
or cooling. Use UP/DOWN keys to set
the desired range. Once
desired range is achieved,
press set to confirm.
0: For cooling mode and 1:
For heating mode.
Immediately after up key is
pressed,
R1 and CH1 will flash, along
with the P1 value for the
channel 2.
Use UP/DOWN keys to set
desired range. Once desired
range is achieved, press set
to confirm.
0: For cooling mode and 1:
For heating mode.
2 P2 To set To change the Once in this mode, R1 and
maximum P2 parameter, CH1 flash along with the high
allowable press the set temperature limit for
high key. compressor 1.
temperatur Use UP/DOWN keys to set
e limit desired range. Once set at a
particular range, this will not
allow the set point 1 to go
above this range and below
P3 setting.
Immediately after UP key
pressed R2 and
CH2 flash along with the high
temperature limit for
compressor 2.
desired range.
Once set at a particular
range, this will not allow the
set point 2 to go above this
range and below P3 setting.
Example: Setting this
parameter at 25OC will not
allow the set point to go
above 25OC.Also, if the
temperature reaches 25OC,
the display will show Ht (High
Temp.) indicting that the
temperature has gone above
the range in this parameter.
19-18
3 P3 To set the To change the Once in this mode, R1 and

minimum P3 parameter, CH1 flash along with the low
allowable press the set temperature limit for
low key compressor 1.
temperatur Use UP/DOWN keys to set
e limit desired range. Once set at a
particular range, this will not
allow the set point 1 to go
below this range and above
P2 setting.
Immediately after UP key
pressed R2 and CH2 flash
along with the low
temperature limit for
compressor 2.
desired range.
Once set at a particular
range, this will not allow the
set point 2 to go below this
range and above P2 setting.
Example: Setting this
parameter at 10OC will not
allow the set point to go
below 10OC.Also, if the
temperature reaches 10OC,
the display will show Lt (Low
Temp.) indicting that the
temperature has gone below
the range in this parameter.
4 P4 To set the To change the Once in this mode, R1 and
differential P4 parameter, CH1 flash along with the
of set point press the set differential of set point 1.
1 and set key. Use UP/DOWN keys to set
point 2. desired range. Once desired
range is achieved, press set
key and you will see “---”, this
confirms differential for set
point 1 has been stored.
Immediately after up key is
pressed R2 and CH2
flash along with the
differential of set point 2.
desired range. Once range is
achieved, press set key. This
confirms differential for set
point 2.
Example: If set point 1 is set
at 100C, and differential for
set point 1 is set at 20C, then
when the system reaches
100C, the relay for
compressor1 will cutout and
19-19
since the differential is 20C,

the relay will cut-in (restart) at
20C(10+2).
5 P5 To set To change the In time it may be possible that
probe P5 parameter, the display may be offset by a
calibration. press the set degree or so, To compensate
key for this error, you may need
to add or minus the degrees
required to achieve the
correct temperature. Setting
range is from -9°C to + 10°C.
Once in this mode, R1 and
CH1 flash along with the P5
value for CH 1. Use
UP/DOWN keys to set
desired range. Immediately
after up key is pressed R2
and CH2 flash along with the
P5 value for CH 2.
desired range.
Example: The temperature on
the display is 28°C, whereas
the actual temperature is
30°C. You will need to set the
P5 mode to 2, which means
that once out of the
programming mode, the
display will show the
temperature 30°C (28°C +
2°C).
6 P6 To set time To change the In this mode R1 flashes along
delay P6 parameter, with
between press the set CH1 and time delay of
relay key. compressor 1 will flash. Use
restart UP/DOWN keys to set
time. desired range.
This parameter is used to
protect the compressor 1
from restarting in a short
period of time and can be set
between 0 to 99 minutes.
After pressing UP key R2 and
CH2 flashes along with the
time delay of Compressor 2.
Example: If this parameter is
set at 3 minutes, the relay will
cut off at the set temperature,
but will not restart for a
minimum of 3 minutes, even if
the differential is achieved
earlier. This parameter is
good to protect the life of the
compressor or even in
19-20
applications where the probe

is placed at places where
there are sudden and short
changes in temperature like
above a cold room door
7 LP To lock To lock Use up/down keys to set
keypad. parameter desired range.
setting, select This Parameter can lock the
LP and Press keypad so that tampering is
SET key after not possible by by-standers.
LP function
with the help 0= keypad unlocked
of UP/DN Key. 1= keypad locked
To Unlock When locked all parameters
Keypad Select can only be viewed, but not
"0". modified.
To Lock
Keypad select
"1".
8 FS To restores To change the When set to 1 all parameters
default FS parameter, are programmed to factory
settings of press the set values.
the key. Useful to debug setting
controller. related problems.
9 E1 Relay To Set relay R1 and CH 1 will flash,
status on status after along with the E1 for
Probe Probe failure, relay1.Use UP/DOWN keys
Failure Select E1 to set desired range.
function and When set to, 0 = The relay
press "SET" status is ON.
Key.
1 = the compressor 1
CH1 - With the performs a relay duty cycle of
help of UP/DN 10 minutes ON and 4 minutes
Key Set to "1" OFF.
to make relay
"OFF" after 2 = The relay status is OFF.
Probe failure. After pressing UP key R2 and
CH2 - With the CH 2 flashes, along with the
help of UP/DN E1 for relay 2. When set to, 0
Key Set to "1" = the relay status is ON.
to make relay 1 = The compressor performs
"OFF" after a duty cycle of 10 minutes
Probe failure. ON and 4 minutes OFF.
2 = When set to 2 the relay
status is OFF.
10 Auto Key To set the Press and Initially controller in the
controller Hold "Auto" Manual mode.
in the Auto Key to select With Auto key, controller
mode or Auto mode. mode changes to Auto mode,
Manual Respective with
mode. channel will
display AUTO ON, and display
temperature in temperature changes with
scanning respective to CH1 or
19-21
mode. CH2, flashing.

To switch in the Manual mode
again press the AUTO key for
2 seconds and release.
In the Manual mode press UP
key for 1 second to switch the
channel.
19.3.2.2. Single Channel RGT Controller (Selectron make)

Calibration Procedure
2. Hold Up and Down key of RGT temperature controller simultaneously for 4
seconds to entering in the programming mode.
3. Select the menu using Up and Down key. Use SET key to enter in the
desired menu. Use Up and Down key to get desired range in selected
menu. Again press SET key to confirm the setting.
4. Press and hold SET key for 4 seconds and release. The display will change
to set range. The set point range set 8 by using Up and Down key. After
setting desire range, press the set key and you will see "- - -" which
confirmed that set point has been stored in memory. Set point = 4.
5. Set the following menu by using procedure specified above in step number
3.
a. To set controller for cooling menu select P1 = 0.
b. To set maximum allowable high temperature set point select P2 =8°C.
c. To set minimum allowable temperature set point select P3 =4°C.
d. To set differential between cut out and cut in temperature select P4 =
1°C.
e. To set offset between actual temperature and displayed temperature P5
= 0.
f. To set time delay for relay restart time select.P6 = 1.
g. To set relay status in case of sensor probe failure select E1 = 1.
h. Use EP key to come out from of programming mode.
Number
1 Set point To set the Press and Display will change to set
cut out hold set key range and LED will flash. The
point of the for 4 seconds set point range can now be
controller and release. changed by using the
UP/DOWN key. After setting
the desired range, press the
set key and you will see “---”
which confirms that the set
19-22
point has been stored in

memory.
2 -- To set the Hold Up and Display will show P1 and
different down keys flash. To go to other
parameters simultaneousl parameter, use up/down
y for 4 keys.
seconds.
3 P1 To set To change the Use UP/DOWN keys to get
controller P1 parameter, desired range and press set
for heating press the set to confirm. 0 sets the
or cooling. key. controller for cooling mode
and 1 set the controller for
heating mode.
4 P2 To set To change the Use UP/DOWN keys to set
maximum P2 parameter, desired range. Once set at a
allowable press the set particular range, this will not
high key. allow the set point to go
temperatur above this range and below
e set point P3 setting.
and alarm Example :- Setting this
(model SZ- parameter at -25°C will not
7515). allow the set point to go
above -25°C.Also if the
temperature reaches - 25°C,
the display will show Ht (High
Temp) indicating that the
temperature reached or gone
above the range in this
parameter and at this point
the buzzer will come on.(only
model 7515)
5 P3 To set To change the Use UP/DOWN keys to set
minimum P3 parameter, desired range. Once set at a
allowable press the set particular range, this will not
low key. allow the set point to go
temperatur below this range and above
e set point P2 setting.
and Example :- Setting this
alarm.(SZ- parameter at -30°C will not
7515) allow the set point to go
below -30°C.Also if the
temperature reaches -
30°C,the display will show
Lt(Low Temp) indicating that
the temperature has reached
or gone below the range in
this parameter and at this
point the buzzer will come
on.(Only model 7515)
6 P4 To set the To change the Use UP/DOWN keys to set
differential. P4 parameter, desired range. Differential
press the set between cut out and cut in
key temperature can be set
between 1°C to 20°C.
Example(in cooling mode):- If
19-23
the set point is set at 10°C

and differential is set at 2°C,
then when the system
reaches 10°C the relay will
cut in(restart) at
12°C(10°C+2°C)
19.3.3. Pressure Tank Temperature Calibration

1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the (male) connector of the pressure tank (CN1). (The pressure
tank temperature should be at room temperature).
3. Check the resistance across the connector (male) pressure tank CN1 (The
resistance should be 20Ω ± 2Ω)
4. If the resistance across CN1 is 20Ω ±2Ω, then rotate the resistance setting
screw of thermostat clockwise till it shows open resistance. Again rotate the
resistance setting screw anticlockwise till it shows 20Ω. Stop rotating the
screw anticlockwise immediately when the resistance of the pressure tank
displays 20 Ω. (Resistance shows open after rotating thermostat screw
clockwise).
5. Turn on the M/C and measure the voltage across connector. Pressure tank
CN1 (female) which is AC voltage (It should 40 VAC (± 3 VAC)).
6. Connect the pressure tank connector and observe the increasing pressure
till it reaches 1.0 bar on pressure gauge.
7. Run the application software and go to Service Check screen, select
appropriate probe arm (SPT, R1, and R2 ) from the list, and press Initialize
(The position of arm should be in up position in the trough).
8. Now go to Valve and Pump frame, and press appropriate clean valve to On
(The water should continuously flow through arm probe into trough).
Keep the RTD sensor of the temperature Indicator between
probe and trough such that water should flow over the
sensor.
9. Record the actual temperature of the water at probe. It should be (39±2°C).
Observe the reading for 1 hour.
To increase the temperature, rotate the setting screw of
Thermostat anticlockwise slightly and to decrease the
temperature rotate the setting screw of Thermostat
clockwise slightly.
10. After setting the temperature within specified range now turn off the water
flow from probe by pressing appropriate clean valve Off.
11. Remove the RTD sensor from the trough and switch of the machine and
temperature Indicator.
19-24
12. Seal the setting screw of thermostat by 3 drops of loctite 222.
19.3.4. Alignment Procedure for Sample Barcode XL640

(CANMAX type)
1. Mount the ‘L’ shaped clamp on the base.
2. Fix the barcode scanner to clamp holder.
3. Fix the clamp holder screw.
4. Go to service check and Initialize the ASP tray.
5. Ensure the distance between the scanner and the outer tube is 55 +2mm
6. Go to service check. Refer to Fig 1 above, select “Inner” and click on “On”
to give the ASP barcode beam ON command. Place bar-coded tube at
position 13 in sample tray. Mount the Barcode reader such that the beam
falls at the center of position 13 of the sample tray. Bar-coded tube position
13 will be facing the barcode scanner. The beam will go ON and remain ON
if the barcode scanner is not able to read the barcode. If alignment is done
proper i.e. if the barcode scanner is able to read the bar-coded tube
properly, the beam should go ON and OFF with beeping sound.
7. If the barcode scanner is not able to read the barcode tube at position 13,
move the scanner slightly towards the right from the center maintaining the
distance of 55 +2mm, such that the scanner Beam goes OFF with beep
and then continues ON –OFF followed by BEEP
8. Place the inner tubes, run the barcode scan in service check. To run the
barcode scan click on “Barcode scan”. Refer fig 2 below
9. Now remove the inner tubes and Place the outer Tubes and again run the
barcode scan.
10. Finally place all the barcode and conform that both inner and outer barcode
are read consistently for 10 times.
19.3.5. Alignment Procedure for Reagent Barcode XL640

(CANMAX type)
1. Mount the 'L' shaped clamp on the base.
2. Fix the barcode scanner to clamp holder.
3. Fix the clamp holder screw.
4. Go to service check and Initialize the Reagent tray.
19-25
5. Ensure the distance between the scanner and the outer bottle is 70 +2mm
6. Place the RGT barcode alignment bottle (with the sticker stuck on it, as
seen in the image below)
at position 41 in RGT tray. Go to service check. Refer to the above figure,

click on "On" to switch on the barcode beam. Now, align the barcode beam
in such a way that the beam fall on the yellow color area of the sticker.
7. Once adjusted, turn “Off” the RGT Barcode Scanner Beam. Place the inner
bottles and run the barcode scan in service check. To run the barcode scan
click on "Barcode scan". Refer the figure below;
8. Now remove the inner Bottles and Place the outer Bottles and again run the
barcode scan.
9. Finally place all the barcode and confirm that both inner and outer barcode
are read consistently for 10 times.
19.4. MS-3 Laser Barcode Programming Procedure

1. After necessary Hardware connections turn on power supply and wait for a
minute.
2. Open ESP software from Start menu.
19-26
3. Click on MS- 3 Lasers
19-27
4. Click on No Tab
5. Go to File Menu Click on Open Option.
6. For Chemix /XL640 select CXXL640_01.esp file given in the CD
19-28
7. Click on No Tab
19-29
8. Following Screen will be appearing. Click on YES.
9. Select proper COM PORT and then Click on Start Tab.
10. After detection make sure status is CONNECTED

a. Under Send\Receive Menu take cursor to Send to Barcode
b. Click on send and save option.
c. Wait until Barcode reader gives Beep sound.
Note: Beep Sound indicates your Barcode is configured.
19-30
11. To verify Barcode reader is properly programmed or not.

a. Under Send\Receive menu click on Receive Barcode Settings.
b. Wait for 1 minute.
19-31
12. The Exceptions ICON represents that the Barcode settings are properly
read from the scanner connected.
13. Under communication Tab make sure following settings are there for
respective option.
19-32
14. Under Read Cycle Tab make sure following settings are there for
respective option. These settings are common for XL 640 and Chemix
15. Under Symbologies Tab make sure following settings are there for
respective option. These settings are common for XL 640 and Chemix.
19-33
16. Under Symbologies Tab make sure following settings are there for
respective option. These settings are common for XL 640 and Chemix.
17. After doing Step 11 if settings are not as per shown in Step 13, or Step 14
and Step 15, start again from Step 1.
18. If barcode is programmed properly and settings are as per Step 13, 14 and
15. Then Click on Terminal Button. Following screen appears shown below
19-34
19. Following is the procedure to create Macro for testing the Beam ON and
Beam OFF, two buttons are to be created for this purpose Macro is
required.
19-35
20. Click on the button next to Next Row shown above and then click Add
macro. The screen shown below appears.
21. Type ON in the Macro Name text box.
19-36
For Typing STX press ALT button, then press ‘0’ (zero), then again ‘0’(zero)
and then ‘2’ (with the ALT button pressed), similarly for EXT press ALT
button, then press ‘0’ (zero), then again ‘0’(zero) and the ‘3’ (with the ALT
button pressed) Press ‘+’ button between STX and ETX.
Note: While pressing numbers ‘0’,’2’ or ‘3’ use the left hand keys only as
shown below in RED.
22. Continue the Step 21 for OFF button as shown below.
19-37
The ON and OFF button appears as shown above.

23. Go to Terminal > Non-Printable Characters > and click Enhanced Format
(Slower).
19-38
24. To verify Beam ON and OFF command click the ON button the Beam
should go ON. To turn OFF the beam click OFF button, the beam should go
OFF.
NOTE: Once the ON and OFF button are created and appears as shown
above do not perform Step 21 and Step 22.
25. Place a barcode in front of the beam and click the ON button, following
string appears as shown below.
STX+ETX represent ON button being pressed and the following string
represents the barcode being read preceded by STX and end with ETX.
26. In case of XL640 and Chemix ,the barcode string has STX and ETX on
either side of the data as shown below,
This indicates you have configured MS Barcode Successfully.

27. This ends the configuration process of Micro scan Barcode scanner.
Below is the configuration to be done to Read CODE 39 (out of spec printed
barcode).
Type <K452, 2> as shown below and press “Send”.
19-39
28. Type <Z> and press “Send” to save the above setting.
19-40
19.5. Service Menu Software Layout, Functions and

Opto Status
To enter the service mode press Service Check on the main screen.
Only authorized technical service personnel should operate the
service screen.
19.5.1. Arms/Stirrer
19.5.1.1. Reagent 1 Arm
19.5.1.1.1. Initialize
This command will bring R1 arm at rotational home position (trough), but Vertical
Up position.
19.5.1.1.2. R1 Arm Up
If R1 arm is down at any position, this command will bring R1 arm up to Vertical-
home position.
19-41
19.5.1.1.3. R1 Arm Down

This command can be used to check the down movement of R1 arm. To perform
this task, select the R1 Arm from the list, and then press Initialize. Now move the
arm probe to the reagent tray using R1 Arm – To Reagent Outer or R1 Arm – To
Reagent Inner command. Once the arm probe reaches at the particular bottle on
the reagent tray, press R1 Arm Down.
The R1 arm will go down until the bottom of the reagent bottle. While going down if
it senses liquid level in between, it will stop at that level. If liquid is not present in
reagent bottle, then it will go down and may experience VOD at bottom, giving a
display of Error15 - R1arm VOD error. The R1 down in Cuvette position (RCT
Offset position) will go down to the level as per RUN test level.
19.5.1.1.4. Links
This command is used to set R1 Arm Motion Cycle continuously for validation and
service check test. Before execution, ensure Arm is in HOME position (Down in
Trough).Link performs a pseudo R1 arm RUN TEST operation, aspirating fixed
volume from Reagent bottle 1 and dispensing in Trough. To perform this task,
select Links, from the Arm/Stirrer frame, and choose R1 Arm Link > Execute.
To terminate action use stop button provided on the left hand side corner of the
screen.
19.5.1.1.5. RCT Offset
For R1 arm alignment RCT should be in offset condition. This command will first
initialize RCT tray, then align RCT to offset (for R1 probe).
19.5.1.1.6. Calibrate
This command is used to adjust the position of Arm (fine setting) at various
positions on Trays (RGT and RCT). Accept is used to confirm the change and
cross check. If the change is to be made permanent, then the Save Calib is to be
pressed.
19.5.1.1.7. Opto Status
Sl. No. Action Observation
1 Go to Service Check and select R1 ARM from LED on SN1, SN2, SN3 optos are
the list. ON.
2 Select Service Check > R1 ARM > Initialize. LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF.
3 Select Service Check > R1 ARM > Initialize.> LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto PCB
R1 Arm – To Reagent Outer > Execute. goes OFF.
R1 Arm – To Reagent Inner > Execute. goes OFF.
R1 Arm – To Reagent outer > Execute > R1 goes OFF at reagent outer and LED
Arm – Reagent Outer To Cuvette > Execute. on SN2 Opto becomes OFF and
SN3 opto become ON at reagent to
cuvette.
19-42
6 Select Service Check > R1 ARM > Initialize.> LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto
R1 Arm – To Reagent outer > Execute > R1 becomes ON.
Arm – Reagent Outer To Cuvette > Execute >
R1 Arm – Cuvette To Trough.
7 Select R1 Arm > SPT Arm Link > Execute. The assembly runs smoothly in the
LINK test.
19.5.1.2. Reagent 2 Arm

This command will bring R2 arm at rotational home position (trough), but Vertical
Up level.
19.5.1.2.2. R2 Arm Up
If R2 arm is down at any position, this command will bring R1 arm to Vertical up
position.
19.5.1.2.3. R2 Arm Down
This command can be used to check the down movement of R2 arm. To perform
this task, select the R2 Arm from the list, and then press Initialize. Now move the
arm probe to the reagent tray using R2 Arm – To Reagent Outer or R1 Arm – To
Reagent Inner command. Once the arm probe reaches at the particular bottle on
the reagent tray, press R2 Arm Down.
The R2 arm will go down until the bottom of the reagent bottle. While going down if
it senses liquid level in between, it will stop at that level. If liquid is not present in
the reagent bottle, then it will go down and may experience VOD at bottom.
Display of error 45 – R2 arm VOD error. In case arm is in Cuvette position (RCT
Reset position), then it will go down to level as in RUN TEST.
19.5.1.2.4. Link
This command is used to set R2 Arm Motion Cycle continuously for validation and
service check test. Prior to execution, ensure that the Arm is re-set / homed (in
down position at Trough) the R2 arm will perform a pseudo RUN TEST operation,
aspirating reagent and dispensing in Trough. To perform this task, select Links,
from the Arm/Stirrer frame, and choose R2 Arm Link > Execute.
In case error condition observed (no reagent etc.). To terminate action use stop
button provided on the left hand side corner of the screen.
19.5.1.2.5. RCT Home
For R2 arm alignment, RCT should be at Home / Reset position. This command,
will Initialize the RCT tray (bring it to Home position).
This command is used to obtain correct position of the R2 Arm probe, at the Tray
locations (RGT and RCT) – Fine setting in terms of Stepper motor pulses. Accept
19-43
is used to confirm the change and cross check. If the change is to be made
permanent, then the Save Calib is to be pressed.
Serial Number Action Observation
1 Go to Service Check and select R2 LED on SN1, SN2, SN3 Optos are
Arm from the list. ON.
2 Select Service Check > R2 ARM > LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF.
Initialize.
3 Select Service Check > R2 ARM > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto PCB
Initialize.> R2 Arm – To Reagent Outer goes OFF.
> Execute.
Initialize.> R2 Arm – To Reagent Inner goes OFF.
> Execute.
Initialize.> R2 Arm – To Reagent Outer goes OFF at reagent outer and
> Execute > R2 Arm – Reagent Outer LED on SN2 Opto becomes OFF
To Cuvette > Execute. and SN3 opto become ON at
reagent to cuvette.
6 Select Service Check > R2 ARM > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto
Initialize.> R2 Arm – To Reagent outer becomes ON.
> Execute > R2 Arm – Reagent Outer
To Cuvette > Execute > R2 Arm –
Cuvette To Trough.
7 Select R2 Arm > SPT Arm Link > The assembly runs smoothly in the
Execute. LINK test.
19.5.1.3. Sample Arm

This command will bring sample arm at home position (trough position) and in
vertical up condition.
19.5.1.3.2. SPT Arm Up
If SPT arm is down at trough position or in sample tray or in Cuvette, this
command will bring Sample arm to vertical up position.
19.5.1.3.3. SPT Arm Down
This command can be used to check the down movement of Sample arm. To
perform this task, select the SPT Arm from the list, and then press Initialize. Now
move the arm probe to the sample tray using the appropriate command. Once the
arm probe reaches at the particular bottle on the sample tray, press SPT Arm
Down.
The Sample arm will go down until the bottom of the reagent bottle. While going
down if it senses liquid level in between, it will stop at that level. If liquid is not
present in the reagent bottle, then it will go down and may experience VOD at
19-44
bottom and display 75 – Sample Arm VOD error. In Cuvette and Trough, it will go
down to the level, as during operation.
19.5.1.3.4. Link
This command is used to set SPT Arm Motion Cycle continuously for validation
and service check test. Prior to execution, ensure that the arm is homed (down in
trough). To perform this task, select Links, from the Arm/Stirrer frame, and
choose SPT Arm Link > Execute.
To terminate action use stop button provided on the left hand side corner of the
screen.
19.5.1.3.5. RCT Home
For sample arm alignment at cuvette side RCT should be at Home / initialized
position. This command initializes the RCT tray and brings it to Home position.
19.5.1.3.6. SPT Arm – Trough To Sample Outer (Cuvette)
This command will first initialize the Sample tray, and align Sample arm at the
Sample tray position 1. Sample arm calibration for Trough to Sample Outer can be
performed.
19.5.1.3.7. SPT Arm – Trough To Sample Inner (Cuvette)
This command will first initialize the Sample tray, and align Sample position 2
(inner) in path of Sample arm. Sample arm then moves to Sample 2 position
(inner). Sample Arm calibration for Trough to Sample Inner can be performed.
19.5.1.3.8. SPT Arm – Trough To Std Outer (Cuvette)
This command will first initialize Sample tray, and align Sample arm at Standard
tray position S1. Sample arm calibration for Trough to Standard Outer can be
performed.
19.5.1.3.9. SPT Arm – Trough To Std Inner (Cuvette)
This command will first initialize Sample tray, and align Standard position B1
(inner) in path of Sample arm. Sample arm then moves to Standard position B1.
Sample Arm calibration for Trough to Standard Inner can be performed.
This command is used to obtain correct position of the sample arm probe, at the
tray locations (SPT and RCT) – Fine setting in terms of Stepper motor pulses.
Accept is used to confirm the change and cross check. If the change is to be
made permanent, then the Save Calib is to be pressed.
19-45

1 Go to Service Check and select SPT LED on SN1, SN2, SN3 optos are
Arm from the list. ON
2 Select Service Check > SPT Arm > LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF.
Initialize.
3 Select Service Check > SPT Arm > LED on SN2 goes OFF and SN3
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To Opto PCB remains ON.
Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute.
4 Select Service Check > SPT Arm > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto goes
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To OFF.
Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute >
SPT Arm – Sample Outer To
Cuvette > Execute.
5 Select Service Check > SPT Arm > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto ON.
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To
Sample Outer (Cuvette) > Execute >
SPT Arm – Sample Outer To
Cuvette > Execute > SPT Arm -
Cuvette To Trough > Execute
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To Opto PCB remains ON.
Sample Inner (Cuvette) > Execute.
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To OFF.
Sample Inner (Cuvette) > Execute >
SPT Arm – Sample Inner To Cuvette
> Execute.
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To
Sample Inner (Cuvette) > Execute >
SPT Arm – Sample Inner To Cuvette
> Execute > SPT Arm – Cuvette To
Trough.
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To Std Opto PCB remains ON.
Outer (Cuvette) > Execute.
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To Std OFF.
Outer (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT
Arm – Standard Outer To Cuvette >
Execute.
Initialize.> SPT Arm – Trough To Std
Outer (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT
Arm – Standard Outer To Cuvette >
Execute > SPT Arm – Cuvette To
Trough > Execute.
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To Std Opto PCB remains ON.
Inner (Cuvette) > Execute.
19-46
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To Std OFF.
Inner (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT
Arm – Standard Inner To Cuvette >
Execute.
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To Std
Inner (Cuvette) > Execute > SPT
Arm – Standard Inner To Cuvette >
Execute > SPT Arm – Cuvette To
Trough > Execute.
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To OFF.
Dilution Cuvette (Cuvette) >
Execute.
16 Select Service Check > SPT Arm > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto OFF.
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To
Dilution Cuvette (Cuvette) > Execute
> SPT Arm – Dilution Cuvette To
Cuvette > Execute.
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To Opto PCB remains ON at sample
Sample Outer (ISE) > Execute > outer and SN2 goes ON and SN3
SPT Arm – Sample Outer To ISE > gets OFF at ISE.
Execute.
18 Select Service Check > SPT Arm > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto
Initialize > SPT Arm – Trough To Become ON.
Sample Outer (ISE) > Execute >
SPT Arm – Sample Outer To ISE >
Execute > SPT Arm – ISE To Trough
> Execute.
19 LINK test on the machine. The assembly runs smoothly in the
LINK test.
NOTE: Default arm calibration will restore factory settings.
19.5.2. Syringes
In this sub-menu, there are 3 syringe assemblies displayed – Sample, R1 and R2.
Select any one of them (this button highlights). All the following commands are
available for the selected syringe.
1. Valve on – Syringe valve for probe internal cleaning is switched ON (Water
flow).
2. Valve off – Syringe valve is switched OFF (Stop flow).
3. Syringe up – Syringe piston is moved UP (to vertical home).
4. Syringe down – Syringe piston is moved down, by fixed steps.
5. Initialize – Moves the Syringe motor to attain the Home position.
19-47
19.5.2.1. Opto Status

Serial Number Action Observations
1 From the Service Check, select the LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF
appropriate syringe (Sample, R1PT, and Piston does not hit to top of
and R2PT) from the options, and barrel.
press Initialize.
2 From the Service Check, select the LED on SN1 Opto PCB becomes
appropriate syringe (Sample, R1PT, ON.
and R2PT) from the options, and
press Initialize > Down.
3 From the Service Check, select the LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF.
appropriate syringe (Sample, R1PT,
and R2PT) from the options, and
press Initialize > Down.> Up.
19.5.3. Stirrers (Choose Stirrer 1 or 2)

19.5.3.1. Initialize
During initialization stirrer moves to Home position – up at trough (performs Low
rotation – wash in trough before completion of command).
19.5.3.2. STR1 and STR2 Down

NOTE: The RCT should be at offset condition.
Use Offset command from the RCT Tray frame to initialize the RGT tray. Then
use appropriate stirrer command (STR1 - Rotate To Cuvette or STR1 - Rotate To
Cuvette) to move the stirrer on the cuvette, and press STR1 Down or STR2 Down
as appropriate. This command can be used to check the proper alignment. If the
alignment is OK, it can be tested with Stirrer ON.
The DOWN command can be given in Trough as well.
19.5.3.3. STR1 and STR2 Up

If stirrer is down then it will move to vertical up position.
19.5.3.4. Rotate to Cuvette

This command moves the stirrer to the desired cuvette on the RCT tray. To
perform the action, first initialize the RCT tray and use STR1 - Rotate To Cuvette
or STR1 - Rotate To Cuvette command as appropriate. Stirrer will rotate to
cuvette of RCT.
19.5.3.5. STR1 and STR2 On

Stirrer stirring action starts (High Speed).
19.5.3.6. STR1 and STR2 Off

Stirrer stirring action stops.
19-48
19.5.3.7. Calibrate
This command is used to obtain correct position of the Stirrer, at the RCT cuvette –
Fine setting in terms of Stepper motor pulses. Accept is used to confirm the
change and cross check. If the change is to be made permanent, then the Save
Calib is to be pressed.
19.5.3.8. Link
Using this command, the stirrer will continuously perform the stirring action. If RCT
is not at offset position, then stirrer will not go down in cuvette. Use Emergency
Stop command to end the routine To perform this task, select Links, from the
Arm/Stirrer frame, and choose Stirrer1 Link or Stirrer2 link > Execute.
1 From the Service Check, select the LED on SN1, SN2, SN3 Optos are
appropriate stirrer (STR1 and STR2) ON.
from the list.
2 Select Initialize. LED on SN1 gets OFF and SN2
and SN3 Optos gets ON.
3 Select Initialize > Rotate To Cuvette > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto PCBs
Execute. goes OFF.
4 Select Initialize > Rotate To Cuvette > LED on SN1 gets ON.
Execute > Down > Execute.
5 Select Initialize > Rotate To Cuvette > LED on SN1 gets OFF.
Execute > Down > Execute > UP >
Execute.
6 Select Initialize > Rotate To Cuvette > LED on SN2 and SN3 Opto PCBs
Execute > Down > Execute > UP > gets ON.
Execute > Rotate To Trough >
Execute.
7 From the Service Check, select the Stirrer motors are switched ON.
appropriate stirrer (STR1 and STR2)
from the list, and then press Initialize.
Select On, and press Execute.
8 From the Service Check, select the Stirrer motors are switched OFF.
appropriate stirrer (STR1 and STR2)
from the list, and then press Initialize.
Select Off, and press Execute.
19.5.4. DCF
This option is used to set the dilution calibration factor. The dilution factor
should be entered in the range 0.75 to 1.25. This feature is used in case if
recovery of any of the dilution run is improper.
Use the following procedure to set the dilution factor:
a. Manually calculate the Dilution Calibration Factor (DCF) using 5x dilution
as shown below:
19-49
DCF = (Expected mean of 5x) / (Observed mean of 5x)

b. Click on the DCF button and enter the resultant DCF value in DCF text
box and click on SAVE.
This will save the value in the system. This factor will be transferred to
analyzer and will be stored in analyzer memory.
c. On every power on, this factor will be transferred to MultiXL.
d. MultiXL will multiply the results of dilution, any dilution for 2x to 150x, by
this factor and then result is declared
19.5.5. Sample Tray

Using this command the sample tray rotates to achieve the home position.
19.5.5.2. Rotate 50
Using this command, the sample tray will take one complete rotation.
19.5.5.3. Rotate 1
Using this command, the sample tray will rotate one sample position.
19.5.5.4. Pulse
This command is used to move the tray by one motor pulse. (used for sensor
alignment).
19.5.5.5. Link
Sample tray will rotate continuously, if there is any problem in ASP opto setting
then rotation will stop and the corresponding alarm message is displayed. Use
Emergency Stop command to end the routine. To perform this task, select Links,
from the Arm/Stirrer frame, and choose Sample Tray Link > Execute.
19.5.5.6. Barcode Scan

This button is used to scan all 50 barcode tubes. The barcode readings are
displayed as per sample position number.
19-50
19.5.5.7. Single Barcode

This button is used to scan single barcode repeatedly to ensure proper alignment
of samples.
19.5.5.8. Inner/Outer
These buttons are used for alignment of particular arm to inner or outer position of
sample tray.
19.5.5.9. ASP Barcode Scanner Beam On/Off

This option is used to Turn ON or OFF the ASP Barcode Scanner Beam. On
reading the Barcode, the beam turns OFF automatically. Alternatively, by pressing
Off button, the laser beam will be turned off.

1 In the Sample Tray frame, press LED on SN1 gets ON and SN2 gets
Initialize. OFF.
2 Now apply one pulse by pressing LED on SN1 gets OFF at 14 pulses.
Pulse to move forward (press 14
pulse for ASP setting).
3 Select Initialize. LED on SN1 gets ON and SN2 gets
OFF.
4 Initiate the link operation. See section The assembly runs smoothly in the
19.5.5.5 Link for more details. LINK test.
19.5.6. Reagent Tray

Using this command, the reagent tray rotates to achieve the home position.
19.5.6.2. Rotate 56
Using this command, the reagent tray will take one complete rotation.
19.5.6.3. Pulse
Using this command, the reagent tray will rotate for the one short motor pulse. This
can be used to check sensor opto alignment of the tray.
19.5.6.4. Link
Using this command, the reagent tray will rotate continuously, if there is any
problem in RGT opto setting, or motor drive, then rotation will stop and error
displayed. Use Emergency Stop command to end the routine. To perform this
task, select Links, from the Arm/Stirrer frame, and choose RGT Tray Link >
Execute.
19-51
19.5.6.5. Rotate 1
Using this command, the regent tray will rotate for one reagent position.
19.5.6.6. Barcode Scan

This button is used to scan all 56 barcode bottles. The barcode readings are
displayed as per bottle position number.
19.5.6.7. Single Barcode

This button is used to scan single barcode repeatedly to ensure proper alignment
of reagent bottles.
19.5.6.8. RGT Barcode Scanner Beam

Using this command, the reagent tray rotates and positions it for sample barcode
alignment. To perform the task, press RGT Barcode Scanner Beam to On. Press
Off to turn off the laser beam.
19.5.6.9. Inner/Outer
These buttons are used for alignment of particular arm to inner or outer position of
reagent tray.

1 In the Reagent Tray frame, LED on SN1 gets ON and SN2 gets OFF.
press Initialize.
2 Now apply one pulse by LED on SN1 gets OFF at 14 pulses.

pressing Pulse to move
forward (press 14 pulse for
RGT setting).
3 Select Initialize. LED on SN1 gets ON and SN2 gets OFF.
4 Initiate the link operation. See The assembly runs smoothly in the LINK
section 19.5.6.4 Link for more test.
details.
19.5.7. Reaction Tray (RCT)

Using this command, the reaction tray rotates to achieve the home position.
19.5.7.2. Pulse
Using this command, the reaction tray will rotate for the one short motor pulse.
This can be used to check sensor opto alignment of the tray.
19-52
19.5.7.3. Offset
Using this command, the reaction tray rotates to achieve the half rotation.
19.5.7.4. Link
Using this command, the reaction tray will rotate continuously, if there is any
problem in RCT opto setting, or motor drive, then rotation will stop and error
displayed. Use Emergency Stop command to end the routine. To perform this
task, select Links, from the Arm/Stirrer frame, and choose RCT Tray Link >
Execute.

1 In the RCT Tray frame, press LED on SN1 gets ON and SN2 gets OFF.
Initialize.
2 Now apply one pulse by LED on SN1 gets OFF after 13 pulse and
pressing Pulse to move SN2 gets ON.
forward (press 13 pulse for
RCT setting).
3 Select Initialize. LED on SN1 gets ON and SN2 gets OFF.
4 Select Offset. LED on SN1 gets OFF and SN2 gets ON.
5 Initiate the link operation. See The assembly runs smoothly in the LINK
section 19.5.7.4 Link for more test.
details.
1. Initialize the RCT assembly. The home Opto should be off and the Stop
Opto should be on.
2. Go to service check menu. Give 1 pulse forward command one by one.
Keep your hand on RCT Tray. After 12 pulses RCT stop Opto should be
completely ON. After 13 or 14 pulses RCT stop, Opto should be completely
off.
3. Again initialize the RCT tray and check the setting.
19.5.8. PC Communication
This command will check the communication between computer and analyzer. To
perform the task, in the Communication frame, select the appropriate serial port
from the field Select Com Port, and click Check.
If communication is OK, then CPU will display “communication with instrument

OK.” If communication is not OK, then CPU displays “Instrument not responding”.
If this happens then check the continuity of communication wire or check whether
RCT has been initialized or not.
19-53
19.5.9. Calibration
This section of Service Check Form is used to Calibrate ARM centering at various
applicable positions. Pre-requisites for this operation is to bring the ARM or
STIRRER to required position using the ARM/STIRRER Move options.
Clock Wise: Set direction of rotation for ARM / STIRRER as Clockwise.
Anti Clock Wise: Set direction of rotation for ARM / STIRRER as Anticlockwise
Steps: This option allows step movement of ARM / STIRRER.
Accept: Saves the Course / FINE adjusted value of ARM / STIRRER in to local
memory. Values are not saved in Analyzer until “Save Calib.” Button is clicked.
Cancel: Cancels the locally Accepted Value(s) of Course / FINE adjustment(s) of
ARM / STIRRER.
Default: Cancels and reloads the default position of ARM / STIRRER at respective
position of calibration.
Save Calib: This option is mandatory after calibrating the ARM. STIRRER. The
locally Accepted values are Saved in the Analyzer Non-volatile memory and are
used by Analyzer henceforth.
Calibration Menu Button
The following options are displayed when this button is clicked:

Current RAM data backup: This option will take the backup of current calibration
which is saved in the EEPROM to PC.
Restore Backup data into RAM: This option will load the backup file onto the
EEPROM of the CPU.
19.5.10. Misc Commands

This option helps to view the version numbers of MuliXL Software and Embedded
Software versions (Analyzer, Micro Blaze, FPGA).
Click on this button, and then select “Software Version”.
19-54
Following window will pop up.
19-55
20. Miscellaneous
20.1. Fuse Ratings
Sr. Fuse Blown
Fuses Function
No. Indicator
Mains switch Fuse – 5A Slow Mains incoming ----
Blow (220V)
Mains switch Fuse –10A Slow ----
Blow (110V)
1 F1 – 2A Slow Blow TX2 Primary 1 110V to 250V
3 F3 – 2.5A Slow Blow TX1 Primary 1 110V to 250V
4 F4 – 2.5A Slow Blow TX1 Primary 2 110V to 250V
7 F7 – 630mA Fast Blow Main KNF Pump 110V to 250V
8 F8 – 1A Fast Blow AC drive PCB 110V to 250V
9 F9 – 2A Slow Blow Vacuum pump : Enomoto :KNF 110V to 250V
10 F10 – 2.5A Fast Blow Pressure tank with heater 110V to 250V
11 F11 –1A Fast Blow RGT duct fan 110V to 250V
12 F12 –1A Fast Blow RGT temp. controller unit 110V to 250V
13 F13 – 2.5A Fast Blow Kept spare (used for 3 channel 15V to 30V
ISE power supply )
F13-Not applicable 4 CH ISE Module 15V to 30V
F13 – 5A Fast Blow Peltier Assy. SMPS : 12V : 20A 110V to 250V
14 F14 – 1A Fast Blow +5V Regulator PCB 15V to 30V
15 F15 – 1A Fast Blow -5V Regulator PCB 15V to 30V
16 F16 – 1A Fast Blow LMPS +15V AC input LMPS 15V to 30V
17 F17 – 1A Fast Blow LMPS -15V AC input LMPS 15V to 30V
18 F18 – 5A Fast Blow Lamp power supply 15V to 30V
F18 – Not applicable Lamp SMPS : 12V : 5A 15V to 30V
F18 – 2A Slow Blow Lamp SMPS : 12V : 6A 110V to 250V
19 F19 – 630mA Fast Blow To WGPT PCB assembly 15V to 30V
F19 – Not applicable Float Sensor PCB Assy. 15V to 30V
F19 – 1.25A Fast Blow Logic Supply SMPS : 5V : 5A 110V to 250V
20 F20 – 630mA Fast Blow RS 232 communication PCB 15V to 30V
21 F21 – 630mA Fast Blow RS 232 communication PCB 15V to 30V
22 F22 – 3.15A Fast Blow Motor Supply SMP: 24V: 6.5A 110V to 250V
20-1
20.2. Transformer SMPS Details

Sl. No. Parameter INPUT AC TYPE
220VAC/50Hz 110VAC/60Hz
Required Required Actual
1 Mains input AC Supply 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
(Switch ON rear Switch)
2 Terminal Block (Yellow Wire and 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
N)
3 TX2 Secondary
RGT Temperature Indicator 220 ± 5VAC 220 ± 5VAC
ISPS CN1 (16V) 16 ± 2VAC 16 ± 2VAC
RGT Duct Fan 220 ± 5VAC 220 ± 5VAC
4 12V/18A, 12V/20A SMPS
12V/18A, 12V/20A SMPS Input 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
12V/18A, 12V/20A SMPS Output 12 ± 0.3VDC 12 ± 0.3VDC
Switch ON Front Switch
5 Terminal Block1 (Red Wire and N) 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
6 TX1 Secondary
Pressure Tank CN1 40 ± 2VAC 40 ± 2VAC
AC Drive PCB 100 ± 2VAC 100 ± 2VAC
Suction Pump Terminal 100 ± 5VAC 100 ± 5VAC
KNF Pump 230 ± 5VAC 230 ± 5VAC
7 TX3 Secondary
Load cell Connection 9 pin D type 18 ± 2VAC 18 ± 2VAC
(18 V AC) – Pin 8,9
8 LMPS Input
Orange White – Pin 1,2 20 ± 2VAC 20 ± 2VAC
Orange White – Pin 2,3 20 ± 2VAC 20 ± 2VAC
Red – Pin 1, 2. 20 ± 2VAC 20 ± 2VAC
9 Regulator PCB Input
White - Violet – Pin 1,2 10 ± 1VAC 10 ± 1VAC
White - Violet – Pin 2,3 10 ± 1VAC 10 ± 1VAC
ISO PCB Input
Orange – Pin 1,2 8 ± 1VAC 8 ± 1VAC
Red – Pin 3,4 8 ± 1VAC 8 ± 1VAC
10 5V / 5 A SMPS
5V SMPS Input 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
5V SMPS Output 5.1± 0.1VDC 5.1± 0.1VDC
TB3 Black-Brown 5.1± 0.1VDC 5.1± 0.1VDC
11 36V / 2.8 A SMPS
20-2
36V SMPS Input (220 V AC) 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC

36V SMPS Output 36 ± 0.1VDC 36 ± 0.1VDC
RCT Card 36 ± 0.1VDC 36 ± 0.1VDC
12 24V / 6.3 A SMPS
24 V SMPS Input 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
24 V SMPS Output 24.1±0.1VDC 24.1±0.1VDC
TB3 Black-Violet 24.1±0.1VDC 24.1±0.1VDC
13 12 V / 5 A SMPS
12 V SMPS Input 220 ± 5VAC 110 ± 2.5VAC
12 V SMPS Output 12 ± 0.1VDC 12 ± 0.1VDC (Voltage. Set
at lamp assy.
Is 11.7V)
Red – Pin 1, 2. 12 ± 2VAC 12 ± 2VAC
20-3
21. Appendix
21.1. TBM Image Installation
This section explains you the procedure of installing the TBM image (Windows
Embedded 7 Operating System) into the analyzer PC.
The analyzer PC comes with preinstalled TBM image.
For any reason, if the TBM image is not installed or you want to upgrade the
existing operating system (OS) into TBM image, please read the following
information carefully for installing the TBM image to analyzer PC.
21.1.1. Scenario
There could be two scenarios under installing the TBM image:
 New (Clean Installation)
 Upgrade/ Reinstall
21.1.1.1. New (Clean Installation)

It is the first installation of TBM image on a fresh computer having no data.
In this installation, the TBM image setup will clean the entire hard disk and create
two drives that is C and D drive, with C drive as the active primary partition. In this
case, it will delete all the existing data and OS. Therefore, this type of
installation must be used exclusively on newly acquired PC.
21.1.1.2. Upgrade/Re-installation
It is kind of an upgrade installation in which the analyzer PC already has some
operating system (for example: Windows XP, Windows 7 or previous TBM image)
installed. In this case, the TBM image setup will only format the C: drive and install
the TBM image on the same. This type of installation must be used if you want
to install TBM image on C: drive but want to keep the data on other drives
untouched.
21.1.2. Installing TBM Image into Analyzer PC

The installation procedure should be performed by the trained
service engineer. Improper installation may result in loss of
data.
Before we start installing the TBM image, you must verify that the analyzer PC
allows booting from DVD by checking the boot options.
To check the boot options:
21-1
1. Restart the PC and continuously press F12 (or key that is mentioned on the
screen to go to boot menu) to go to boot menu. Select system setup in the
boot menu to find all the options for the system setup.
2. Find the boot sequence option in the system setup and make sure that the
sequence of boot for CD-ROM is higher than hard drive.
3. If any changes are made to the existing sequence, click Apply to save the
changes and restart the PC.
21.1.2.1. Installing TBM image - New (Clean Installation)

In this installation, all the existing data on target computer will be
deleted and clean installation of TBM image will be performed.
Use the following steps to install the TBM image available on DVD to the analyzer
PC:
1. Insert the DVD containing TBM image setup into the DVD drive and restart
the PC.
2. It will show a message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD”. As
suggested, press any key so as to boot from the DVD we entered.
3. Now, the PC will boot from the DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
Loading Windows... progress bar message on the screen.
4. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window i.e.
X:\Windows\System32>.
5. Now, you need to get to the DVD and existing OS drive letter so that we can
start the TBM setup.
(Refer section 21.1.3 Identifying Various Drives for details on finding the
DVD and OS drive letter on the analyzer PC. Note down DVD drive letter
and Drive on which you want to install TBM image of OS).
6. Type the appropriate DVD drive letter followed by colon ‘:’ to enter into the
DVD drive.
For example, if E is the DVD drive letter then type the following command
and press Enter key.
X:\Windows\System32> E:
7. Now, type the following command in the command prompt window and press
Enter key.
TBMSetupWithClean
This will delete all the data from the PC.
A message will be asked to confirm the TBM image installation.
21-2
Type y for yes to continue with the installation or type n to cancel the
installation.
On clicking n, the installation will be canceled and the command prompt will
be displayed.
8. After confirmation, it will clean the entire hard disk and then create two
partitions i.e. C and D drive with C drive size as 35 GB approximately, and
the remaining as D drive. It will then start applying the TBM image on the
PC. This process may take few minutes depending on the configuration of
PC.
9. Once the installation of TBM image is completed, a confirmation message
for the same will be provided on the screen and then the target computer will
restart automatically as shown below.
21-3
10. After restart, it might again ask to boot from DVD. Do not press any key and
let the PC continue to load the windows automatically. It is ok to take the
boot DVD out.
11. It will apply the required settings and may boot again.
12. Finally, it will ask to enter the product key. Enter the product key and click
Next button.
13. Follow and accept the remaining instructions to complete the TBM image
setup on the target computer.
TBM setup image contains driver for specific hardware
configuration, especially for Network Interface and Display. If
the analyzer PC has different hardware components, you may
need to install the corresponding drivers from the PC’s
motherboard utility CD.
21.1.2.2. Installing TBM image - Upgrade/Reinstall

Use the following steps to install the TBM image available on DVD to the analyzer
PC:
1. Insert the DVD containing TBM image setup into the DVD drive and then re-
start the computer.
2. It will show a message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD”. As
suggested, press any key so as to boot from the DVD we entered.
3. Now, the PC will boot from the DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
Loading Windows... Progress bar message on the screen.
4. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window that is
5. Now, you need to get to the DVD and existing OS drive letter so that we can
start the TBM setup.
(Refer section 21.1.3 Identifying Various Drives for details on finding the
DVD and OS drive letter on the analyzer PC. Note down DVD drive letter
and Drive on which you want to install TBM image of OS)
6. Type the appropriate drive letter followed by colon ‘:’ to enter into the DVD
drive.
For example, if E is the DVD drive letter then type the following command
and press Enter key
X:\Windows\System32> E:
Be absolutely sure about the drive where you want to install the
TBM Image. Next step will format the provided drive and all data
on that drive will be lost.
21-4
7. Now, type the following command in the command prompt window and
press Enter key.
TBMSetup
A message will be asked to type the OS drive letter followed by colon.
For example, if C is the OS drive letter then type C: in the command
prompt and press Enter key. If you do not want to continue with the
installation then type exit and press Enter key.
After drive letter is entered in the command prompt, it will ask to confirm
the TBM image installation on the specified drive, type y for yes in the
command prompt to continue with the installation. If you do not want to
continue with the installation type n to exit and return to command prompt.
The same has been shown in the figure.
8. This will format the drive that was provided in step above and then start
installing the TBM image on the PC. This process may take few minutes
depending on the configuration of analyzer PC.
9. Once the installation of TBM image is completed, a confirmation message
for the same will be provided on the screen and then the analyzer PC will
restart automatically as shown below.
21-5
10. It might again ask to boot from DVD. Do not press any key and let the PC
continue to load the windows automatically. It is ok to take the boot DVD
out.
11. It will apply the required settings and may boot again.
12. Finally, it will ask to enter the product key. Enter the product key and click
Next button.
13. Follow and accept the remaining instructions to complete the TBM image
setup on the target computer.
1.In the upgrade installation scenario, if the previous
installation is Windows 7, it is possible that after installing TBM
image, it will show one extra volume which was the hidden
partition in previously installed Windows 7 OS. The typical size
of this partition or volume is normally 100 to 200 MB.
2. TBM setup image contains driver for specific hardware
configuration, especially for Network Interface and Display. If
the analyzer PC has different hardware components, you may
need to install the corresponding drivers from the PC’s
motherboard utility CD.
21.1.3. Identifying Various Drives

Use the following steps to find the DVD/OS drive letter from the command prompt
on the analyzer PC:
21.1.3.1. Finding the DVD Drive Letter

Use the following steps to find the drive letter pertaining to DVD drive. You can
skip the steps (1 to 3) if already done:
1. Boot the PC from the DVD containing the TBM image.
21-6
2. Now, the PC will boot from DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
4. To know the DVD drive letter, just type notepad in the command prompt
window.
It will open the Notepad window. Click on the Save option from the file
menu and then click on the Computer tab on the left to view all the drives
information on the right for the analyzer PC. Note the drive letter for the
DVD drive.
For example, if it is showing CD Drive (E :) or DVD Drive (E :) then, it
means that the drive letter is E.
5. Note down the drive letter.
The following figure shows the graphical representation of the
same.
6. Cancel and Close the Notepad window after confirming the DVD
drive letter.
21.1.3.2. Finding the Existing Operating System (OS) Drive Letter
Use the following steps to find the drive letter pertaining to DVD drive. You can
skip the steps (1 to 3) if already done:
1. Boot the PC from the DVD containing the TBM image
21-7
2. Now, the PC will boot from DVD containing TBM image. It will show the
4. To know the DVD drive letter, just type notepad in the command prompt
window.
It will open the Notepad window. Click on the Save option from the file
menu and then click on the Computer tab on the left to view all the drives
information on the right for the analyzer PC. Browse each drive to find the
following folders:
 Program Files
 Windows
1. Generally these folders are expected to be in OS drive.
However, you will find these folders in multiple drives in case
the target computer has multiple operating systems.
2. These folders will not be available on a clean PC.
5. Note the drive letter containing the above folders because these folders are
expected to be in OS drive.
6. Note down the drive letter.
The following figure shows the graphical representation of the same.
21-8
7. Cancel and Close the Notepad window after confirming the DVD drive
letter.
21.2. Troubleshooting
1. If you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)” while
performing above mention steps then refer section SQL Server 2005
Configuration file for SQL Server 2005 Settings.
2. Incase Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine is already installed then below
mention screen will appear. Installer will not proceed with the MultiXL
installation until user Uninstall Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine
(MSDE) from Control Panel à Add / Remove Program.
Please refer Migration Guide for Database Engine MSDE to SQL Server
Express 2005 from the Installation CD.
3. In case of Windows 7 operating system while installing MultiXL application

below mention screen may appear. Please click on Run Program button to
continue with the MultiXL Installation.
21-9
21.2.1. SQL Server 2005 Configuration

Use the following procedure if you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access
denied)” during Create Database operation or Backup operation in MultiXL
/Database Utility.
1. Click on Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > Configuration
Tools > SQL Server 2005 Manger.
2. In the right panel, select SQL Server (SQLEXPRESS) and choose
Properties option. The following screen will be displayed.
3. Change Built -In Account setting by choosing Local System from

highlighted drop down box.
21-10
4. Click on Apply button. This will display confirmation message for the
Account Change. Click on YES and wait for few minutes. This will restart
the SQL Server Services.
5. After applying the setting “Apply” button will be disabled. Then close all the
windows and continue with MultiXL or Database Utility.
21-11
21-12
21.3. Troubleshooting Guide

SR. Cause Corrective action
No
1 LLS/LLD Sensing 1. Check the earthing Rectify the earthing.
failure. voltage, it should be
less than +5V.
2. Clean the probe- Internally clean with cleaning
internally and solution and DI water.
externally. Externally with Menthyl
alcohol. Scrape lightly with
sand paper.
3. Check the connections Check the wires crimping is
on LLS PCB proper. Tighten them if
connectors wires at the loose.
crimping Recrimp the wires.
4. Check the connection Resolder the wire.
of Black wire connected
to probe.
5. Check the voltage Check the LLS cable.
between –black & blue Replace the cable if broken.
and black & green wire,
it should be approx
4.25V when probe in air
(black wire-
ground).When dipped
in water voltages on
blue & green wire
taking black wire as
ground should be near
to 0V.
6. Check the voltage +5V Check the cable, replace if
between – Red and broken.
Black, voltage -5V Check the +/- 5V on Power
between brown and Supply PCB
black on LLS PCB .
Check the continuity of
LLS wires.
7. Check the voltage +/- Check the cable continuity
5V on Interface pcb on LLS PCB.
connector J26. Replace the cable if it faulty.
8. Check the +/- 5V at the If +/- 5V supply not present
power supply Pcb. on the power supply pcb
replace the pcb.
9. Check the continuity of Resolder the blue and green
FRC cable from IF PCB wire on LLS PCB.
to Arm Assy. Replace the cable.
10. Check the Robo PCB. Check the +/-5V on IF PCB
Replace the PCB if faulty.
21-13
11. Check the carbon Remove the carbon

formation at ball deposits.
bearing of ASP hub.
12. Check the ASP Clean the wire contacts or
earthing of ASP with replace slip ring or base
chassis plate.
13. If +/- 5V coming to LLS Replace the LLS pcb
pcb and all other things
are O.K.
14. .Check continuity of Replace the cable if faulty.
wire cable coming
through the shaft.
2 Autospan Failure. 1. Give the Cuvette Rinse
and then give Auto
Span again to check
the gains.
2. Clean the 1 no. cuvette Replace cuvette if scratches
and then give auto seen.
span again & check.
3. Check the water levels Adjust the level if less than

in the cuvettes. half, and then adjust with the
help of pinch valve.
4. Cuvette overflowing. Check the external tubing for
bent or kept under can.
Check the vacuum pump &
biohazardous pump for
suction & detergent pump
for dispensing detergent
Also check for tubing
blockages and clean
blockages in probe,
manifold, or tubings if
required, or replace if faulty.
5. Check the lamp. Replace if faulty
6. Check Lamp Voltage If fluctuating check for loose
should be 11.8V and contacts of nuts below
not fluctuating. thumb screw or thumb screw
is loose, tighten them.
7. Lamp voltage Check for loose contact of

fluctuating from SMPS. nuts below the thumb screw.
Check the Capacitor at the
SMPS replace if faulty
tighten the screws if loose.
Or Replace SMPS if no
voltage found at terminals.
8. Check the lamp cooling Clean the tubing if blocked
path. or nozzles if blocked.
Replace if broken.
9. Check for particular Clean the filter or replace
21-14
filter showing in red. the filter.
10. Clean the lense & heat Replace heat filter or lense if
filter faulty.
11. Check for alignment of Align to be properly focused
lamp. on the photometer.
12. Check photometer Replace if faulty.
3 Cell Blank error 1. Give cuvette rinse and Clean the cuvettes
then give auto span manually.
again to check the
gains.
2. Clean the 1 no. cuvette Replace cuvette if scratches
and then give auto seen.
span again & check.
3. Check the water levels Adjust the level if less than
in the cuvettes half, and then adjust with the
help of pinch valve.
4. Cuvette overflowing Check the external tubing for
bent or kept under can.
Check the vacuum pump &
biohazardous pump for
suction & detergent pump
for dispensing detergent
Also check for tubing
blockages and clean
blockages in probe,
manifold, or tubings if
required, or replace if faulty.
5. Check the lamp Replace if faulty.
6. Check Lamp Voltage If fluctuating check for loose

should be 11.8V and contacts of nuts below
not fluctuating. thumb screw or thumb screw
is loose, tighten them.
7. Lamp voltage Check the Capacitors at the
fluctuating from SMPS. SMPS replace if faulty
tighten the screws if loose.
Or Replace SPMS if no
voltage found at terminals.
8. Check the lamp cooling Clean the tubing if blocked
path. or nozzles if blocked.
Replace if broken.
9. Check for particular Clean the filter or replace
filter showing in red. the filter.
10. Clean the lense & heat Replace heat filter or lense if
filter. faulty.
11. Check for alignment of Align to be properly focused
lamp on the photometer.
12. Check the photometer Replace the photometer if
faulty.
21-15
4 RCT Rotational Error 1. Check the home and Clean the opto's for dust.
position opto's. At
Home Position the
home opto is off and
position opto should be
ON
2. Check the interrupter Clean it for dust
3. Check the position opto The home opto if off in home

and Home opto position then after 6-7
alignment pulses it should be on. The
position opto should be off
after 7-8 pulses ie 1 pulse
after the home opto lights.
4. Check for faulty optos Replace the home or
position opto if faulty and
ensure its alignment
5. Check for the belt If found very loose then can
tension be tighten the tension such
that the motor is rotating
smoothly and then check the
opto setting by giving pulses
6. Check for 5V of the Check wire continuity or
opto. then change the cables or
5V SMPS.
7. Check if drier probe or Remove the drier chip & run
any other probe of cuvette rinse & check.
laundry is obstructing Align the probe if touching to
the RCT movement. the cuvette.
8. Check the RCT motor Replace if jammed or faulty.
9. Check base plate Replace if faulty
10. Check for loose Reconnect the cables

connections or loose properly or tighten the
crimping of wires. crimping
11. Check 24V at IF pcb Replace IF pcb if faulty
at the driver IC output.
12. Check 24V to the IF Replace if faulty.
from 24V SMPS
13. Check the 230 V AC Rectify accordingly.
supply to SMPS.
14. Check the transformer Replace if faulty.
5 Low Pressure Error 1. Check the 25µ filter in Replace if dirty

the DI water can
2. Check tubing Tighten the tube connection
connection of Di water or replace the tube.
& lamp cooling nozzle
is proper & not
interchanged. Check
for loosely connected
tubing or leakage or cut
21-16
in DI water tube.
3. Check the Di water Clean the head or replace if

pump faulty
4. Check for leakage from Clean it or replace if faulty
the damper
5. Check for breakage of Replace if broken or cut
nozzles of pressure
tank, leakage in
tubings.
6. Leakage from Pressure Rectify or replace the
tank pressure tank.
7. Check for water in the Dry the tube & digital
tubing of digital pressure regulator and refix
pressure regulator the tubing.
8. Check digital pressure Do the proper settings if
indicator setting P1=1.2 different.
bar & P2=0.6
9. Check the pressure If someone turned it
regulator & its anticlockwise then set it
adjustment. right. Replace if faulty.
6 Analyzer not 1. Check the USB Refix the cable or check with
responding or communication cable printer cable.
communication error. for loose connection or
breakage.
2. Check the port settings Correct them.
on the computer.
3. Check the USB driver Reload USB driver.
setting. (No yellow ?)on
the port
4. Check the setting in the Change and correct them if
ASW should be the different.
same in setting &
service check
menu.(Should be the
same as the port on the
computer usually)
5. Check the 5V to the Refix if loose & replace
USB pcb & continuity of cable if faulty. Replace 5V
cable J28 to USB pcb. SMPS if no 5V.
6. Check the USB pcb. Replace if faulty
7. Check whether the Rectify it.

RCT & CRU are
initializing proper.
8. Check the Robo pcb Replace if faulty.
9. Check by fixing USB Change the USB cable

cable on another port position from back to front
on the computer. side port.
21-17
10. Check the hardware of Replace if faulty

port in computer.
11. Check for any virus Reload OS & then the ASW
12. Check the computer Replace if faulty
7 Database connection 1. Double click on MultiXL Wait For few minutes after
Not established. icon after some time computer boots up and then
on startup double click the MultiXL
icon. If still error comes then
follow the next step
2. Check in the task If not seen then check in add
manager in processes or remove programmers if all
whether SQLservr.exe 4 -5 entries of SQLserver
process is seen on 2005 are present.
display.
3. Check for corrupt Reload the database from
database. backup taken previously and
try or if not working then
reload ASW again with blank
data.
8 RCT temperature out 1. Check the Rct heater & Refix firmly. Tighten the
of range error thermistor connections. crimping
2. Check the resistance of The resistance should be
heater coil & supply to 50Ώ for each heater taking
thermistors. black sleeve wire as
common; the supply to
thermistors is 5V each
taking black wire as
common. Replace if heater
or thermistor is open.
3. Check continuity of Replace cables if cut or
cables from from top faulty.
through slipring till
Robo pcb connectors.
4. Check slipring Replace if faulty
5. Check heater IC's Replace if burnt.
6. Check the thermistors Replace pcb if faulty.

supply IC at Robo pcb
7. Check 24V SMPS IF not o/p replace SMP
8. If temperature is seen Then thermistor of cuvette

is room temperature or ring set is ok & heater side is
equal to ambient in faulty. Replace cuvette
service mode ringset if heater shows open.
9. If temperature is The thermistor is faulty.
increasing Replace cuvette ringset.
continuously.
9 RGT temperature out 1. Check the ambient Should be air-conditioned &
of range temperature. 22˚C.
21-18
2. Check for dirt on the Clean if dirty.

reagent cooling unit
heat sink
3. Check the 12V at the Replace wire cable if cut or
peltier terminals. Check 12/18A SMPS if faulty.
continuity of wire.
4. Check for loose Refix if loose
connectors.
5. Check the peltier Replace the reagent cooling
resistance Should be unit if peltier is faulty
40Ώ
6. Check whether the duct If 230V AC not present
fan is working and check the noise filter.
230V AC to duct fan. Replace if faulty. Replace
Check capacitor capacitor if faulty. Replace
2.5uf/400VAC and duct duct fan if faulty
fan
7. Check the airflow fans Replace if faulty
8. Check the reagent Resistance of thermistor

cooling unit thermistor. should be 100KΏ at 37˚C.
Replace if faulty.
10 Arm up/down & 1. Check the arm Set it right
rotational error. assembly for
mechanical obstruction.
2. Check for dirty opto or Clean them if dirty
interrupter.
3. Check whether the Adjust the opto if required
opto's are being cut
properly at the proper
position.
4. Check the belt tension Adjust the belt tension if
for older instruments required
5. Check the bearing in Grease them if required.
the older instruments
6. Check the motor Replace if faulty.
resistance.
7. Check the supply 24V Replace cable if cut or
to motor. faulty. Replace IF board if
faulty.
8. Check if pulley is Tighten the 2 grub screws
become loose. on the pulley.
9. Check the Alignment at Align if required.
each position.
11 Improper Results 1. Check the parameter Set the correct chemistry
for particular chemistry parameters.
if improper result for
particular chemistry. If
for all parameters then
follow the steps below.
2. Check by standardizing Use new reagent of
21-19
or calibrating. calibrator or standard and

recalibrate the test.
3. Check whether the filter Clean filter or change lamp if
gains are proper. all gain are high.
4. Check the lamp Set the lamp voltage to
voltage. 11.8V. Adjust if required.
5. Check the photometer Replace if faulty.
pcb,mirror assembly or
AGC pcb
6. Check the cuvettes Clean if required. Replace if
scratches are found on
cuvettes.
7. Check the dispensing Adjust if required.
of detergent
8. Check whether Replace the drier chip.
cuvettes are dry Check tubes & vacuum
pump. Replace if faulty
9. Check the dispensing Clean the probe if blocked.
of Sample Air bubbles in tube &
syringe. Remove them.
Replace and refit the ferule if
required. Replace syringe if
faulty.
10. Check the alignment of Adjust & align if necessary.
cuvette ringset
11. Check the probe height Should be 12mm above
cuvettes.
12. Check the tube Cut the teflon tube a little &
insertion at probe. reinsert the tube
13. If probe damaged. Replace it. Do probe height
again. Also the Dead
Volume calibration.
14. Check the DI water Should be less than 5.
ppm
15. Check the stirrer Check whether the stirrer is
movement. rotating and alignment. Align
if required.
16. Check the stirrer motor Check for cut wires at the
voltage. bottom of shaft. Replace
cable if faulty or resolder
cable.
17. Check stirrer motor Replace if faulty.
problem
21-20
22. Revision History

Revision Date Revision Description Author
00.01 09-Arpil-2010 First draft SD
2010.01 19-May-2010 Updated images, description, electrical wiring diagrams and SD
descriptions, analyzer dimensions.
2012.01 27-Jan-2012 Updated as per latest Hardware & Software changes ASW PP
version 2011.02 and sent for internal review.
The following changes/features are made in the manual:
 One step installer in installation procedure
 Automatic launch of MultiXL application at PC startup
 New command added in ISE maintenance commands to
read the ISE version.
 Technical specification table and features updated
 All software screens updated as per the latest Software
 Equipment Overview
 Floor Requirements
 Electronics Circuit Descriptions
 Programming Procedures
2012.02 03-Oct-2012 Removed version number and last updated date from footer. PP
Introduced Section wise page numbering style. Service manual
has been updated as per the latest hardware and software
changes (ASW version 2012.03A).
2013.01 24-June-2013 The following changes are updated in the manual: PS/SD
 Software installation procedure updated
 AC and AL in Auto Wash procedure
 BAFO setting for low speed procedure added
 DCF factor
 Clot detector tuning circuit procedure
 MS-3 laser barcode programming procedure
 Updated Electronics Circuit Description
 Updated Electrical Wiring Description
 New section added Appendix
 TBM Image installation procedure added
 Reminder for Auto wash in Maintenance screen
 Description of ISE command is updated
 Screen shot updated of section Checking ISE Pack
details
 ISE clean feature added in Auto maintenance
shutdown
 Accessories checklist and Spare part list updated
22-1
Revision Date Revision Description Author

2014.01 16-June-2014 The following changes are updated in the manual PS
 Electronics Circuit Description
 Electrical Wiring Description.
 Concentration for AC & AL to perform Auto wash
 Error code table.
 Flag list updated.
 Accessories checklist & spares part list.

2015.01 13-Oct-2015 The following changes are updated in the manual SD
 5ml reagent tube adaptor with cap
 New ISE codes for electrodes
 Added 25 micron filter
 Installing driver for touch screen functionality
 SMC valve in place of ckd

 Updated accessories checklist+
2017.01 23-March-2017 The following changes are updated in the manual MB
 Updated Accessories checklist and spares list
 Updated Wiring diagrams
 Added list of supported languages
 Updated Fuse Ratings list
 Added N! (Negative flag)
 Removed tool kit from accessories and spares

2017.02 01-August-2017 The following changes are updated in the manual MB
 Updated RGT barcode alignment procedure
2018.01 30-Sept -2018 Following changes are updated in the manual: PS

 Updated Software installation procedure
 Added Team viewer installation procedure.
 Added Test Loader Device.
 Connecting Test loader device to analyzer PC
 Added IoT PCI-E modem pcb.
 Added troubleshooting guide.
 Added note for Auto span.
 Electronics Circuit descriptions
 Electrical Wiring descriptions.
 Accessories checklist list
2018.02 15-Dec -2018  Updated procedure of connecting test loader PS
device to analyzer PC
22-2
Contact Us
We welcome your feedback about the product. You can reach us at the following.
Address Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GmbH, Mallaustrasse 69 – 73, 68219,

Mannheim, Germany
Phone 49-621- 8799770
Fax 49-621- 8799688
Website www.erbamannheim.com
Email [email protected]
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GmbH, Mallaustrasse 69 - 73, 68219 Mannheim, Germany

Service Manual For XL-640 With ISE - v2018.02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual For XL-640 With ISE - v2018.02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Automatic Clinical Chemistry Analyzer

Document Version: 2018.02

Last Updated: December 15, 2018

Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GmbH, Mallaustrasse 69 - 73, 68219 Mannheim, Germany

Before servicing the analyzer, service engineer should:

1. Read and understand this manual.

2. Be trained by authorized person.

3. Be familiar with the operation of the analyzer.

Keep this manual in an easily accessible place.

Manufacturer is the copyright owner of this document.

This document cannot be modified, reproduced, translated or transmitted in any form or

1. Safety Information......................................................................................................... 1-1

6.4.4. Serial Communication between Computer and Analyzer (Old)................................ 6-15

10.59. Electrical Assy Stirrer 1 & 2 EAS5004 ......................................................... 10-65

13.2.1. Daily Maintenance.................................................................................................. 13-9

15. Accessories, Spares, and Consumables................................................................. 15-1

19. Replacement, Alignment, and Calibration Procedures .......................................... 19-1

Icons Warning About

Warnings and Caution

Notes, Usage, Tips, and

Information or note related to

1.1. Safety Instructions

Never touch patients' samples with bare hands to prevent

1.2. Warning Labels

Some reagents are strong acids or alkalis. Exercise great care so

3.2. Operating Principle

3.2.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry

3.3. Sequence of Operation

2. Cuvette rinsing (cleaning).

3.3.1. Measurement Operation Table

3:18 22 Measure reaction absorbance

8:51 59 Measure reaction absorbance

Measurement principle Latex Turbidimetric Immunoassay, Colorimetry (Rate/End Point), Ion

Sample volume 2-70 μl (adjustable in 0.1 μl step).

Calibration Calibrators used at a time are limited by Curve Type.

Mixers  Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers.

Water supply unit Water consumption: Less Than 13.5 liters/hour.

Safety mechanism Vertical obstruction detection.

4.2. Installation Conditions

Power source/ AC 220 V ± 10%, 50 ± 1 Hz or AC 110 V ± 10%, 60 ± 1 Hz

4.3. Sampling Unit

4.4. Reagent Unit

4.5. Reaction Unit

Reaction liquid volume: 660 µl maximum, 180 µl minimum.

4.6. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit

4.7. Data Processing Unit

Repeat run Execution by repeat run list or auto execution.

Prompts on display alarms.

4.8. Ion Selective Electrodes

4.9. Computer Specifications

The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

4.10. Technical Features of the System

 2 Teflon coated mixer (stirrers) with 3 different mixing speeds

4.10.2. Other Features

The XL-640 uses permanent hard glass cuvettes, thereby eliminating

 12 wavelength diffraction grating.

4.11. Equipment Overview

4.11.2. Left Side View

For ISE unit

4.11.3. Right Side View

5.2. Electrical Requirements

5.3. Site Requirement